Fluke 54200 User manual

4822 872 10182

November 1996, Rev. 4 4/98

© 1996 Fluke Corporation, All rights reserved. Printed in the Netherlands.

All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.

54200

TV Signal Generator

Users Manual

®

Limited Warranty & Limitation of Liability

Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment. Parts, product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days. This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries or to any product which, in Fluke's opinion, has been misused, altered, neglected or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption.

Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to enduser customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke. Warranty support is available if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.

Fluke's warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke's opinion, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to an Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period.

To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center or send the product, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB

Destination), to the nearest Fluke authorized service center. Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid (FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that the failure was caused by misuse, alteration, accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling, Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges (FOB

Shipping Point).

THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN

LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMMAGES

OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, WHETHER ARISING FROM BREACH

OF WARRANTY OR BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, RELIANCE OR ANY

OTHER THEORY.

Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this

Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.

Fluke Corporation Fluke Industrial B.V.

P.O. Box 9090 P.O. Box 90

Everett, WA 7600 AB Almelo

98206-9090

USA

The Netherlands

Service Centers

To locate an authorized service center, visit us on the World Wide Web: http://www.fluke.com

or call Fluke using any of the phone numbers listed below:

+1-888-993-5853 in U.S.A. and Canada

+31-402-675-200 in Europe

+1-425-446-5500 from other countries

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY for

Fluke

TV Signal Generator

54200

Manufacturer

Fluke Industrial B.V.

P.O. Box 90

7600 AB

Almelo

The Netherlands

Statement of Conformity

Based on test results using appropriate standards, the product is in conformity with

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC

Sample tests

Standards used:

EN 55011 (1992)

Radio Frequency Product-Family Emission Standard

EN 50082-1 (1992)

Electromagnetic Compatibility; Generic Immunity Standard:

IEC 801-2 (1984), IEC 801-3 (1984), IEC 801-4 (1988)

EN61000-4-2 (1995), EN61000-4-8(1993), ENV50140(1993)

EN 61010-1 (1994)+ A2 (1995)

Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Use

The tests have been performed in a typical configuration.

This Conformity is indicated by the symbol , i.e. “Conformité européenne”.

Table of Contents

Chapter

1

Title Page

Installation and Safety Instructions ................................................... 1-1

Shipment Note ................................................................................................. 1-5

Initial Inspection............................................................................................... 1-5

Available built-in options Fluke 54200............................................................. 1-5

Introduction...................................................................................................... 1-9

Safety Instructions............................................................................................ 1-9

Maintenance and Repair ............................................................................... 1-9

Grounding (Earthing) ................................................................................... 1-9

Power Cable, Line Voltage Range, and Fuses............................................... 1-10

Operating Position of the Instrument ................................................................ 1-11

Radio Interference Suppression ........................................................................ 1-11

Isolation Transformer ....................................................................................... 1-11

Instrucciones de instalación y de seguridad....................................................... 1-13

Instrucciones de seguridad................................................................................ 1-13

Mantenimiento y reparación ......................................................................... 1-13

Puesta a tierra............................................................................................... 1-13

Cable de conducción eléctrica, rango de tensiones de la linea y fusibles ....... 1-14

Posición de uso del instrumento ....................................................................... 1-15

Supresión de radiointerferencias ....................................................................... 1-15

Transformador de aislamiento........................................................................... 1-15

Istruzioni di installazione e di sicurezza............................................................ 1-17

Istruzioni di sicurezza....................................................................................... 1-17

Manutenzione e riparazione.......................................................................... 1-17

Messa a terra ................................................................................................ 1-17

Cavo elettrico, zona della tensione di rete et fusibili ..................................... 1-18

Posizione di uso dell’apparecchio ..................................................................... 1-19

Schermatura contro i radiodisturbi .................................................................... 1-20

Trasformatore di separazione ............................................................................ 1-20

Opstellings- en veiligheidsinstructies................................................................ 1-21

Veiligheidsinstructies ....................................................................................... 1-21

Onderhoud en reparatie ................................................................................ 1-21 i

54200

Users Manual

2

3

4

Aarding ........................................................................................................ 1-21

Stroomkabel, netspanningsgebied en zekeringen .......................................... 1-22

Bedrijfsstand van het toestel ............................................................................. 1-23

Ontstoring radio-interferentie............................................................................ 1-24

Scheidingstransformator ................................................................................... 1-24

Inledande anvisningar och säkerhetsanvisningar ............................................... 1-25

Säkerhetsanvisningar ........................................................................................ 1-25

Underhåll och reparation .............................................................................. 1-25

Jordning ....................................................................................................... 1-25

Nätkabel, nätspänningsområde och säkringar................................................ 1-26

Instrumentets driftsläge .................................................................................... 1-27

Radio-avstörning .............................................................................................. 1-27

Skiljetransformator........................................................................................... 1-27

Main Features....................................................................................... 2-1

Introduction...................................................................................................... 2-3

Main Features................................................................................................... 2-3

Getting Started..................................................................................... 3-1

Introduction...................................................................................................... 3-3

Getting Started ................................................................................................. 3-3

General Information ..................................................................................... 3-3

Turning the Instrument on ............................................................................ 3-3

Self-test Routine............................................................................................... 3-3

Brief Checking Procedure................................................................................. 3-4

Test Equipment: ........................................................................................... 3-4

Instrument Settings and Checks.................................................................... 3-4

Operation and Application................................................................................ 3-13

Control Elements, Display and Connectors................................................... 3-13

Front Panel .............................................................................................. 3-13

Rear Panel................................................................................................ 3-17

How to Use the Instrument.................................................................. 4-1

Introduction...................................................................................................... 4-3

Operating via Keyboard.................................................................................... 4-3


Display .................................................................................................... 4-3

Keyboard ................................................................................................. 4-6

Instrument Settings ...................................................................................... 4-7

TV Standard............................................................................................. 4-7

Video Settings.......................................................................................... 4-10

Sound Settings ......................................................................................... 4-12

Teletext, VPS, PDC, CC, and WSS.......................................................... 4-14

Vision Carrier Frequency Settings (RF Carrier)........................................ 4-15

Vision Carrier Level Setting (RF Level)................................................... 4-18

Video Amplitude Setting.......................................................................... 4-22

Chroma Amplitude Setting....................................................................... 4-26

Test Patterns ............................................................................................ 4-30

Storing and Recalling of Settings ................................................................. 4-35

Storing of Instrument Settings.................................................................. 4-35

Recalling of Instrument Settings .............................................................. 4-37

Digital Data and Text ............................................................................... 4-39 ii

5

Contents (continued)

Description and Applications of the Test Patterns ............................................. 4-40

Circle ........................................................................................................ 4-42

Center Cross with Border Castellations ........................................................ 4-43

Dots ........................................................................................................ 4-45

Crosshatch ................................................................................................... 4-46

Checkerboard ............................................................................................... 4-47

White Pattern ............................................................................................... 4-48

Multiburst .................................................................................................... 4-48

Greyscale ..................................................................................................... 4-49

DEM Pattern ................................................................................................ 4-49

DEM 1 (PAL) .......................................................................................... 4-49

DEM 1 (NTSC)........................................................................................ 4-51

DEM 1 (SECAM) .................................................................................... 4-52

DEM 2 (PAL) .......................................................................................... 4-53

DEM 2 (NTSC)........................................................................................ 4-53

DEM 2 (SECAM) .................................................................................... 4-54

Purity ........................................................................................................ 4-55

PLUGE ........................................................................................................ 4-56

Color Bar ..................................................................................................... 4-57

Full Field Color Bar................................................................................. 4-57

Split Field Color Bar................................................................................ 4-58

SMPTE Color Bar.................................................................................... 4-59

Horizontal Color Bar................................................................................ 4-60

Color Temperature Adjustment .................................................................... 4-60

VCR Test ..................................................................................................... 4-62

VCR 1 .................................................................................................... 4-62

VCR 2 .................................................................................................... 4-63

Standard Resolution Test ......................................................................... 4-64

High Resolution Test ............................................................................... 4-64

Writing Current Adjustment..................................................................... 4-64

Digital Scan Test.......................................................................................... 4-64

ADC Check 1........................................................................................... 4-65

ADC Check 2........................................................................................... 4-66

Moving Block .......................................................................................... 4-67

Progressive Scan Check 1 ........................................................................ 4-67



DIVERSE .................................................................................................... 4-69

EHT Test ................................................................................................. 4-69

IRS17 .................................................................................................... 4-70

Combined Test Patterns................................................................................ 4-71

CIRCLE................................................................................................... 4-71

Twofold Combinations of Patterns ........................................................... 4-71

Threefold Combinations of Patterns ......................................................... 4-73

Fourfold Combinations of Patterns........................................................... 4-73

Insertion-Reference Signal (IRS) .................................................................. 4-74

Function Reference ............................................................................. 5-1

TELETEXT...................................................................................................... 5-3

General ........................................................................................................ 5-3

UK-Teletext ............................................................................................. 5-3

TOP (Table of Pages)............................................................................... 5-3

FLOF (Full Level-One Features) / FASTEXT .......................................... 5-5

VPT (Video Recorder Programming by Teletext)..................................... 5-5 iii

54200

Users Manual

Video Recorder Programming by Teletext with PSF ................................ 5-7

Contents of Teletext Pages TOP/FLOF .................................................... 5-9

DIDON ANTIOPE Teletext ......................................................................... 5-10

Contents of DIDON ANTIOPE Text Pages .............................................. 5-10

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-12

Checking and Adjusting ........................................................................... 5-13

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)......................................................................... 5-14

General ........................................................................................................ 5-14

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-15

WSS Auto Mode...................................................................................... 5-16

WSS Manual Mode.................................................................................. 5-17

Status Bits Transmission Scheme for Wide Screen Signalling .................. 5-18

Programming the Real Time Clock................................................................... 5-20

PDC and VPS................................................................................................... 5-22

General ........................................................................................................ 5-22

PDC Description .......................................................................................... 5-22

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-23

VPS Description........................................................................................... 5-26

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-27

Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16 ................... 5-30

CLOSED CAPTION (CC) ............................................................................... 5-32

General ........................................................................................................ 5-32

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-34

Memory Contents .................................................................................... 5-35

Analog Mono Sound ........................................................................................ 5-38

General ........................................................................................................ 5-38

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-38

Analog Stereo/Dual Sound ............................................................................... 5-39

General ........................................................................................................ 5-39

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-40

NICAM Sound ................................................................................................. 5-42

The NICAM-728 Transmission Mode ...................................................... 5-42

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-44

Applications............................................................................................. 5-46

Test functions .......................................................................................... 5-46

BTSC Sound .................................................................................................... 5-48

General ........................................................................................................ 5-48

Definitions ............................................................................................... 5-50

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-50

Explanations of BTSC Test Modes .......................................................... 5-53

Applications............................................................................................. 5-54

Recommendations.................................................................................... 5-55

Sound Operating Modes ................................................................................... 5-56

External Modulation......................................................................................... 5-60

External Video Modulation .......................................................................... 5-60

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-61

External Sound Modulation.......................................................................... 5-61

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-63

Synchronization Outputs and Triggering ...................................................... 5-64

Operating Hints, Out of Range and Error Messages .......................................... 5-65

Operating Hints............................................................................................ 5-65

Out of Range Messages ................................................................................ 5-65

Error Messages............................................................................................. 5-66

Remote Control Specific Error Messages ..................................................... 5-66 iv

6

7


Remote Control .................................................................................... 6-1

Introduction...................................................................................................... 6-3

IEEE-488 Interface ........................................................................................... 6-3

Instrument Address ...................................................................................... 6-3

Interface Functions....................................................................................... 6-6

RS-232 Interface .............................................................................................. 6-7

Instrument Configuration ............................................................................. 6-7

Interface Functions and Wiring..................................................................... 6-11


Remote Control Commands ............................................................................. 6-13

Program Message Syntax ............................................................................. 6-13

Message Terminator ..................................................................................... 6-13

Service Request (SRQ) and Status Registers................................................. 6-14

54200 ‘Standard Event Status Register’.................................................... 6-15

Common Commands and Queries (IEEE-488.2)........................................... 6-16

System Data............................................................................................. 6-16

Internal Operations................................................................................... 6-17

Synchronization ....................................................................................... 6-19

Status and Event ...................................................................................... 6-20

Save and Recall Instrument Settings......................................................... 6-21

Device Specific Messages ............................................................................ 6-21

Vision Carrier .......................................................................................... 6-22

TV-System............................................................................................... 6-23

Video .................................................................................................... 6-25

Sound .................................................................................................... 6-31

Digital Services........................................................................................ 6-35

Miscellaneous commands......................................................................... 6-39

Device Setting Queries............................................................................. 6-40

Programming Examples ................................................................................... 6-43

Example for the IEEE-488 Interface ............................................................. 6-43

Example for the RS-232 Interface................................................................. 6-46

Error Messages................................................................................................. 6-50

Conversion Table for the PM 5415/18 Command Set to 54200 Commands ...... 6-51

Specifications ...................................................................................... 7-1

Safety and EMC Requirements......................................................................... 7-3

Performance Characteristics and Specifications ................................................ 7-3

Video and RF ................................................................................................... 7-4

Outputs ........................................................................................................ 7-4

CVBS Video............................................................................................ 7-4

CVBS SYNC, LINE SYNC and FIELD Synchronization......................... 7-4

EURO AV Control Voltages .................................................................... 7-4

Terrestrial RF Carrier ............................................................................... 7-5

Video Modulation .................................................................................... 7-6

Inputs ........................................................................................................ 7-6

Video IN .................................................................................................. 7-6

Video ........................................................................................................ 7-7


Luminance ............................................................................................... 7-7

Chrominance............................................................................................ 7-7

Patterns .................................................................................................... 7-8

Sound ............................................................................................................ 7-10

Outputs ........................................................................................................ 7-10

Sound Carrier........................................................................................... 7-10 v

54200

Users Manual

8

Audio and Euro AV ................................................................................. 7-10

BTSC MPX and FM Stereo Pilot ............................................................. 7-10

NICAM Data and NICAM Clock ............................................................. 7-11

Inputs ........................................................................................................ 7-11

Audio, Euro AV and MTS Multiplex ....................................................... 7-11

Mono ........................................................................................................ 7-11

Sound Carrier........................................................................................... 7-11

Modulation .............................................................................................. 7-12

Stereo /Dual ................................................................................................. 7-12

Sound Carrier 1........................................................................................ 7-12

Sound Carrier 2........................................................................................ 7-12

Modulation .............................................................................................. 7-13

Identification/Subcarrier........................................................................... 7-13

NICAM Stereo ............................................................................................. 7-13

Sound Carrier 1........................................................................................ 7-13

Sound Carrier 2........................................................................................ 7-14

Modulation .............................................................................................. 7-14

BTSC Stereo ................................................................................................ 7-14

Sound Carrier........................................................................................... 7-14

Modulation .............................................................................................. 7-15

Identification............................................................................................ 7-15

Digital Services ................................................................................................ 7-16

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)..................................................................... 7-16

Teletext DIDON ANTIOPE (CCIR System A)............................................. 7-16

Teletext UK (CCIR System B) ..................................................................... 7-17

PDC ........................................................................................................ 7-17

VPS ........................................................................................................ 7-17

Closed Caption............................................................................................. 7-18

RGB, YC (S-VHS/Hi-8), YCrCb Outputs ........................................................ 7-19

RGB Outputs ............................................................................................... 7-19

YC Outputs .................................................................................................. 7-19

YCrCb Outputs ............................................................................................ 7-19

Feedthrough Connection .............................................................................. 7-20

IEEE-488 and RS-232 Interface........................................................................ 7-20

IEEE-488 Interface....................................................................................... 7-20

RS-232 Interface .......................................................................................... 7-20

General Specifications ...................................................................................... 7-21

Environmental Conditions............................................................................ 7-21

Power Requirements .................................................................................... 7-22

Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................... 7-22

Accessories ...................................................................................................... 7-23

Standard....................................................................................................... 7-23

Optional ....................................................................................................... 7-24

Brief Functional Test ........................................................................... 8-1

Brief Functional Test........................................................................................ 8-3

Introduction.................................................................................................. 8-3

Recommended Test Equipment .................................................................... 8-3

Self-Test Routine ......................................................................................... 8-4

Function Verification........................................................................................ 8-5

TV Standard PAL......................................................................................... 8-5

Video Part, using RF Connection ............................................................. 8-5

Video Part, using Y/C Connection (S-VHS, Hi-8).................................... 8-7

Sound Part ............................................................................................... 8-8 vi


Teletext, VPS, PDC, and WSS (Digital Services)..................................... 8-12

Wide Screen Signalling Bits (WSS .......................................................... 8-14

TV Standard NTSC ...................................................................................... 8-15



Sound Part ............................................................................................... 8-18

Closed Caption (Digital Service CC)........................................................ 8-21

TV Standard SECAM................................................................................... 8-23



Sound Part ............................................................................................... 8-26


Appendices

E

F

G

A

B

C

D

TV Systems Used in Various Countries ............................................... A-1

VHF/UHF-Channel Frequencies for Different TV Systems .................. B-1

Default Settings for Countries .............................................................. C-1

Spectras of TV Audio Systems............................................................. D-1

Nomenclature of Color Bar Signals...................................................... E-1

Menu Trees.......................................................................................... F-1

Pattern Popup Menus ........................................................................... G-1

Index vii

List of Tables

Table Title Page

1-1.

Display Indication of built-in Options.................................................................. 1-8

1-2.

Delivered Power Cable ........................................................................................ 1-10

1-3.

Cable suministrado .............................................................................................. 1-14

1-4.

Cavo di alimentatione fornito in dotazione........................................................... 1-18

1-5.

Meegelverde netkabel .......................................................................................... 1-22

1-6.

Medleverera nätkabel........................................................................................... 1-26

3-1.

EURO AV IN...................................................................................................... 3-19

3-2.

EURO AV OUT .................................................................................................. 3-19

3-3.

Y/C OUT............................................................................................................. 3-19

4-1.

Circle .................................................................................................................. 4-42

4-2.

Center Cross........................................................................................................ 4-44

4-3.

Dots..................................................................................................................... 4-45

4-4.

Crosshatch........................................................................................................... 4-47

4-5.

PLUGE ............................................................................................................... 4-56

4-6.

Full Field Color Bar ............................................................................................ 4-57

4-7.

Color Temperature Adjustment............................................................................ 4-60

4-7.

Color Temperature Adjustment............................................................................ 4-61

4-8.

VCR 1 ................................................................................................................. 4-62

5-1.

TOP Teletext Remote Control ............................................................................. 5-4

5-2.

PDC/VPT Teletext Page 300, Transport Method A.............................................. 5-6

5-3.

PDC/VPT Teletext Page 300, Transport Method B .............................................. 5-7

5-4.

DIDON ANTIOPE Text Pages ............................................................................ 5-10

5-5.

Teletext Systems and Modes................................................................................ 5-12

5-6.

WSS Auto Mode ................................................................................................. 5-16

5-7.

WSS Status Bits Transmission Scheme ............................................................... 5-18

5-8.

VPS Information ................................................................................................. 5-26

5-9.

Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16 .............................. 5-30

5-9.

Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16 (cont) .................... 5-31

5-10.

Closed Caption Field Packets .............................................................................. 5-33

5-11.

Analog Stereo/Dual Audio Signals, Systems B/G and D/K .................................. 5-39

5-12.

Analog Stereo/Dual Audio Signals, System Mk (Korean Stereo) ......................... 5-40

5-13.

54200 Analog Stereo/Dual Sound Systems .......................................................... 5-40

5-14.

NICAM-728 Transmission, 54200 NICAM Systems ........................................... 5-42

5-15.

BTSC Sound Carrier Modulation Standards......................................................... 5-49

5-16.

54200 BTSC Sound Systems............................................................................... 5-50 ix

54200

Users Manual

5-17.

Sound Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 5-56

5-18.

Sound Operating Modes (cont) ............................................................................ 5-57

5-18.


5-18.


5-18.

External Video Modulation Modes ...................................................................... 5-60

5-19.

External Sound Mode .......................................................................................... 5-62

6-1.

Fluke 54200 'Status Byte Register'....................................................................... 6-14

6-2.

Instrument Default Settings after Reset (*RST) ................................................... 6-17

6-3.

Telephone Country Code ..................................................................................... 6-23

6-4.

Conversion Table ................................................................................................ 6-51 x

Chapter 1

Installation and Safety Instructions

Title Page

Shipment Note ................................................................................................. 1-5

Initial Inspection............................................................................................... 1-5

Available built-in options Fluke 54200............................................................. 1-5

Introduction...................................................................................................... 1-9

Safety Instructions............................................................................................ 1-9

Maintenance and Repair ............................................................................... 1-9

Grounding (Earthing) ................................................................................... 1-9

Power Cable, Line Voltage Range and Fuses................................................ 1-10

Operating Position of the Instrument ................................................................ 1-11

Radio Interference Suppression ........................................................................ 1-11

Isolation Transformer ....................................................................................... 1-11

Instrucciones de instalación y de seguridad....................................................... 1-13

Instrucciones de seguridad................................................................................ 1-13

Mantenimiento y reparación ......................................................................... 1-13

Puesta a tierra............................................................................................... 1-13

Cable de conducción eléctrica, rango de tensiones de la linea y fusibles ....... 1-14

Posición de uso del instrumento ....................................................................... 1-15

Supresión de radiointerferencias ....................................................................... 1-15

Transformador de aislamiento........................................................................... 1-15

Istruzioni di installazione e di sicurezza............................................................ 1-17

Istruzioni di sicurezza....................................................................................... 1-17

Manutenzione e riparazione.......................................................................... 1-17

Messa a terra ................................................................................................ 1-17

Cavo elettrico, zona della tensione di rete et fusibili ..................................... 1-18

Posizione di uso dell’apparecchio ..................................................................... 1-19

Schermatura contro i radiodisturbi .................................................................... 1-20

Trasformatore di separazione ............................................................................ 1-20

1-1

54200

Users Manual

Opstellings- en veiligheidsinstructies ............................................................... 1-21

Veiligheidsinstructies....................................................................................... 1-21

Onderhoud en reparatie................................................................................ 1-21

Aarding ....................................................................................................... 1-21

Stroomkabel, netspanningsgebied en zekeringen.......................................... 1-22

Bedrijfsstand van het toestel ............................................................................ 1-23

Otnstoring radio-interferentie........................................................................... 1-24

Scheidingstransformator .................................................................................. 1-24

Inledande anvisningar och säkerhetsanvisningar............................................... 1-25

Säkerhetsanvisningar ....................................................................................... 1-25

Underhåll och reparation.............................................................................. 1-25

Jordning ...................................................................................................... 1-25

Nätkabel, nätspänningsområde och säkringar ............................................... 1-26

Instrumentets driftsläge.................................................................................... 1-27

Radio-avstörning ............................................................................................. 1-27

Skiljetransformator .......................................................................................... 1-27

1-2

GB


Shipment Note

1

Figure 1-1. Front Panel

Figure 1-2. Rear Panel

1-3

54200

Users Manual

1-4

GB

Shipment Note

The following parts should be included in the shipment:

1 TV Signal Generator 54200

1 Users Manual (standard)

1 Power Cable (standard)

1 RF Cable BNC

- IEC 169-2 male connector

1 IEC 162-2 male - F-male adapter

1 SCART - SCART cable

1 SCART

- 3 x Cinch cable

1 Y/C cable (only with RGB option)


Shipment Note

1

Initial Inspection

Check that the shipment is complete and note whether any damage has occurred during transport. If the contents are incomplete or there is damage, file a claim with the carrier immediately, and notify the Fluke Sales and Service organization to facilitate the repair or replacement of the instrument.

The functions of the instrument can be checked by using the Brief Functional Test in

Chapter 8 of this manual.

Available built-in options Fluke 54200

In addition the instruments shows the built-in options in a submenu on the display.

You can select this submenu via softkeys when the main screen is displayed.

If the display shows a different screen, press the enter softkey (F5) so often until the main screen appears or switch the instrument off, wait five seconds, and switch it on again.

The built-in options are marked on the type plate on the rear of the instrument.

1-5

54200

Users Manual

The instrument shows the main screen with the current settings:

Figure 1-3. Main Screen

• Press the support softkey (F5).

• The display shows the support submenu.

1-6

Figure 1-4. Support Submenu

• Press the edit softkey (F3).

• The display shows the support system info screen.

GB


Available built-in options Fluke 54200

1

Figure 1-5. Support System Info Submenu

• Press the view softkey (F3).

• A popup menu appears, showing the options.

Figure 1-6. Popup Menu showing installed Options

• Use the é or the ê softkey (F1 or F2) to scroll through the table.

Installed option are displayed in black letters, not installed options are display in grey letters.

1-7

54200

Users Manual

The meanings of the shortcuts are the following:

54200

Display Indication

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

TXT

PDC

CC

Table 1-1. Display Indication of built-in Options

Description

RGB

GPIB

STEREO

NICAM

BTSC

PAL Standard

NTSC Standard

SECAM Standard

Teletext and Widescreen

Signalling Bits

PDC / VPS (only in combination with option 54021)

Closed Caption

RGB + YCrCb + YC

IEEE / RS-232 Interface

Mono Sound + Analog Stereo

Mono Sound + NICAM Sound

Mono Sound + BTSC Sound

Options

Type numbers

54011

54012

54013

54021

54022

54023

54031

54032

54061

54062

54063

• Press the esc softkey (F4) to return to the support system info submenu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to return to the support submenu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) again to return to the main screen.

If you want additional options that are not built-in in your instrument at the moment, please contact you local Fluke Sales Organization.

1-8

GB


Introduction

1

Introduction

This chapter should be read before unpacking, installing, and operating the instrument. It describes grounding, power cables, and fuses.

It also contains the Installation and Safety Instructions in the following languages:

Spanish, Italian, Dutch and Swedish.

Safety Instructions

Upon delivery from the factory the instrument complies with the required safety regulations, see Chapter 7. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, carefully follow the instructions below.

Maintenance and Repair

Failure and excessive stress:

If the instrument is suspected of being unsafe, remove it from operation immediately and secure it against any unintended operation. The instrument is considered to be unsafe when any of the following conditions exist:

• It shows physical damage.

• It does not function.

• It is stressed beyond the tolerable limits (e.g., during storage and transportation).

Disassembling the Instrument:

Warning

Calibration, maintenance, and repair of the instrument must be performed only by trained personnel who are aware of the hazards involved. To avoid electric shock, do not remove the cover unless you are qualified to do so.

Before removing the cover, disconnect the instrument from all power sources. The capacitors in the instrument may remain charged for several seconds after all power has been disconnected.

Grounding (Earthing)

Before any other connection is made, the instrument shall be connected to a protective earth conductor using the three-wire power cable.

The power plug shall be inserted only into a grounded outlet. Do not defeat the protective action by using of an extension cord without a grounded conductor.

Warning

Any interruption of the protective ground conductor inside or outside the instrument or disconnection of the protective ground terminal will make the instrument dangerous. Do not

Intentionally interrupt the protective ground conductor.

The circuit ground potential is applied to the external contacts of the BNC connectors and is connected to the instrument case. The external contacts of the BNC connectors must not be used to connect a protective conductor.

1-9

54200

Users Manual

Power Cable, Line Voltage Range, and Fuses

Different power cables are available for the local line connectors. On delivery from the factory the instrument is supplied with the ordered power cable:

Table 1-2. Delivered Power Cable

Type No.

54200/XX1

54200/XX3

54200/XX4

54200/XX5

54200/XX8

Delivered

Power Cable

Universal Europe

North America

England (UK)

Switzerland

Australia

Before plugging in the power cable, make sure that the instrument is suitable for the correct line voltage.

Note

When the mains plug has to be adapted to the local situation, such adaptation should be done by a qualified technician only.

The instrument has a switched-mode mains power supply that covers most nominal voltage ranges in use: ac voltages from 100 to 240 V (r.m.s.). This obviates the need to adapt to the local line voltage. The nominal line frequency is 50 to 60 Hz.

Warning

The instrument shall be disconnected from all voltage sources when a fuse is to be renewed.

The fuses are located in a fuse holder of the input power module at the rear panel. When the line fuses need replacing, proceed as follows:

• disconnect the power cable from the power module.

• press the clip of the fuseholder and pull out the holder, see illustration.

• fit new fuses of the correct rating (according to IEC127 T1.6A or CSA/UL 198G

T1.6A) and refit the fuseholder.

Warning

To avoid fire hazards, make sure the instrument fuses are of the type and current rating specified. Do not use repaired fuses and/or short-circuited fuseholders. Do not defeat this important safety feature.

1-10

GB


Operating Position of the Instrument

1

Operating Position of the Instrument

The instrument can be operated on a horizontal surface in a flat position or in a sloping position with the tilting feet folded down. Ensure that the ventilation holes are free of obstruction. Do not position the instrument in direct sunlight or on any surface that produces or radiates heat.

Radio Interference Suppression

Radio interference of the instrument is suppressed and checked carefully. If radio frequency interferences occur in connection with other poorly suppressed instruments, further suppression actions may be required.

Isolation Transformer

Because most MTV and CTV receivers are constructed with the chassis potentially 'live', it is sensible precaution to power the receiver under test using a suitable isolating transformer.

This permits direct connection of the television chassis to the earth terminals of any test instrument thus providing a common signal path and reducing the risk of electric shock.

1-11

54200

Users Manual

1-12

E


Instrucciones de instalación y de seguridad

1

Instrucciones de instalación y de seguridad

Instrucciones de seguridad

El aparato sale de fábrica, técnicamente, en perfectas condiciones de seguridad (ver cap. 7). Para que se conserven estas condiciones, y para evitar riesgos en el uso, hay que seguir cuidadosamente las indicaciones siguientes.

Mantenimiento y reparación

Defectos y esfuerzos extraordinarios:

Si se piensa que el aparato ya no puede funcionar sin riesgo, hay que apagarlo y asegurarse de que no se ponga en funcionamiento inadvertidamente. Este es el caso:

• cuando el aparato presenta daños visibles,

• cuando el aparato no funciona,

• luego de haber sido sometido a esfuerzos excesivos de cualquier tipo (p.e.en el almacenaje o el transporte) que sobrepasan los límites permitidos.

Abrir el aparato:

Advertencia

AI abrir algunas tapas o al desmontar piezas con herramientas pueden quedar al descubierto partes bajo tensión eléctrica.

También puede haber tensión en los puntos de conexión.

Antes de abrir el aparato hay que desconectarlo de todas las fuentes de alimentación.

Si es inevitable realizar un calibrado, mantenimiento o reparacién con el aparato abierto que se encuentra bajo tensión, sólo debe hacerio un técnico cualificado que conozca los riesgos que existen. Los condensadores del aparato pueden seguir estando cargados aùn cuando esté haya sido desconectado de todas las fuentes de alimentación.

Puesta a tierra

Antes de hacer alguna conexión hay que conectar el aparato a un contacter protección mediante el cable de alimentación de tres conductores.

El enchufe de la red debe ser insertado sólo en tomacorrientes con contacto de seguridad de tierra.

No se deben anular estas medidas de seguridad, p.e. usando un cable de extensión sin contactor de protección.

Advertencia

Toda interrupción del contactor de protección dentro o fuera

del aparato, o la separación de la conexión de la puesta

protectora peligrosa. Se prohíbe hacer la interrupción expresamente.

1-13

54200

Users Manual

Los contactos exteriores de los casquillos BNC tienen el potencial del neutro y están conectados a la carcasa. La puesta a terra a través de los contactos exteriores de los casquillos BNC es inadecuada.

Cable de conducción eléctrica, rango de tensiones de la linea y fusibles

Existen diferentes cables de conducción eléctrica para los terminales de la conexión a la red. El instrumento se suministra desde fábrica con el cable de conducción eléctrica pedido.

Table 1-3. Cable suministrado

Tipo de aparato

54200/XX1

54200/XX3

54200/XX4

54200/XX5

54200/XX8

Cable suministrado

Europa

Norteamérica

Inglaterra (U.K.)

Suiza

Australia

Antes de enchufar el cable de conducción eléctrica asegurarse que el instrumento esté ajustado a la tensión correcta de la red.

Nota

Para evitar daños o peligros de muerte, toda modificación en los cables de conducción eléctrica para adaptarlos a la corriente local deberá ejecutarse por personal cualificado que tiene conocimientos suficientes de los peligros existentes.

El instrumento tiene una conexión a la red conmutable que abarca los rangos de voltajes nominales más usuales: tensiones alternas desde desde 100 hasta 240 (valor efectivo).

Con esto ya no es necesario adaptar la tensión de la red local. La frecuencia nominal de la red es de 50 a 60 Hz.

Advertencia

Cuando se vaya a cambiar un fusible se ha de desconectar el instrumento de toda fuente de voltaje.

Los fusibles están colocados en el portafusibles del módulo de potencia de entrada del panel posterior. Para cambiar los fusibles del circuito proceder del siguiente modo:

• desconectar el cable de corriente del módulo de potencia,

• presionar la sujeción de apriete del portafusibles y sacar el portafusibles, ver la figura,

• colocar los nuevos fusibles con la potencia correcta (conforme a IEC127 T1,6A o

CSA/UL 198G T1,6A) y montar otra vez el portafusibles.

1-14

E


Posición de uso del instrumento

1

Advertencia

Asegúrese que el nuevo fusible sea del tipo y de la potencia especificada. El uso de fusibles reparados y/o el cortocircuito de portafusibles está prohibido. No pase por alto esta indicación de seguridad importante.

Posición de uso del instrumento

El instrumento se puede usar sobre una superficie plana en posición horizontal o inclinada con el pie inclinable plegado hacia abajo. Si se cierra las patas de soporte et aparato puede utilizarse en posición inclinada. Los datos técnicos del capituto 7 se refieren a las posiciones indicadas. El aparato no se debe colocar nunca sobre una superficie que produzca o irradie calor ni exponerlo a los rayos directos del sol.

Supresión de radiointerferencias

En el aparato se han suprimido cuidadosamente todas las interferencias, habiéndose sometido éste también a prueba. AI conectarlo a unidades básicas y a otras unidades periféricas cuyas interferencias no se han suprimido correctamente, pueden generarse interferencias que en algunos casos exigirán medidas adicionales para suprimirlas.

Transformador de aislamiento

Debido a quel el chasis de muchos televisores se encuentra bajo tensión, por motivos de seguridad es necesario utilizar el receptor a probar a través de un transformador de seccionamiento adecuado. Esto permite establecer un acoplamiento directo del chasis de los televisores con la conexión al contactor de protección de algún aparto de prueba, con

Io que se reduce el riesgo de una descarga eléctrica.

1-15

54200

Users Manual

1-16

I


Istruzioni di installazione e di sicurezza

1

Istruzioni di installazione e di sicurezza

Istruzioni di sicurezza

L'apparecchio viene fornito dalla fabbrica perfettamente sicuro e funzionante dal punto di vista tecnico (vedi Cap. 7). Per preservarlo in condizioni ottimali e garantirne un corretto funzionamento, attenersi scrupolosamente alle seguenti istruzioni.

Manutenzione e riparazione

Funzionamento anomalo a sollecitazioni eccessive:

Qualora il funzionamento non risultasse regolare, spegnere subito l'apparecchio e prevenirne ogni accensione accidentale. Le precauzioni di cui sopra vanno adottate nei seguenti casi:

• se l'apparecchio mostra dei danni visibili,

• se l'apparecchio non funziona più,

• se l'apparecchio è stato sottoposto a sollecitazioni (ad esempio durante il magazzinaggio, il trasporto, ecc.) oltre i limiti di tolleranza ammessi.

Apertura dell'apparecchio:

Avvertimento

Se i coperchi o alcune parti dell'apparecchio vengono rimossi con appositi attrezzi, può darsi che risultino esposti dei componenti interni sotto tensione. Anche i punti di connessione possono essere sotto tensione. Prima di aprire l'apparecchio occorre quindi disinnestarto dalle relative prese di corrente.

Se fosse necessario eseguire intervenu di calibrazione,

manutenzione o riparazione con l'apparecchio aperto e sotto tensione, rivolgersi a personale specializzato che conosca bene i probabili rischi nelle procedure da adottare. Potrebbe darsi che i condensatori dentro all'apparecchio siano ancora carichi anche se l'apparecchio è stato disinnestato dalle relative prese di corrente.

Messa a terra

Prima di eseguire un qualsiasi collegamento, mediante il cavo di alimentazione tripolare l'apparecchio deve essere allacciato ad un conduttore di protezione.

La spina del cavo di alimentazione deve essere inserita soltanto in una presa munita di contatto di messa a terra.

Questa norma resta comunque valida, anche se si utilizza un cavo di prolunga senza conduttore di protezione.

1-17

54200

Users Manual

Avvertimento

E' estremamente pericoloso interrompere il conduttore di protezione interno o esterno all'apparecchio o i contatti di messa a terra. Evitare quindi di farlo intenzionalmente.

I contatti esterni delle prese BNC trasferiscono il potenziale del punto neutro del circuito e sono collegate all'incvolucro dell'apparecchio. E' vietata la messa a terra di sicurezza tramite i contatti esterni delle prese BNC.

Cavo elettrico, zona della tensione di rete et fusibili

Per i morsetti di allacciamento alla rete locale esistono differenti tipi di cavi. Se la fornitura avviene dalla fabbrica, l’apparecchio viene già fornito con il cavo elettrico ordinato.

Table 1-4. Cavo di alimentatione fornito in dotazione

Tipo de apparecchio

54200/XX1

54200/XX3

54200/XX4

54200/XX5

54200/XX8

Cavo di alimentatione fornito in dotazione

Europa

Nord America

Inghilterra (U.K.)

Svizzera

Australia

Prima di inserire il cavo elettrico, assicuratevi che l’apparecchio sia adatto alla tensione corretta della rete.

Indicazione

Onde evitare il pericolo di ferimenti o di morte, la modifica al cavo elettrico per l’adattamento del cavo alla corrente locale deve essere eseguita solamente da personale del Service qualificato, poichè questo conosce esattamente gli eventuali pericolo.

L’apparecchio è dotato di un allacciamento alla rete commutabile che comprende le zone della tensione di rete più usuali: tensioni alternate da 100 a 240 V (valore effettivo). Per questo motivo, non è necessario adattare la tensione della rete locale. La frequenza di rete nominale è da 50 a 60 Hz.

1-18

I


Posizione di uso dell’apparecchio

1

Avvertimento

Quando si sostituisce un fusibile, l’apparecchio deve essere disinserito da ogni fonte di energia.

I fusibili si trovano nel portafusibili sul quadro posteriore del modulo della potenza di entrata. Per sostituire i fusibili del circuito, procedere come segue:

• staccare il cordone di alimentazione dal modulo di potenza;

• premere il serraggio a morsetto del portafusibili ed estrarre il portafusibili, vedi figura;

• inserire nuovi fusibili badando che la potenza sia giusta (conformi a IEC127 T1,6A oppure CSA/UL 198G T1,6A), e rimontare il portafusibili.

Avvertimento

Assicuratevi che i nuovi fusibili siano del tipo e della potenza specificata. È vietato l’uso di fusibili riparati e/o il cortocircuitare del portafusibili. Rispettate queste importanti misure di sicurezza.

Posizione di uso dell’apparecchio

L’apparecchio può essere usato su una superficie orizzontale ed in posizione piana o in posizione inclinata con il piede ribaltabile abbassato.Abbassando i piede di supporto, si può utilizzare l'apparecchio in posizione inclinata. I dati tecnici riportati nel Capitolo 7 valgono per le posizioni indicate. L'apparecchio non deve essere mai collocato su una superficie surriscaldabile o che produca irradiazioni, né essere esposto ai raggi diretti del sole.

1-19

54200

Users Manual

Schermatura contro i radiodisturbi

L'apparecchio è stato realizzato per garantire un funzionamento esente da interferenze. Se viene utilizzato congiuntamente a unità base e unità periferiche non dotate delle stesse protezioni, ne possono derivare interferenze che richiederanno ulteriori intervenu.

Trasformatore di separazione

Poiché il chassis di molti televisori è sottotensione, per motivi di sicurezza è necessario utilizzare il ricevitore da testare tramite un trasformatore di separazione adatto. Ciò permette di stabilire un collegamento diretto del chassis del televisore con la connessione de conduttore di protezione di un apparechio di prova, in modo che venga ridotto il rischio di una scossa elettrica.

1-20

NL


Opstellings- en veiligheidsinstructies

1

Opstellings- en veiligheidsinstructies

Veiligheidsinstructies

Het apparaat heeft de fabriek in een onberispelijke veiligheidstechnische toestand verlaten (zie hoofdstuk 7). Voor het behoud van deze toestand en het risicoloze gebruik dienen de onderstaande instructies nauwkeurig te worden opgevolgd.

Onderhoud en reparatie

Storingen en uitzonderlijke omstandigheden

Wanneer verondersteld moet worden dat een risicoloos gebruik niet meer mogelijk is, dient het apparaat buiten gebruik gesteld en tegen een ongewenst gebruik beveiligd te worden. Deze situatie doet zich voor

• wanneer het apparaat zichtbare beschadigingen vertoont,

• wanneer het apparaat niet meer functioneert,

• na blootstelling aan excessieve omstandigheden van welke aard dan ook (bij voorbeeld bij opslag, transport) die de toelaatbare grenzen overschrijden.

Openen van het apparaat:

Waarschuwing

Bij het openen van afdekkingen of bij het met behulp van gereedschap verwijderen van onderdelen, kan het risico van contact met spanningvoerende delen ontstaan. Ook kan er spanning op aansluitpunten aanwezig zijn. Het apparaat mag pas geopend worden nadat het van alle spanningsbronnen losgenomen is.

Wanneer ijk-, onderhouds- of herstelwerkzaamheden aan een open en onder spanning staand apparaat onvermijdelijk zijn, mogen deze slechts worden uitgevoerd door een vakman die weet met welke gevaren dit gepaard gaat. In het apparaat aanwezige condensators kunnen nog geladen zijn, ook wanneer het apparaat van alle spanningsbronnen is losgenomen.

Aarding

Alvorens men een verbinding tot stand brengt, dient men het apparaat met behulp van een drieaderige kabel met een veligheidsaarddraad te verbinden. De netsteker mag slechts op een stopcontact met randaarde worden aangesloten. Deze veiligheidsmaatregel mag niet onwerkzaam gemaakt worden, bij voorbeeld door het gebruik van een verlengsnoer dat niet van een veiligheidsaarddraad voorzien is.

1-21

54200

Users Manual

Waarschuwing

Elke onderbreking van de beschermende aardleiding, hetzij binnen of buiten het apparaat, of de scheiding ten opzichte van de aardleiding zijn gevaarlijk. Een opzettelijke onderbreking is verboden.

Op de externe contacten van de BNC-bussen is het schakelnulpunt-potentiaal aanwezig.

Deze contacten zijn met het huis verbonden. Een veiligheidsaarding via de externe contacten van de BNC-bussen is niet toegestaan.

Stroomkabel, netspanningsgebied en zekeringen

Voor reeds aanwezige net-aansluitklemmen zijn verschillende stroomkabels beschikbaar.

In geval van levering af fabriek wordt het toestel afgeleverd met de door de klant bestelde stroomkabel.

Table 1-5. Meegelverde netkabel

Type apparaat

54200/XX1

54200/XX3

54200/XX4

54200/XX5

54200/XX8

Meegelverde netkabel

Europa

Noord-America

Engeland (U.K.)

Zwitserland

Australië

Alvorens de stroomkabel in te pluggen, dient u te controleren, of het toestel voor de gebruikte netspanning geschikt is.

Opmerking

Ter vermijding van letsel en dodelijke ongevallen mogen adapties aan de stroomkabel ter aanpassing aan het plaatselijk stroomnet alleen door gekwalificeerd service-personeel worden uitgevoerd, dat volledig op de hoogte is van de hieraan verbonden gevaren.

Het toestel heeft een geschakelde netvoeding, die de meest gangbare netspanningen afdekt: d.w.z. wisselspanningen van 100 tot 240 V (effectieve waarde). Hierdoor is aanpassing van de plaatselijke netspanning overbodig. De nominale netfrequentie bedraagt 50 tot 60 Hz.

1-22

NL


Bedrijfsstand van het toestel

1

Waarschuwing

Wanneer een zekering vervangen moet worden, dient het toestel van alle spanningsbronnen te worden losgekoppeld.

De zekeringen zitten in de zekeringshouder op het achterpaneel van het ingangsstroommoduul. Bij het vervangen van de kabelzekeringen als volgt te werk gaan:

• stroomkabel van vermogensmoduul loskoppelen,

• klembevestiging van de zekeringshouder indrukken en de houder uitnemen, zie afbeelding,

• nieuwe zekeringen met juiste sterkte (overeenkomstig IEC127 T1,6A o CSA/UL

198G T1,6A) plaatsen en de zekeringshouder weer monteren.

Waarschuwing

U dient ervoor te zorgen, dat de gebruikte reserve-zekeringen van het voorgeschreven type zijn en berekend op de voorgeschreven stroomsterkte. Het gebruik van gerepareerde zekeringen en/of kortsluiten van smeltpatronen is verboden.

Verontachtzaam deze belangrijke veiligheidsinstructie in geen geval!

Bedrijfsstand van het toestel

Het toestel kan op een horizontaal oppervlak in platte of schuine stand met neergeklapte voet worden gebruikt. Wanneer de klapvoeten naar beneden geklapt zijn, kan het apparaat in een schuingeplaatste positie gebruikt worden. De technische specificatie in hoofdstuk 7 is van toepassing op de gespecificeerde gebruiksposities. Het apparaat nooit installeren op een oppervlak dat warmte genereert of uitstraalt, en het evenmin aan rechtstreekse zonnestraling blootstellen.

1-23

54200

Users Manual

Ontstoring radio-interferentie

Wat radio-ontstoring betreft is het apparaat zorgvuldig ontstoord en gecontroleerd. Bij het schakelen in combinatie met basisunits die niet correct onstoord zijn en met andere perifere apparatuur, kan radiostoring optreden. In de desbetreffende gevallen maakt dit aanvullende maatregelen op radio-ontstoringsgebied noodzakelijk.

Scheidingstransformator

Omdat het chassis van vele TV-apparaaten direct aan een kant van de netspanning aangesloten is, is het noodzakelijk bij metingen een scheidingstransformator te gebruiken. Dit moet uit het oogpunt van veiligheid. Deze transformator is aan te sluiten tussen de netvoeding en het TV-toestel, en maakt het mogelijk het TV-chassis te aarden, en met de aarde van een meetapparaat te verbinden, om ook daarmee een gevaarlijke situatie te verhinderen.

1-24

S


Inledande anvisningar och säkerhetsanvisningar

1

Inledande anvisningar och säkerhetsanvisningar

Säkerhetsanvisningar

Instrumentet har lämnat tillverkningen när det innehållsmässigt var i ett säkerhetstekniskt gott skick (Se kap. 7). För att bibehålla detta skick och en riskfri drift måste man följa nedanstående anvisningar noggrant.

Underhåll och reparation

Fel och ovanliga fröhållanden:

När det ser ut som om säkerhetsskyddet blivit nedsatt måste instrumentet sättas ur funktion och säkerställas mot varje oavsiktlig handling. Detta uppstår när:

• instrumentet visar en synlig skada,

• instrumentet inte längre funktionerar,

• efter olika slags exceptionella förhållanden (under t.ex. lagring och transport) som

överskridit tillåtna gränser.

Instrumentets öppnande:

Varning

Vid öppnandet av instrumentet eller avlägsnande av delar med verktyg kan strömförande delar friläggas och kopplingsbitar kan vara strömförande. Före öppnandet måste instrumentet avskiljas från alla strömkällor.

När kalibrering, underhåll eller reparation på ett öppnat instrument som är strömförande inte går att undvika får det bara utföras av kvalificerad personal som känner till faror och säkerhetsåtgärder. Instrumentets kondensatorer kan vara strömförande t.o.m. när instrumentet lösgjorts från alla strömkällor.

Jordning

Innan du gjort någon koppling med de ingående förbindelserna, skall instrumentet förbindas med en skyddande jordning genom den trekärniga huvudkabeln; huvudstickkontakten får bara stickas in i en koppling som är försedd med en skyddande jordning. Denna åtgärd får inte upphävas genom användning av en kopplingssladd som inte har denna skyddande jordledning.

Varning

Varje avbrott av den skyddande jordledningen såväl utanför som invändigt i instrumentet gör förmodligen instrumentet farligt. Medvetet avbrott är förbjudet.

Omkopplingsnollpunktspotentialen finns på den externa kontakten till BNC-uttaget.

Dessa kontakter är förbundna med höljet. En säkerhetsjordning via de externa kontakterna till BNC-uttaget är inte tillåtet.

1-25

54200

Users Manual

Nätkabel, nätspänningsområde och säkringar

Det finns nätkablar anpassade till olika länders nätuttag. Instrumentet kan beställas för leverans med en av nedanstående kabeltyper.

Table 1-6. Medleverera nätkabel

Instrumenttyp

54200/XX1

54200/XX3

54200/XX4

54200/XX5

54200/XX8

Medleverera nätkabel

Europa

Nordamerika

Storbrittannien (U.K.)

Schweiz

Australien

Kontrollera att den lokala nätspänningen är lämpad för instrumentet, före anslutning av nätkabeln.

Obs

För eventuellt utbyte av kontaktdon på den medlevererade sladden, anlita endast en kvalificerad tekniker.

Apparaten kan anslutas till nätspänningar från 100 till 240 Veff, och frekvenser från 50 till 60 Hz, utan inställning av spänningsområde.

Varning

Vid byte av säkring ska instrumentet först kopplas bort från nätspänningen.

Säkringarna finns i säkringshållaren vid nätspänningsintaget på instrumentets baksida.

Om säkringen behöver bytas, gör på följande sätt:

• ta bort nätkabeln

• tryck in klacken på säkringshållaren och dra ut hållaren, se bilden.

• sätt i ny säkring (av rätt typ enligt IEC127 T1,6A eller CSA/UL 198G T1,6A) i säkringshållaren och sätt tillbaka säkringshållaren.

Varning

Använd endast reservsäkringar av den specificerade typen och strömstyrkan. Reparerade eller kortslutna säkringar får ej användas. Ignorera inte dessa viktiga säkerhetsåtgärder.

1-26

S


Instrumentets driftsläge

1

Instrumentets driftsläge

Instrumentet kan användas horisontalt eller, med fötterna utfällda, i en luttande position.

När de nedfällbara fötterna fällts nedåt kan instrumentet användas i ett snedplacerat läge.

Den tekniska specifikationen i kapitel 7 är tillämplig för de specificerade användningslägena. Instrumenter får aldrig installeras på en yta som alstrar eller ustrålar värme och inte heller utsättas för direkt solsken.

Radio-avstörning

När det gäller radio-avstörning är instrumentet omsorgsfullt avstört och kontrollerat. Vid koppling i kombination med basisenheter som inte är riktigt avstörda och med annan kring-utrustning kan det uppstå radiostörningar. Vid sådana fall är extra åtgärder för radio-avstörning nödvändiga.

Skiljetransformator

Eftersom mänga tv-apparaters chassi befinner sig i samma fas, är det av säkerhetsskäl absolut nödvändigt att köra den mottagare som skall testas över en lämplig skiljetransformator. På så sätt är det möjligt att åstadkomma en direkt förbindelse mellan tv-apparaternas chassi och skyddsledaranstutningen till någon som helst testapparat, varigenom risken för elektrisk stöt minskas avsevärt.

1-27

54200

Users Manual

1-28

Chapter 2

Main Features

Title Page

Introduction...................................................................................................... 2-3

Main Features................................................................................................... 2-3

2-1

Main Features

Introduction

2

Introduction

This chapter describes the main features of the instrument, its functions, operating modes and options.

Main Features

This chapter describes the Fluke 54200 TV Signal Generator with all options built in.

Depending on the ordered instrument different features may not be implemented.

This TV Signal Generator matches any dedicated set of requirements, whether it is in R&D, manufacturing, quality assurance, installation, service, and training.

The generator covers nearly all world-wide standards including PAL, NTSC, and

SECAM with their subsystems as well as sound standards and data transmission standards.

The Fluke 54200 with its menu-driven control makes it easy for you to work with the instrument and allows a large choice and configuration of the provided test signals. The instrument offers the complete RF range from 32 MHz to 900 MHz, so covering the IF-,

VHF I-, VHF III-, S-, Hyper- and UHF-Band.

The test patterns are selected using the PATTERN keypad or additional soft keys. Some test patterns are offered in different versions or for different TV standards, for example, the Color

Bar, PLUGE, DEM (Demodulator) or VCR test. Some patterns are offered with selectable

‘white’ or primary color signal levels. Up to fourfold test pattern combinations are selectable.

All test patterns are offered in the 16:9 and 4:3 picture format.

Up to 99 complete instrument settings can be stored and recalled for fast and convenient setup. A step function allows to move swiftly through the sequence of stored information.

Furthermore, you have the advantage to recall TV system depending instrument settings for

20 different countries including sound systems, color standard, residual carrier, group delay correction, and Teletext.

An Insertion-Reference Signal (IRS) is generated for PAL 625 line systems in the fieldblanking interval in the TV line 17. The IRS is according to CCIR Rec. 473-5 and serves to detect and correct distortion in TV signals.

The composite video signal of nominal 1 V (pp) at the VIDEO OUTPUT can be set from 0 to

1.5 V.

The level of the chrominance signal is selectable from 0% to 150%.

The maximum RF output signal of 10 mV or 100 mV can be attenuated by more than 60 or

80 dB.

On the rear panel the instrument offers different video outputs with RGB, YCrCb, and

Y/C signals.

For synchronization purpose, three outputs are available: Composite, Line, and Field Sync.

The instrument offers the following sound systems:

• Mono sound

• Analog stereo sound

• NICAM sound

• BTSC/MTS sound

2-3

54200

Users Manual

Mono sound is available for all TV subsystems. Different internal audio frequencies are selectable.

Different analog Stereo sound systems are optional available, for example, for the countries Germany (FM BG), Korea (FM Mk), and Czech Republic (FM DK).

NICAM and BTSC sound are options. NICAM is a digital sound system mainly used for

PAL B/G, PAL I, PAL D, and SECAM L. Three special test signals are available to check NICAM equipment.

The BTSC/MTS sound system is selectable for NTSC M and PAL M. BTSC is mainly used in the United States and Taiwan. Several specific test signals are included.

External sound modulation is possible for all sound systems except NICAM and BTSC sound. For BTSC, an external MTS signal can be applied; so the instrument operates as

RF modulator.

The modulated sound carrier is available at the RF Output and Sound IF Output. The

NICAM signal is applied to the NICAM Output and the BTSC baseband spectrum to the

MTS Output at the rear.

Teletext and Wide Screen Signalling bits (WSS) are available with both the PAL and

SECAM standard. The Teletext system is according to the WST Teletext standard and includes both TOP and FLOF or Antiope. Automatically generated Wide Screen

Signalling bits in TV line 23 are bits to identify some transmission information, for example, Aspect Ratio or Subtitling. Additionally the WSS bits are programmable.

Closed Captioning (CC) is a subtitling system which is transmitted using either field of line 21. In the Fluke 54200 Closed Caption and Text Service (T1 to T4) are available for the TV systems NTSC, PAL 625 and 525 line systems, and SECAM.

The VPS (Video Programming System) and PDC (Programme Delivery Control) systems are used to synchronize a VCR recording with the actual broadcast transmission

(start and stop time). VPS is mainly used in Germany, Austria, and Switzerland, whereas

PDC is used in many other European countries.

VPS uses TV line 16 of the PAL transmission standard. The PDC data are transmitted with the Teletext signal.

Remote control is done either using the IEEE-488 or RS-232C Interface. The option provides both methods, however, only one can be used at a time.

2-4

Chapter 3

Getting Started

Title Page

Introduction...................................................................................................... 3-3

Getting Started ................................................................................................. 3-3


Turning the Instrument on ............................................................................ 3-3

Self-test Routine............................................................................................... 3-3

Brief Checking Procedure................................................................................. 3-4

Test Equipment ............................................................................................ 3-4

Instrument Settings and Checks.................................................................... 3-4

Operation and Application................................................................................ 3-13

Control Elements, Display and Connectors................................................... 3-13

Front Panel .............................................................................................. 3-13

Rear Panel................................................................................................ 3-16

3-1


Introduction

3

Introduction

This chapter starts with the general procedures and precautions necessary for operation followed by a brief checking procedure. It contains a summary of controls and connectors on the front and rear panels and the display.


General Information

This section outlines the procedure and precautions necessary for operation. It identifies and briefly describes the functions of the front and rear panel controls and the display.

Turning the Instrument on

Warning

Before turning the instrument on, ensure that it has been installed in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 1.

After the instrument has been connected to the line voltage in accordance with

Chapter 1, it can be turned on by setting the POWER switch on the front panel to ON.

The specifications given in Chapter 7 of this manual are valid when the instrument is installed in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 1 of this manual and after a warm-up period of 30 minutes.

After turning the power off, wait at least 5 seconds before turning it on again. This allows all power to completely discharge and the instrument to reset.

Self-test Routine

After power on, the instrument performs a self-test routine of the PROM, processor

RAM, stored instrument settings, calibration data, and available digital modules. After approximately 2 seconds the generator automatically recalls its instrument state before power off.

If a fault is found during the self-test this fault is indicated as follows, for example:

For detailed information, see the end of Chapter 5 ‘Operating Hints, Out of Range and

Error Messages’.

3-3

54200

Users Manual

Brief Checking Procedure

This procedure checks the instrument functions with a minimum of steps. It is assumed that the operator doing the test is familiar with the instrument and its specifications.

After POWER ON, the instrument is automatically set to the operating mode to which it was set before POWER OFF.

Test Equipment

• Multi-system TV

Instrument Settings and Checks

The display shows the last instrument settings before power off, for example:

Figure 3-1. Main Menu with Current Instrument Settings

• Press the standard softkey (F1).

3-4


Brief Checking Procedure

3

• A submenu with the selected country and its default settings appears, in this example, United Kingdom.

Figure 3-2. Current Country with Video Standard and Sound System


• A popup menu with a pre-defined country list appears.

• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) your country, for example, Germany. If your country is not listed, select a country that uses your or a similar video standard and sound system.

Figure 3-3. Popup Menu with the Pre-defined Country List

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your selection.

3-5

54200

Users Manual

• The display shows the video standard and the sound system according to the selected country.

Figure 3-4. Selected Country with Video Standard and Sound System

• If your TV equipment does not support the TV system, select the required video standard or sound system with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2), for example,

FM Germany .


• Select the required standard or system with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2), for example, FM Mono .

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your settings.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) again to return to the main menu.

3-6

Figure 3-5. Main Menu with Selected Settings

• Check if the video and chroma amplitudes are set to 100%.

• If not, press the video softkey (F2).



3

The display shows the video submenu with the complete current settings:

Figure 3-6. Video Submenu with Current Setting


• A popup menu for numerical entries appears.

Figure 3-7. Video Amplitude Setting

• Key in

1 0 0 using numerical keypad.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your entry.

• Press the é softkey (F2) to select Chroma .

• Key in

1 0 0 using numerical keypad.



3-7

54200

Users Manual

3-8

Figure 3-8. Main Menu with changeed Settings

• Press the

FREQ key on the right of the display to select an appropriate RF carrier frequency, for example, 203.25 MHz.

• A popup menu for numerical inputs appears:

Figure 3-9. Carrier Frequency Setting

• Key in

2 0 3 . 2 5 using numerical keypad.




3

Figure 3-10. Selected Carrier Frequency

• Set your TV to the same frequency or to the corresponding TV channel, in this example channel 9. For the relationship between carrier frequency and TV channel number, see Appendix B.

• Press the

LEVEL key on the right of the display to select an appropriate level for the vision carrier.

Figure 3-11. Carrier Level Setting

• Select the unit dBµV or mV with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2).


• Key in

8 0 for dBµV or 1 0 for mV using numerical keypad.


3-9

54200

Users Manual

Figure 3-12. Final Settings

• Press the sound softkey (F3) to check the sound settings.

• The sound submenu appears:

3-10

Figure 3-13. Sound Parameter Settings

Check if the sound modulation is set to internal ( Int ) and if an appropriate modulation frequency is selected, for example, CH 1 1.0 kHz .

If not:

• Select the

CH 1 parameter with the ê softkey (F2).


The popup menu with the selectable modulation frequencies appears:



3

Figure 3-14. Modulation Frequency Setting

• Select an appropriate frequency with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2).



• Press the

COLOR BAR key in the PATTERN keypad for 1 second.

• The popup menu for the Color Bar parameter appears.

Figure 3-15. Pattern Parameter

• Select

COL_100_25 or COL_75_25 with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2).


• Press the

GREYSCALE , MULTIBURST , and CIRCLE keys in the PATTERN keypad.

3-11

54200

Users Manual

• Connect the

RF OUTPUT on the front panel of the 54200 to the antenna input of your TV. Use an appropriate RF connection cable, for example, the attached RF cable BNC to TV.

• Check the correct video and sound reproduction on the TV.

In this example, you get the following combined test pattern and a mono sound with

1 kHz modulation.

Figure 3-16. Combined Test Pattern

• Select different test patterns using the

PATTERN keypad.

For more details about the operating principle and the applications of the test patterns, see Chapter 4, How to Use the Instrument.

3-12


Operation and Application

3

Operation and Application

Control Elements, Display and Connectors

The controls and connectors are listed according to their functional sections, and a brief description of each is given.

Front Panel

Control/connector Function

Power switch

ON

OFF

Five softkeys used to change or select functions or parameters. Depending on the mode of the instrument the functionality changes. The current function of the keys is shown on the display above the keypad.

Step keys up and down for changing parameter settings incrementally. A step key indicator in the display points to the current parameter which can be changed.

FREQ:

Key used to display the RF frequency. The pop-up window serves to select:

- RF carrier frequency (vision carrier)

- Stepping function

LEVEL:

Key used to display the RF level. The popup window serves to select:

- RF level setting

- Level units mV or dBµV

- Level range low (10 mV) or high (100 mV)

- Stepping function

STORE:

Key used to store instrument settings

(99 memory registers).

RECALL:

Key used to recall stored instrument settings

(99 memory registers and 1 default setting).

3-13

54200

Users Manual

Keys used to select:

TV systems PAL, NTSC, or SECAM.


- Internal or external video modulation

- Video signal ON/OFF

- Chroma signal ON/OFF


- Sound modes

- MONO, DUAL or SAP, STEREO

- (SAP = Second Audio Program for

BTSC Sound).

- Internal or external sound modulation

- Sound channel 1 and 2 resp. left/right

- ON/OFF.

- Press long to popup audio frequencies:

- CH1 calls up the S1or S3 Modulation menu,

- CH2 calls up the S2 Modulation menu.

16 keys used to select single or combined video test patterns.

LEDs above the keys indicate the current on/off status.

Some keys: press long to popup parameters or versions of patterns.

Keys used to input:

- Digits for frequency, levels, etc.

- Characters in text mode, for example, VPS or

- PDC program titles.

3-14



3

Full graphic display with backlight, 1/4 VGA.

Feed through capability from or to the

TO FRONT BNC connector at the rear panel.

Video input for external CVBS (75

Ω),

BNC connector.

Video output of CVBS (75

Ω), BNC connector.

Radio Frequency output (75

Ω),

BNC connector.

3-15

54200

Users Manual

Rear Panel

Input power module with fuses.

For details, see Chapter 1,

Power Cable, Line Voltage Range, and Fuses.

IEEE-488 bus connector for remote control.

RS-232 connector for remote control.

R G B output (75

Ω), 3 BNC connectors:

Red, Green, and Blue signals.

Video component output Y/C

R

/C

B

(75

Ω),

3 BNC connectors:

- Y = Y components including Teletext

- C

$=

R

−Y components

- C

B

$=

B

−Y components

Synchronization outputs (75

Ω),

3 BNC connectors:

- COMP = Composite sync

- LINE = Line sync

- FIELD = Field sync

3-16



3

Output of NICAM sound (50

Ω),

2 BNC connectors:

- DATA = NICAM Data

- CLOCK = NICAM Clock

MTS IN:

MTS multiplex input for the BTSC baseband signal (0.1 M


MTS/PILOT OUT:

Output of BTSC baseband signal and output of

FM Stereo pilot signal (600

Ω),

BNC connector.

SOUND IF OUT:

Output of modulated IF sound carrier signal

(50


TO FRONT:

Feedthrough capability from or to the

TO REAR BNC connector at the front panel.

Audio input for external audio signals

(0.1 M

Ω), 2 Cinch connectors:

- Left = audio channel 1

- Right = audio channel 2

Audio output of internal generated or external supplied audio signals (600

Ω),

2 Cinch connectors:

- Left = audio channel 1

- Right = audio channel 2

3-17

54200

Users Manual

Audio/Video input, SCART/Euro-AV connector, standard connection for TV and video systems.

Pin

2

6

20

4, 18, 21

Table 3-1. EURO AV IN

Signal

Audio channel 2, right

Audio channel 1, left

CVBS input

Ground

Audio/Video output, SCART/Euro-AV connector, standard connection for TV and video systems.

Table 3-2. EURO AV OUT

7

8

1

3

11

15*

16

19*

Pin

Y signal (luma part of CVBS)

Ground

Ground

Signal

Audio channel 2, right, S2/S3

Audio channel 1, left, S1/S3

RGB output, blue component

CVBS status

RGB output, green component

RGB output, red component

Y/C output ON:

C signal (chroma part of CVBS)

RGB status

CVBS output:

RGB ON: CVBS for sync

Y/C ON:

4,5,9,13

17,18,21

*outputs are selectable between RGB or Y/C mode

Y/C output (75

Ω), S-connector 4 pins.

3

4

1

2

Pin

Table 3-3. Y/C OUT

Signal

Y ground

C ground

Y signal, luma

C signal, chroma

3-18

Chapter 4

How to Use the Instrument

Title Page

Introduction...................................................................................................... 4-3

Operating via Keyboard.................................................................................... 4-3


Display .................................................................................................... 4-3

Keyboard ................................................................................................. 4-6

Instrument Settings ...................................................................................... 4-7

TV Standard............................................................................................. 4-7

Video Settings.......................................................................................... 4-10

Sound Settings ......................................................................................... 4-12

Teletext, VPS, PDC, CC, and WSS.......................................................... 4-14

Vision Carrier Frequency Settings (RF Carrier)........................................ 4-15

Vision Carrier Level Setting (RF Level)................................................... 4-18

Video Amplitude Setting.......................................................................... 4-22

Chroma Amplitude Setting....................................................................... 4-26

Test Patterns ............................................................................................ 4-30

Storing and Recalling of Settings ................................................................. 4-35

Storing of Instrument Settings.................................................................. 4-35

Recalling of Instrument Settings .............................................................. 4-37

Digital Data and Text ............................................................................... 4-39

Description and Applications of the Test Patterns ............................................. 4-40

Circle ........................................................................................................ 4-42

Center Cross with Border Castellations ........................................................ 4-43

Dots ........................................................................................................ 4-45

Crosshatch ................................................................................................... 4-46

Checkerboard ............................................................................................... 4-47

White Pattern ............................................................................................... 4-48

Multiburst .................................................................................................... 4-48

Greyscale ..................................................................................................... 4-49

DEM Pattern ................................................................................................ 4-49

4-1

54200

Users Manual

DEM 1 (PAL) ......................................................................................... 4-49

DEM 1 (NTSC)....................................................................................... 4-51

DEM 1 (SECAM) ................................................................................... 4-52

DEM 2 (PAL) ......................................................................................... 4-53

DEM 2 (NTSC)....................................................................................... 4-53

DEM 2 (SECAM) ................................................................................... 4-54

Purity ....................................................................................................... 4-55

PLUGE ....................................................................................................... 4-56

Color Bar..................................................................................................... 4-57

Full Field Color Bar ................................................................................ 4-57

Split Field Color Bar ............................................................................... 4-58

SMPTE Color Bar ................................................................................... 4-59

Horizontal Color Bar ............................................................................... 4-60

Color Temperature Adjustment.................................................................... 4-60

VCR Test .................................................................................................... 4-62

VCR 1 ................................................................................................... 4-62

VCR 2 ................................................................................................... 4-63

Standard Resolution Test......................................................................... 4-64

High Resolution Test............................................................................... 4-64

Writing Current Adjustment .................................................................... 4-64

Digital Scan Test ......................................................................................... 4-64

ADC Check 1.......................................................................................... 4-65

ADC Check 2.......................................................................................... 4-66

Moving Block ......................................................................................... 4-67

Progressive Scan Check 1........................................................................ 4-67



DIVERSE.................................................................................................... 4-69

EHT Test................................................................................................. 4-69

IRS17 ................................................................................................... 4-70

Combined Test Patterns............................................................................... 4-71

CIRCLE .................................................................................................. 4-71

Twofold Combinations of Patterns .......................................................... 4-71

Threefold Combinations of Patterns......................................................... 4-73

Fourfold Combinations of Patterns .......................................................... 4-73

Insertion-Reference Signal (IRS) ................................................................. 4-74

4-2


Introduction

4

Introduction

Chapter 4 explains the TV Signal Generator and describes the different test patterns and application examples for test patterns.

Operating via Keyboard

General Information

This section describes the principle of the user interface and the submenus. It explains, by means of examples, how to use the keys and popup menus to select parameters and settings. For detailed technical information about TV systems, sound systems, test patterns, and parameters see Chapter 7, Specifications. A description and examples for the application of the test patterns are given in this chapter under the topic 'Description and Application of the Test Patterns.'

Display

The main menu shows a summary of the most important current settings. The displayed information depends on the selected TV and sound system. For a complete overview of the selectable parameter and displayed information, see the Menu Tree in the Appendix F.

For example:

Vision carrier frequency: 471.25 MHz

Vision carrier level:

Level range:

10.0 mV

Low (up to 10 mV)

TV system:

Video source:

Aspect Ratio:

Video amplitude:

Chroma amplitude:

Sound system:

Sound mode:

Sound source:

Digital Services:

NTSC M

Intern

4:3

100%

100%

BTSC

Mono

Internal

Closed Caption (CC)


The labels in the lowest row of the display show the current functions of the assigned softkeys F1 to F5. From the main screen, you can call up five submenus using the softkeys to select different settings:

4-3

54200

Users Manual

TV Standard Submenu

Country with standard settings: USA *

TV system:

TV lines per frame:

NTSC M *

525

Field frequency:

Group delay:

Residual carrier:

60 Hz

On *

Low *

Sound system:

Sound mode:

BTSC *

Mono

Sound carrier frequency: 4.50 MHz

* Parameter can be changed in this submenu.

Figure 4-2. TV Standard Submenu

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the parameter you want to change. The selected parameter is indicated reverse video.

• Press the edit softkey (F3). A popup menu with the selectable settings appears.

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the required setting. Settings shown in grey are not accessible due to the selected TV system.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your setting.


Video Submenu

Test pattern:

TV system:

Video amplitude:

Insertion Reference Signal

IRS17 (Reference Line):

Video source:

Scart output signal:

Digital Scan

NTSC M

100% *

Off *

Internal *

CVBS *

CVBS status:

Aspect Ratio:

Video polarity:

Sync in RGB signal:

Group delay:

Auto *

4:3 *

Positive *

Off *

On *

Chroma amplitude: 100% *


Figure 4-3. Video Submenu

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the parameter you want to change.


• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the required setting.

• For the Video and Chroma amplitude, key in the value using the numerical keypad.



4-4

Sound Submenu


Operating via Keyboard

4

Sound system:

TV system:

Sound mode:

BTSC *

NTSC M

Mono *

Sound source: Internal *

Second Audio Program (SAP): Off *

Audio frequency for channel 1: 1.0 kHz *

Pre-emphasis:

Sound carrier frequency:

75 µs *

4.5 MHz

Sound carrier level: -10 dBc *


Figure 4-4. Sound Submenu






Submenu for Digital Services

Digital Service: CC (Closed Caption) *

TV system: NTSC M


In the external video modulation mode the digital services are not available. The display only shows the selected TV system.

Figure 4-5. Submenu for Digital Services




• If you select the

CC mode, an additional popup menu appears to select the memory number or the sequence.



4-5

54200

Users Manual

Support Submenu

System information:

Real time clock:

**

Date * and time *

Remote control interface: RS232 *

Baud rate:

Data bits:

Stop bits:

Parity:

Hardware handshake:

9600 *

8 *

1 *

None *

No *

Figure 4-6. Support Menu


** If you select System Info , an popup menu appears, showing the installed options, instrument type, serial number, software version, and the date of last calibration.






Keyboard

The keyboard of the instrument has four kinds of key functions.

• Keys that have a direct effect on the output signal for often used functions:

− All keys in the

PATTERN field. Some PATTERN keys call up a popup menu in the display for parameter selection when pressed longer than one second. You can select the parameter with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2). Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your selection.

− The keys in the

STANDARD field change between the last selected PAL, NTSC, or SECAM system.

− The keys in the

VIDEO field. The INT/EXT key additionally calls up a popup menu when pressed longer than one second. In this menu, you can select the external video source.

− The keys in the

SOUND field. The CH1 , CH2 , and the INT/EXT keys additionally call up a popup menu for modulation frequency or external sound source setting when pressed longer than one second.

− The ▲ and ▼ keys, if the step function is selected.

4-6



4

• Keys that prepare the instrument for numerical inputs using popup menus on the display:

− The

FREQ key

− The

LEVEL key

− The

STORE key

− The

RECALL key

• Keys to enter digits or characters:

− The keys in the numerical keypad

• Keys with different functions, depending on the selected operating mode and submenu:

− The softkeys

F1 to F5 . The current function of the keys is shown in the assigned fields in the display.

Instrument Settings

TV Standard

You can select the required TV system using the edit function and the é or

ê softkey

(F1 or F2) in the standard submenu. To ease the TV system selection, the instrument offers a pre-defined country list with the standard settings for each listed country. With this list you can nearly cover the TV systems used worldwide. You can call up the list in the standard submenu.

Pre-defined Country List

If the instrument shows a different screen than the main screen, press the enter softkey

(F5) until the main screen appears.

Figure 4-7. Submenu Selection

4-7

54200

Users Manual



• A popup menu with twenty countries appears.

Figure 4-8. Country List

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the required country, in this example

Germany.


• The display shows the name of the selected country and the main default settings.

Further default settings, for example, the Teletext system, are shown in the assigned submenus. For details, see Appendix C, ‘Default Settings for Countries’.

4-8

Figure 4-9. Country with Default Settings

If the settings do not match your requirements, you can select different settings in this submenu as described in the following section.



4

Additional Manual Settings

• Select the standard submenu.

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) in the standard submenu to select the setting you want to change, for example, the TV system.

Figure 4-10. Manual System Setting


• The display shows a popup menu with the selectable TV systems.

Figure 4-11. TV System Setting

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the required TV system, for example,

NTSC M .


4-9

54200

Users Manual

Figure 4-12. Selected TV System

The display shows the selected TV system and the main default settings. Further default settings, for example, the pre-emphasis, are shown in the assigned submenus. For details, see Appendix C, ‘Default Settings for Countries’.

You can also select the TV system directly with the STANDARD keys PAL , NTSC , and

SECAM . Pressing one of these keys calls up the TV standard with the last selected TV system, for example, PAL B/G, NTSC M, or SECAM L.

Video Settings

• Select the video submenu.

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) in the video submenu to select the setting you want to change, for example, the Video Source .

4-10

Figure 4-13. Video Settings




4

• A popup menu appears.

Figure 4-14. Video Source Settings

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the required video source, for example,

SCART .


Figure 4-15. Selected Video Source

You can also select the video source directly with the VIDEO key INT/EXT . Pressing this key briefly toggles to the internal video source if an external was selected. Pressing this key briefly if the internal video source is selected the instrument toggles to the last selected external source, for example, BNC. Pressing this key longer than one second calls up the popup menu for the video source selection. For details about external video sources, see Chapter 5, Section ‘External Video Modulation.’

The VIDEO key VIDEO ON/OFF switches the video amplitude on or off.

The VIDEO key CHROMA ON/OFF switches the chroma amplitude on or off (only if the internal video source is selected).

How to set the values for the video and chroma amplitudes is described in this chapter under the topics ‘Video Amplitude Setting’ and ‘Chroma Amplitude Setting’.

4-11

54200

Users Manual

Sound Settings

• Select the sound submenu.

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) in the sound submenu to select the setting you want to change, for example, the sound mode Mono .

4-12

Figure 4-16. Sound Settings


• The display shows a popup menu with the selectable modes in black characters.

Modes that are not selectable are shown in grey characters.

Figure 4-17. Sound Mode Settings



4

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the required sound mode.


Figure 4-18. Selected Sound Mode

• Use the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) and the edit softkey (F3) to select the sound parameters like modulation frequency ( CH1 and CH2 ), the pre-emphasis, and the sound carrier level ( SC-Level ).


You can also select the sound mode directly with the SOUND keys MONO , DUAL/SAP , and STEREO .

Pressing the INT/EXT key briefly, toggles to the internal modulation frequency source, if an external source was selected. Pressing this key briefly if the internal modulation frequency source is selected, toggles to the last selected external source, for example,

SCART. Pressing this key longer than one second, calls up the popup menu for the modulation frequency source selection.

For details about external sound sources, see Chapter 5, ‘External Sound Modulation’.

Pressing the CH1 and CH2 keys briefly, switches the modulation frequency of the left and right sound channels on or off. Pressing these keys longer than one second, calls up the popup menu for the sound modulation frequency selection.

For details about sound parameter settings, see the table in Chapter 5, ‘Sound Operating

Modes.’

4-13

54200

Users Manual

Teletext, VPS, PDC, CC, and WSS

(Digital Services)

Select the digital menu.

Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) in the digital submenu to select the setting you want to change, for example, the field Teletext Auto .

Figure 4-19. Digital Services


• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select, for example, Teletext B Top 1 .

• Press the enter softkey (F5).

• An additional popup menu appears.

4-14

Figure 4-20. Teletext Line Selection

• Press the é softkey (F1) to select, for example, four lines per frame mode.




4

Figure 4-21. Selected Digital Services

How to program the VPS and PDC Data Sets, see Chapter 5, ‘PDC’ and ‘VPS.’

Vision Carrier Frequency Settings (RF Carrier)

You can directly key in a certain value for the carrier frequency using the numerical keypad or you can change the frequency with ▲ and ▼ step keys, if the step function is selected for the frequency, see Section ‘Step Function.’

Numerical Input

• Press the

FREQ key.

• A popup menu for numerical input appears, showing the current frequency.

Figure 4-22. Carrier Frequency Input

4-15

54200

Users Manual

• Key in the requested value using numerical keypad, for example,

2 0 3 2 5 . For frequencies <100 MHz, use the decimal point key "

•", for example,

8 9 . 2 5 .

• Keyed in digits can be erased with the rubout softkey (F2).

4-16

Figure 4-23. Value Input for the Carrier Frequency

• If you want to skip the input, press the esc softkey (F4).

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your input.

If you key in values <32 MHz or > 900.00 MHz, the display shows the message:

Figure 4-24. Frequency Out of Range Message

• Press the enter softkey (F5) for acknowledgment. The instrument returns to the last setting.

• Press the

FREQ key.

• Key in a value within the allowed setting range using the numerical keypad.




4

Step Function

• Press the

FREQ key.

• A popup menu for numerical input appears, showing the current frequency.

Figure 4-25. Carrier Frequency

• Press the step softkey (F3).

• The symbol for the stepping function appears in front of the

RF Frequency label.

Figure 4-26. Stepping Function Indicator

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm and to return to the main screen.

• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to increase or decrease the frequency in units of 50 kHz steps.

Keeping a key pressed effects continuous stepping with increasing stepwidth.

Figure 4-27. Frequency Stepping

The stepping function indicator next to the frequency value shows that the stepping function is selected for the vision carrier frequency.

4-17

54200

Users Manual

You can select the stepping function for the:

− Vision carrier frequency

− Vision carrier level / amplitude

− Video amplitude

− Chroma amplitude

You cannot select more than one parameter for the stepping function at the same time.

Vision Carrier Level Setting (RF Level)

You can directly key in a certain value for the carrier level in dBµV or in mV for the amplitude using the numerical keypad or you can change the value stepwise with the ▲ and ▼ step keys, if the step function is selected for the level or amplitude, see Section

‘Step Function.’

Numerical Input

• Press the

LEVEL key.

• A popup menu for the unit selection mV or dBµV appears, showing the current unit and the value.

Figure 4-28. Unit Selection

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select: mV for amplitude or dBµV for level inputs.

4-18



4

• Key in directly the requested value using the numerical keypad for the parameter indicated in inverse video, for example 0 . 0 2 for 0.02 mV.


Figure 4-29. Value Input for the Carrier Amplitude

• If you want to skip the input, press the esc softkey (F4).


If you key in a value >10 mV or >80 dBµV and the Low range is selected (indication in the main screen below the unit), the display shows the message:

Figure 4-30. Range Exceeding Message


• Press the

LEVEL key.

• Key in an appropriate value using the numerical keypad or press the edit softkey

(F3) and the High/Low softkey (F1) to select the High range and key in the requested higher value.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm.

The Low range limit of 10 mV or 80 dBµV prevents unintended inputs that are too high.

You should select the Low range if you are testing, for example, receivers with inputs sensitive to overvoltages.

4-19

54200

Users Manual

If you key in a value >100.0 mV or >100 dBµV, or <0.01 mV or <20 dBµV, the display shows the message:

Figure 4-31. Level Out of Range Message


• Press the

LEVEL key.

• Key in a value within the allowed setting range using the numerical keypad.


Step Function

• Press the

LEVEL key.

• The popup menu for the unit selection appears, showing the current unit and the value.

Figure 4-32. Vision Carrier Unit

4-20


• The popup menu for numerical input appears.



4

Figure 4-33. Vision Carrier Level / Amplitude



RF Level label.

Figure 4-34. Level Stepping Function Indicator


• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to increase or decrease the carrier level stepwise.

Stepwidth for the amplitude: 0.01 mV up to 10 mV,

Stepwidth for the level:

0.1 mV from 10 mV onwards.

1 dB

Keeping a key pressed, effects continuous stepping with increasing stepwidth.

Figure 4-35. Carrier Amplitude Stepping

The stepping function indicator left next to the amplitude value shows that the stepping function is selected for the vision carrier amplitude.

4-21

54200

Users Manual




− Video amplitude



Video Amplitude Setting

You can directly key in a certain value for the video amplitude using the numerical keypad or you can change the amplitude stepwise with

▲ and ▼ step keys, if the step function is selected for the video amplitude, see Section ‘Step Function.’

Numerical Input

• Select the video submenu from the main screen.

4-22

Figure 4-36. Video Amplitude Setting


• A popup menu for numerical input appears.

• Key in the requested value, for example

, 1 2 0 using the numerical keypad. You can also directly key in the value without pressing the edit softkey (F3).




4

Figure 4-37. Value Input for the Video Amplitude

• If you want to skip your input, press the esc softkey (F4).


If you key in a value >150%, the display shows the message:

Figure 4-38. Video Amplitude Out of Range Message



• Key in a value <150 using the numerical keypad.


4-23

54200

Users Manual


Figure 4-39. Changed Video Amplitude

Step Function




4-24

Figure 4-40. Video Amplitude Stepping



Video Amplitude label.



4

Figure 4-41. Video Amplitude Stepping Function Indicator


• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to increase or decrease the amplitude in 1% increments.


Figure 4-42. Video Amplitude Stepping

The stepping function indicator to the right of Video shows that the stepping function is selected for the video amplitude.




− Video amplitude



4-25

54200

Users Manual

Chroma Amplitude Setting

You can directly key in a certain value for the chroma amplitude using the numerical keypad or you can change the amplitude stepwise with ▲ and ▼ step keys, if the step function is selected for the chroma amplitude, see Section ‘Step Function.’

Numerical Input


Figure 4-43. Chroma Amplitude Setting

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the Chroma amplitude.


4-26



4


• Key in the requested value, for example

, 1 1 0 . You can also directly key in the value without pressing the edit softkey (F3).


Figure 4-44. Value Input for the Chroma Amplitude



If you key in a value >150%, the display shows the message:

Figure 4-45. Chroma Amplitude Out of Range Message



• Key in a value <150 using the numerical keypad.


4-27

54200

Users Manual


Figure 4-46. Changed Chroma Amplitude

Step Function


• Press the é

or

ê

softkey (F1 or F2) to select the Chroma amplitude.



4-28

Figure 4-47. Chroma Amplitude Stepping




4


Chroma Amplitude label.

Figure 4-48. Chroma Amplitude Stepping Function Indicator


• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to increase or decrease the amplitude in 1% increments.


Figure 4-49. Chroma Amplitude Stepping

The stepping function indicator right next to the Chroma sign shows that the stepping function is selected for the chroma amplitude.




− Video amplitude



4-29

54200

Users Manual

Test Patterns

You can switch a test pattern on or off by briefly pressing the assigned key in the

PATTERN field of the keyboard. The LED above the key indicates that the pattern is switched on. Pressing a key longer than one second calls up a popup menu for parameter or additional pattern selection.

The keys CIRCLE , CHECKERBOARD , MULTIBURST , GREYSCALE , and PLUGE do not call up a popup menu; these patterns can only be switched on or off. You can combine up to four different single patterns. For details, see the topic ‘Combined Test

Patterns’ later in this chapter.

Pattern Selection

• Select the appropriate TV standard and TV system for your TV set.

• Connect the generator to the TV either using video or using RF.

• If you connect using RF, select the same frequency for the TV and the generator. Set the vision carrier level to approximately 60 dBµV respectively 1 mV. If your TV requests a sound carrier to identify the TV system, set the generator to the corresponding sound system.

• If you connect using video, set the generator to the corresponding video output, for example, Scart.

• Check that the video and chroma amplitudes are set to a sufficient value, for example, 100%.

• Press the requested

PATTERN key, for example, the CHECKERBOARD key.

• The LED above the key lights up and the TV shows the pattern on the screen.

4-30

Figure 4-50. Checkerboard Test Pattern

The selected pattern is also indicated in the upper left corner of the video submenu display.

Figure 4-51. Test Pattern Indication



4

Pattern Combinations

• Select the first pattern, for example the

CHECKERBOARD , as described before.

• Press the

CIRCLE key to select the second pattern.

• The LED above the

CIRCLE key lights up.

• The TV shows the checkerboard and in addition the circle.

Figure 4-52. Combined Test Pattern

• Press the

CIRCLE key to switch the circle pattern off.

• Press the

CHECKERBOARD key to switch the checkerboard pattern off.

For possible combinations, see Section ‘Combined Test Patterns’ in this chapter.

Pattern Parameter Selection

• Press a

PATTERN key (except the keys CIRCLE , CHECKERBOARD ,

MULTIBURST , GREYSCALE , or PLUGE ) longer than one second, for example, the

PURITY key.

• A popup with the selectable purities appears.

Figure 4-53. Purity Selection

4-31

54200

Users Manual

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the purity, for example, PUR_Cyan .


This setting is stored for the purity key function until you select a different purity using the popup menu. Pressing the PURITY key briefly toggles between purity off and the selected purity cyan.

This operating principle applies to all keys which can call up a popup menu:

- DOTS

- CROSSHATCH

WHITE

- DEM

- PURITY

COLOR

COLOR

VCR

DIGITAL SCAN

DIVERSE

For details about the parameters and patterns you can select using popup menus, see

Appendix G.

Pressing the COLOR TEMP key calls up a popup menu which enables access to three other popup menus:

Figure 4-54. Color Temperature Pattern Parameter

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select, for example, CTA_Size Small .


4-32



4

• An additional popup menu appears to select the center size for the pattern.

Figure 4-55. Center Size Selection

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the size, for example, Medium .


The instrument returns to previous selected submenu.

4-33

54200

Users Manual

• Press the

COLOR TEMP key again longer than one second.

• The

CTA_ADJ popup menu appears again.

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the next parameter you want to change, for example, the luminance for the center, CTA_Center 100% .


• An additional popup menu appears to select the luminance level for the center of the pattern.

Figure 4-56. Luminance Level Selection

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the luminance value, for example, 90%.


• Repeat the steps for the third parameter, the luminance level for the border.

For details about all selectable parameters for this pattern, see Appendix G.

4-34



4

Storing and Recalling of Settings

Ninety-nine complete instrument settings can be stored in the non-volatile memory registers 1 to 99.

When you switch off the instrument, the current settings are automatically saved separately.

After power on, the instrument runs through its start routine, and then goes to the mode that was last set.

Storing of Instrument Settings

To store your preferred settings, set the instrument to the mode you want to save, for example:

Figure 4-57. Settings to be Stored

• Press the

STORE key.

• A popup menu appears, showing the last used memory register.

Figure 4-58. Last used Memory Register

4-35

54200

Users Manual

• Key in the register number using the numerical keypad you want to store your settings. You can also use the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the register number. Note that the current memory contents will be overwritten.


Figure 4-59. Input of Memory Register Number

Remark: Already stored data in the register will be overwritten.



The instrument settings are now stored under the selected register number.

4-36

Recalling of Instrument Settings

• To recall stored settings, press the

RECALL key.

• A popup menu appears, showing the last used register.



4

Figure 4-60. Memory Register of Stored Settings

• Use the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to scroll through the register numbers. The instrument shows the stored settings in the selected register on the display.

Figure 4-61. Memory Contents Scrolling

4-37

54200

Users Manual

• You can also key in the requested memory location number using the numerical keypad, for example , 3 4 .


Figure 4-62. Numerical Input of Memory Register Number



4-38

Figure 4-63. Recalled Instrument Settings

The instrument executes the displayed recalled settings.

In addition to the 99 settings individually stored, you can call up register number 0.

Register 0 contains default settings, listed in Chapter 6, Section ‘*RST Reset

Command’.



4

Digital Data and Text

Programmed data and text for PDC, VPS, and WSS are stored in separate memories, see

Chapter 5.

If you store the instrument settings, you automatically store the selected mode into the

memory register for the instrument settings, for example, PDC Data Set 4 on , not the data itself.

If you recall a setting, you also recall the stored PDC, VPS, or WSS mode. The instrument calls up, for example, PDC Data Set 4 on . For the PDC data set contents, the instrument uses the last stored data in the separate PDC memory.

That means, if you program a certain contents for PDC Data Set 4 , store the instrument settings in register 30, program a different contents for PDC Data Set 4 , store the instrument settings in register 35, you will get the same PDC data set 4 contents (the last stored) when calling up memory register 30 or register 35.

4-39

54200

Users Manual

Description and Applications of the Test Patterns

The Fluke 54200 TV Signal Generator provides 16 basic test patterns. Most of these are provided in different versions. It is also possible to combine several test patterns. The test patterns are used for checking and alignment of monochrome and color television sets, VCRs, and video equipment. Colored and B/W patterns are available. Every test pattern is available in 16:9 and 4:3 aspect ratio format. The following description and suggestions show how the test patterns can be applied to full advantage.

Where primary color signal levels for the test patterns are mentioned, for example 100/0/75/0, these levels are according to ITU Rec. 471-1/1994. For further information, see

Appendix E, ‘Nomenclature of Color Bar Signals.’

Overview of Test Patterns

For pattern abbrevations shown in the pattern popup menus, see Appendix G.

Single Test Patterns

• Circle

• Center Cross

Black Center Cross with 2% overscan indications, white background

Black Center Cross with 3% overscan indications, white background

• Dots

White Dots on black background

Black Dots on white background

• Crosshatch

White Crosshatch on black background

Black Crosshatch on white background

Top Left (TL) indication and color burst ON/OFF

• Checkerboard

• White

Selectable white level

• Multiburst

• Greyscale

• DEM (Demodulator Test)

DEM 1, different patterns for TV systems PAL, NTSC, and SECAM

DEM 2, different patterns for TV systems PAL, NTSC, and SECAM

4-40


Description and Applications of the Test Patterns

4

• Purity

Eight patterns with colors: Red, Green, Blue, Magenta, Yellow, Cyan, Black, and White.

• PLUGE

• Color Bar

Full Field Color Bar, different primary color signal levels

Split Field Color Bar, 75% or 100% white

SMPTE Color Bar

Horizontal Color Bar

• Color Temperature

3 different windows with selectable luminance level for center and border

• VCR Test

VCR 1

VCR 2

Standard Resolution Test

High Resolution Test

Writing Current Adjustment

• Digital Scan Test

ADC Check 1 and 2

Moving Block

Progressive Scan Check 1 to 3

• Diverse

EHT Test

IRS17

Combined Test Patterns:

• Combined with Circle

• Twofold Combinations

• Threefold Combinations

• Fourfold Combinations

Insertion-Reference Signal (IRS)

4-41

54200

Users Manual

Circle

Description:

White Circle on a black background in the screen center.

In the 16:9 format small circles are shown in the corners.

The white circle changes automatically to black when used with the white pattern. The circle can be added with all patterns and combined patterns except Progressive

Scan Check 3.

Table 4-1. Circle

4 : 3

625

Line System

525

Aspect Ratio

16 : 9

625

Line System

525

Level Y

• White

• Black

Diameter of central circle

• Horizontal

• Vertical, field 1/ field 2

Position of center of circle

• Horizontal, after start of line sync

• Vertical, field 1/ field 2

Diameter of corner circles

• Horizontal

•

Vertical, field 1/ field 2:

Upper circles

Lower circles

100%

0%

-

100 IRE

7.5 IRE

-

100%

0%

34.23 µ s line 42/355 to line 291/603

34.52 µ s line 34/297* to line 249/511*

25.33 µ s line 42/355 to line 291/603

25.63 µ s line 34/297* to line 249/511*

36.52 µs line 167/479

35.63 µs line 142/404*

36.52 µs line 167/479

35.63 µs line 142/404*

6.15 µ s line 42/354 to line 102/415

100 IRE

7.5 IRE

6.15 µ s line 35/297 to line 86/349 line 231/543 to line 291/604 line 197/459 to line 248/511

Position of center of corner circles

• Horizontal, after start of line sync, left circles

• Horizontal, after start of line sync, right circles

Vertical, upper circles, field 1/ field 2

Vertical, lower circles, field 1/ field 2

16.10 µs

56.90 µs

15.26 µs

56.07 µs line 72/385 line 261/574 line 61/323* line 223/485*

*subtract 3 lines for PAL M

4-42



4

Figure 4-64. Circle, Aspect Ratio 4:3 Figure 4-65. Circle, Aspect Ratio 16:9

Applications:

Circle on a black background is suited for checking the overall linearity and geometry of the screen of a monitor or TV. The white circle on black is useful for checking reflections. In 16:9 Aspect ratio format small circles are present in the corners of the screen to check and adjust the geometric distortion of the complete 16:9 screen.

Center Cross with Border Castellations

Line a

Line b

Line a

Line b

Line c Line c

Line d

Line e

Line d

Line e

Figure 4-66. Center Cross, Aspect Ratio 4:3 Figure 4-67. Center Cross, Aspect Ratio 16:9

Description:

This B/W pattern with color burst offers a white or black center cross with black/white or white/black (respectively) border castellations on a selectable background. The center cross is black on a white background but changes to white when a different background color is selected, for example, combination with purity. 2% or 3% overscan indications are selectable. The primary color signal levels are 100/0/75/0 for 625 line systems and

100/7.7/75/7.5 for 525 line systems. Further details and timing of the pattern are shown below.

Figure 4-68. Center Cross, Timing

4-43

54200

Users Manual

Table 4-2. Center Cross

625

4 : 3

Line System

525

Aspect Ratio

625

16 : 9

Line System

525

Overscan indication

• Horizontal/vertical direction

Position of border castellations

•

Horizontal direction

Border castellations 2% / 3%:

Parameter 1

Parameter 2

Parameter 4

Parameter 5

• Vertical direction

Border castellations 2%:

Line a: 1. field / 2. field

Line b, 1. field /.2 field

Line d, 1. field / 2. field

Line e, 1. field / 2. field

Border castellations 3%:

Line a: 1. field / 2. field

Line b, 1. field /.2 field

Line d, 1. field / 2. field

Line e, 1. field / 2. field

Position of center cross

•

Horizontal line, line c,

1. field / 2. field

• Vertical line,

Parameter 3 alternating black / white border

2% / 3% of active line




10.5/ 10.5 µs

11.6/ 12.1 µs

61.5/ 61.0 µs

62.5/ 62.5 µs

2% / 3% of active field

9.2/ 9.2 µs

10.2/ 10.7 µs

61.0/ 60.5 µs

62.1/ 62.1 µs


10.5/ 10.5 µs

11.6/ 12.1 µs

61.5/ 61.0 µs

62.5/ 62.5 µs


9.2/ 9.2 µs

10.2/ 10.7 µs

61.0/ 60.5 µs

62.1/ 62.1 µs

2% / 3% of active field line 23/ 336 line 28/ 341 line 305/ 618 line 310/ 623 line 21/ 283* line 25/ 287* line 259/ 521* line 263/ 525* line 23/ 336 line 28/ 341 line 305/ 618 line 310/ 623 line 21/ 283* line 25/ 287* line 259/ 521* line 263/ 525* line 23/ 336 line 31/ 343 line 303/ 615 line 310/ 623 line 21/ 283* line 27/ 290* line 256/ 519* line 263/ 525* line 23/ 336 line 31/ 343 line 303/ 615 line 310/ 623 line 21/ 283* line 27/ 290* line 256/ 519* line 263/ 525* line 167/ 479 line 142/ 404* line 167/ 479 line 142/ 404*

36.52 µ s 35.63 µ s 36.52 µ s 35.63 µ s

*subtract 3 lines for PAL M

Applications:

Center Cross is ideal to center TV monitors and TV screens and alignment of picture height/picture width. Furthermore, it is used to check the deflection linearity and the pincushion correction. Overcan indications allow precise adjustment of the wanted picture size. Blurred shown vertical lines point to a bad frequency response and multiple lines may be the result of reflections.

4-44



4

Dots

Figure 4-69. Dots, Aspect Ratio 16:9

Description:

Dots is a full field B/W pattern with white dots on a black background with additional center indication.

For further details, see table below. The pattern can be switched over to black dots on a white background by selecting Dots_Black in the Dots popup menu.

Applications:

This pattern is used for checking and adjusting the static convergence. The screen should contain pure white dots. The presence of colored dots points to faults in focusing and convergence. For checking reflections select this pattern with a white background.

Level Y

• White

•

Black

Position of center indication

• Vertical direction 1. field

2. field

•

Horizontal direction, after start of line sync pulse

Table 4-3. Dots

Aspect Ratio

4 : 3

Line System

625 525

16 : 9

Line System

625 525

100%

0% line 167 line 479

36.52

µ s

100 IRE

7.5 IRE

100%

0%

100 IRE

7.5 IRE line 142* line 404* line 167 line 479 line 142* line 404*

35.63 µs 36.52

µ s 35.63

µ s

* subtract 3 lines for PAL M

4-45

54200

Users Manual

Crosshatch

Figure 4-70. Crosshatch, Aspect Ratio 4:3

4-46

Figure 4-71. Crosshatch, Aspect Ratio 16:9

Description:

Crosshatch is a full field B/W pattern with either 18 (4:3) or 24 (16:9) vertical and 14 horizontal lines. The pattern has a center indication and a selectable top-left (TL) indication. The color burst can be switched off. The background can be changed to white with black crosshatch by selecting CH_Black in the Crosshatch popup menu.

Applications:

This pattern is mainly used for checking and aligning dynamic and corner convergence of TVs or monitors. In case of convergence faults the lines are not shown in white but breaking up in the three primary colors RGB. If pincushion correction is needed E/W and

N/S adjustments have to be made. Geometric distortions are visible on the screen if the squares of the crosshatch do not have the same size over the whole screen and are not quadratic (linearity). Furthermore the stability of the EHT voltage of a TV can be checked. For details, see Pattern EHT Test, Figures 4-104 and 4-105.

The Crosshatch pattern can be used for the following picture geometry adjustments or settings:

• Horizontal and vertical picture centering

• Horizontal and vertical linearity (S correction)

• Barrel distortion

• Trapezium distortion (keystone distortion)

• Pincushion distortion

Blurred vertical lines point to a bad frequency response. Multiple lines may be the result of reflections or undue tendency to oscillate.

Differences in the brightness of the vertical and horizontal lines point to amplitude faults in the Y channel of a TV. In case mains hum interference in the synchronization occurs this test pattern reveals it.



4

Level Y

• White

• Black

Position of crosshatch lines

• Horizontal lines:

First horizontal line, field1 / field 2.

Distance between horizontal lines

• Vertical lines:

First vertical line, after start of line sync pulse

Distance between vertical lines

Table 4-4. Crosshatch

Aspect Ratio

4 : 3

Line System

625 525

16 : 9

Line System

625 525

100%

0%

30/342

21

12.0 µs

2.89 µs

100 IRE

7.5 IRE

24/287*

18

11.11 µs

100%

0%

30/342

21

11.85 µs

100 IRE

7.5 IRE

24/287*

18

10.96 µs

2.89 µs 2.15 µs 2.15 µs

* subtract 3 lines for PAL M

Checkerboard

Figure 4-72. Checkerboard, Aspect Ratio 4:3

Figure 4-73. Checkerboard, Aspect Ratio 16:9

Description:

Checkerboard is a full field B/W pattern with color burst and comprises nine times twelve

(4:3) or nine times sixteen (16:9) squares.

625 525

Level Y Line Systems Line Systems

White

Black

100%

0%

100 IRE

7.5 IRE

Applications:

The checkerboard pattern provides a visual standard for basic picture tube alignments and gives a clear impression of B/W performance of TV or CTV. Any fault, for example, in horizontal or vertical synchronization, deflection or linearity will show up immediately. Bandwidth can be checked by observing the vertical transitions. Transitions from black to white should be sharp.

Furthermore, this pattern indicates mains hum interference in the synchronization and no picture interference (Moiré) should occur

(sound eventually to be switched off).

4-47

54200

Users Manual

White Pattern

Figure 4-74. White Pattern

Multiburst

Figure 4-75. Multiburst

Description:

White is a fullfield pattern with color burst.

In 625 line systems the white level is selectable:

Y = 0%, 5%, 15% to 100% in 5% steps.

In 525 line systems:

Y = 7.5 IRE, 15 IRE to 100 IRE in 5 IRE steps.

Applications:

White pattern is designed for a proper white setting and for an overall check of purity. It is also useful for adjustment of the maximum beam current of the picture tube. In addition, the brightness control circuitry test can be carried out.

For videocassette recorders the luminance play back level, the AGC level, and the E-E level (feedthrough signal electronic to electronic) are checked or adjusted by means of the 100% white signal. Furthermore the

'white/dark clip' and the 'white frequency' of the

FM modulator are adjusted by this pattern.

For SVHS recorders the white pattern is additionally used as CVBS or Y/C signal to adjust phase corrections (Y and chroma skew levels) or the red and green levels of the RGB decoder.

Description:

Multiburst contains a reference bar followed by six full screen vertical frequency bursts according CCIR

Rec. 473-5. These frequencies are 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0,

4.8, and 5.8 MHz for 625 line systems. Because of a lower bandwidth for the 525 line systems the upper three frequencies are 3.0, 3.58, and 4.2 MHz.

Applications:

This pattern checks the bandwidth of the video or luminance amplifier in B/W or CTVs as well as the resolution of monitors and video recorders. It can also be used to check or measure the frequency amplitude response. Furthermore, the luminance suppression of the Y/C separator of a SVHS recorder is adjusted by this pattern.

4-48



4

Greyscale

Figure 4-76. Greyscale

Description:

Greyscale with color burst is a full screen linear staircase signal with ten vertical steps from black to white, Y = 0% to 100% (7.5 IRE to 100 IRE).

Applications:

The Greyscale pattern is used to locate faulty linearity of the video amplifier or greyscale setting.

Nonlinearities mainly result in a compression of the white level.

A color receiver should show no color in any of the ten bars. Color here means that the guns of the picture tube are incorrectly adjusted. This pattern is also used when checking the contrast and brightness control.

DEM Pattern

DEM offers two different test patterns: DEM 1 and DEM 2. The signal contents of the

DEM patterns depend on the TV system that is selected.

DEM 1 (PAL)

The DEM 1 pattern for PAL has different V and U levels for 625 or 525 line systems and contains four horizontal bars. The luminance is set to 50% for 625 and to 53.8% for 525 line systems. For details, see Figures 4-77 and 4-78.

• The first bar consists of two rectangles.The left part contains V and U colordifference signals and G-Y is zero. The right part is a reference bar with no color information, only 50% luminance (Y signal).

• The second bar consists of four colored squares with color information that is PAL coded. This bar indicates a proper functioning of the color demodulator part.

• The third bar consists of four squares that are color coded (anti-PAL) but should not show any color at a well aligned color television or monitor: The burst signal is PAL coded and checks the operation of the PAL switch in a color receiver. The first and second square contain only V- signals (U = 0) while the third and fourth square contain only U- signals (V = 0). All four squares should be grey on the screen.

• The fourth bar shows a grey reference bar: Y = 50% (53.8%) with no color information.

4-49

54200

Users Manual

2 rectangles: colored / grey

4 colored squares (PAL coded)

4 colorless squares (anti-PAL coded)

1 grey square

∆ U = 0 ÿÿ

V = 0

Figure 4-77. DEM 1 (PAL, 625 Line System)

2 rectangles: colored / grey

4 colored squares (PAL coded)

4 colorless squares (anti-PAL coded)

1 grey square

∆ U = 0 ÿÿ

V = 0


Delay Line Check:

The third bar of this pattern is designed for alignment of the 64

µs chrominance delay in amplitude and phase. 'Venetian blinds' appear when adjustment is needed. It is possible to distinguish between amplitude and phase faults by noting in which square these blinds appear. Since the V signal in square one and two are anti-PAL coded, the delay line and

PAL switch should eliminate all R-Y information since this information in successive lines of the first two squares is subtracted.

When an amplitude error exists between direct and delayed signals, the subtracter output of the delay line will produce R-Y information in square one and two. The action of the

PAL switch will cause the information to be inverted on alternate lines to give the venetian blind effect.

When a phase error exists between direct and delayed signals, venetian blinds will show up in squares three and four. Additionally, they also will appear in the yellowish horizontal bar (G-Y = 0) of the upper left section of this test pattern.

4-50



4

Demodulator Check:

This pattern can also be used to pick up faults in other important parts of the color TV, the demodulators. The subcarrier frequency should be applied to the R-Y and B-Y demodulators in the correct phase; otherwise, all four squares in the third bar will contain color.

When the phase of the subcarrier fed to a demodulator is correct, the R-Y demodulator will only demodulate R-Y information, and the B-Y unit will only demodulate B-Y information.

When the subcarrier frequency has a phase difference, this results in R-Y information passing the B-Y demodulator in squares three and four. Similarly, the R-Y demodulator could receive B-Y information. Then this will be seen as color information in squares one and two. So a phase error in the subcarrier at both demodulators (that is, a general phase fault) causes both to pass incorrect information. The fault shows up as a color in all four squares.

A phase fault only related to the 90° phase-shifted subcarrier will only cause one demodulator to pass incorrect information. This fault will cause color either in the first two or last two squares, depending on the type of receiver.

DEM 1 (NTSC)

Figure 4-79. DEM 1 (NTSC)

DEM 1 pattern for NTSC is a B/W and color pattern comprising three horizontal bars:

• Bar 1 consists of a standard color bar with seven colors:

White, Yellow, Cyan, Green, Magenta, Red, and Blue.

The primary color signal levels are 75/7.5/75/7.5 which equals the first part of the

SMPTE color bar.

Bar 2 of this pattern comprises two rectangles. The left-hand side contains I = -0.228

information and where the information on the Q-axis is equal to zero. On the righthand side Q = +0.228 information is present where the I-axis is equal to zero. With these two areas basically the Q- and I-demodulators of NTSC equipment can be checked.

• Bar 3 contains white level (Y = 100 IRE) and black level (Y = 7.5 IRE). This bar can be used to adjust contrast (difference between white level and black level) and brightness (black level) of the picture.

4-51

54200

Users Manual

DEM 1 (SECAM)

W = White, Y = Yellow, C = Cyan, G = Green

M = Magenta, R = Red, B = Blue, Bk = Black

Figure 4-80. DEM 1 (SECAM)

DEM 1 for SECAM is a test pattern divided into six horizontal bars.

• Bar 1 contains a 161 mV chrominance signal with the bell-filter center frequency

4.286 MHz.

• Bar 2 shows a color bar pattern with reduced primary color signal levels 30/0/30/0:

White, Yellow, Cyan, Green, Magenta, Red, Blue, and Black.

• Bar 3 and 4 show similar color bars with standard primary color signal levels

75/0/75/0. Bar 3 starts with White, Bar 4 with Magenta.

• Bar 5 shows magenta followed by a 75% reference white.

• Bar 6 shows a 100% reference white.

Applications:

This pattern is sufficient to check and adjust SECAM demodulators, bell filters, and the burst keying.

• Bar 1 is used for bell filter adjustment and checking the demodulator.

• Bar 2 to 4 serves for color representation.

• Bar 5 is used to check the burst keying. When the burst keying is wrong the white area will have color errors.

• Bar 6 serves as standard white pattern.

4-52



4

DEM 2 (PAL)

DEM 2 for PAL is a fullfield pattern and shows four colorless vertical bars that are 'anti-

PAL' coded. The V and U levels are different for 625 or 525 line systems. The luminance is set to 50% for 625 and to 53.8% for 525 line systems.

For details, see Figures 4-81 and 4-82.

Applications:

This pattern is used for checks and adjustments of the PAL decoding and should not show any color at a well aligned color television or monitor: all four squares should be grey. For further details how to check the delay line or demodulator, see pattern DEM 1

(PAL).

∆ U = 0 ÿÿ V = 0


∆ U = 0 ÿÿ V = 0


DEM 2 (NTSC)

DEM 2 for NTSC is a color pattern and comprises two horizontal bars:

• Bar 1: +V, -V, +U, and -U vectors, Y = 53.8%

• Bar 2: +I, -I, +Q, and -Q vectors, Y = 53.8%

For further details, see Figure 4-83.

∆

U = 0

ÿÿ

V = 0

♦

Q = 0 l

I = 0

Figure 4-83. DEM 2 (NTSC)

Applications: see DEM 1 (NTSC)

4-53

54200

Users Manual

DEM 2 (SECAM)

DEM 2 for SECAM is a full field pattern with a horizontal frequency sweep with 'bell frequency’ as center frequency. The luminance is 50% and the chrominance is according to the bell filter shape.

Chrominance subcarrier:

Start frequency 4.033 MHz

Center frequency 4.286 MHz

Stop frequency 4.56 MHz

Figure 4-84. DEM 2 (SECAM)

Applications:

Checks and adjustment of SECAM decoders, especially video de-emphasis and bell filters (cloche).

In the receiver, after the antibell filter, the chrominance signal should have the same amplitude in the active video part.

4-54

Purity

Figure 4-85. Purity Pattern



4

Description:

Purity offers eight different full field patterns:

• Primary colors: Red, Green, Blue

• Complementary colors: Magenta, Yellow, Cyan

• Black, White

The primary color signal levels are 100/0/75/0* for

625 line systems respectively 100/7.5/75/7.5* for

525 line systems.

* For details, see Appendix E.

Applications:

The red and green patterns are most frequently used for checking color purity. In a correctly adjusted receiver, each electron beam will strike only one set of color dots or stripes on the screen. If the red pattern is selected only this color should be visible; the presence of any other color is an indication that color purity needs adjustment.

The green pattern provides a purity check for three inline tubes. In addition the pattern serves as a reference to locate any geometrical distortions in these picture tubes. In the in-line tubes, the guns are in a horizontal position and the green gun is located in the center.

Blue as well as the complementary colors are often used to check the color performance.

These patterns (mainly RED) are used to ensure that there is no interference between the sound and chroma carrier.

The RED pattern with a 75% saturation setting serves for adjustment of the chrominance writing current of

VCRs. Often the adjustment of the luminance and chrominance writing current must be carried out together. Furthermore the red pattern is used to adjust the longplay delay level to minimum flicker. Also, comb filters can be adjusted for chrominance subcarrier suppression, for example,

627 kHz for the VHS system.

In addition to the primary and complementary colors

100% white can be selected as well as black pattern with color burst to check, for example, the front and back porch of the synchronization pulses.

Furthermore purity patterns are used for measuring unwanted amplitude and phase modulation of the subcarrier, AM and PM noise as it occurs with VCRs.

4-55

54200

Users Manual

PLUGE

1 2 3

Figure 4-86. PLUGE

Description:

The PLUGE signal (Picture Line-Up Generating

Equipment) is an international standardized B/W test pattern with color burst according to CCIR Rep. 1221 and comprises three vertical bars on a black background.

Background

Bar 1: ultra black

Bar 2: dark grey

Bar 3: 4 squares: white

1st grey

2nd grey

3rd grey

Table 4-5. PLUGE

625

Line System

Y = 0%

Y = -1.6%

Y = +1.6%

525

Line System

Y = 7.5 IRE

Y = 4.8 IRE

Y = 10.7 IRE

Y = 100%

Y = 64.3%

Y = 28.6%

Y = 15.7%

Y = 100 IRE

Y = 67 IRE

Y = 33.9 IRE

Y = 22 IRE

Applications:

PLUGE is used to perform accurate and consistent line-up of picture monitors. The usual procedure is to adjust the brightness control of a monitor so that bar 1 is invisible on the background while bar 2 can be still distinguished. The white level luminance is mainly adjusted by the contrast control to 70

±10 cd/m 2 by means of the upper 100% white area of the vertical greyscale.

4-56



4

Color Bar

Color Bar offers four different test patterns:

• Full Field Color Bar

• Split Field Color Bar

• SMPTE Color Bar

• Horizontal Color Bar

Full Field Color Bar

The full field Color Bar shows from left to right eight vertical bars for the 625 line systems:

White, Yellow, Cyan, Green, Magenta, Red, Blue, and Black. For 625 line systems this pattern offers four selectable primary color signal levels. For further details, see table below.

For 525 line systems the first seven vertical bars are shown; the black bar is not present.

Two primary color signal levels are selectable.

Table 4-6. Full Field Color Bar

625 Line System 525 Line System Display indication

• Level

COL_75_0

COL_100_0

COL_75_25

COL_100_25

75 / 0 / 75/ 0*

100 / 0 / 75 / 0*

75 / 0 / 100 / 25*

75 / 7.5 / 75 / 7.5*

100 / 7.5 / 75 / 7.5*

-

100 / 0 / 100 / 25*

*according to ITU Rec. 471-1/ 1994;

* for details, see Appendix E.

Figure 4-87. Color Bar, 625 Line Systems

4-57

54200

Users Manual

Applications:

The color bar pattern in fact provides sufficient information for a good overall check on color performance. This includes the checks on burst keying, subcarrier regeneration,

RGB amplifiers, the delay chrominance/luminance and saturation check.

For VCRs this pattern is mainly used for checking the delay chrominance to luminance, saturation, or to adjust the AFC and balance of the chrominance.

For S-VHS recorders the color bar pattern signal is required as CVBS, RGB, or Y/C signal. Checks and adjustments of the RGB encoder or decoder, luminance suppression, and cross luminance suppression of the Y/C separator are realized by this pattern.

Split Field Color Bar

This pattern comprises 2/3 field of the color bar signal and 1/3 field purity pattern. 75% or 100% White Level (WL) is selectable. Amplitudes of the remaining bars are

WL/0/75/0 for 625 line systems respectively WL/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 line systems. Any color of the color bar signal is selectable in the lower third part of the screen. The level of the purity part is identical to the color bar part. Select the purity-color first followed by the Split Field Color Bar.

Figure 4-88. Split Field Color Bar,

525 Line Systems

Figure 4-89. Split Field Color Bar,


Applications:

The white bar, for example, is used as reference to adjust the amplitude of the color difference signals with respect to the luminance signal on the picture tube. This signal can be used for aligning the signal amplitude of the demodulators and matrix circuitry, as the output can be compared with the reference bar. For example, the blue and green guns

(path) can be switched off to allow the amplitude of the R-Y signal to be adjusted. This is done by ensuring that no difference in brightness is observed between the vertical bars five and six of the color bar and the horizontal reference bar. In a similar fashion, the amplitude of the B-Y demodulator can be determined. After this test, the matrix circuit can be checked with only the green gun switched on. For further applications, see ‘Full

Field Color Bar’ earlier in this chapter.

4-58



4

SMPTE Color Bar

The SMPTE Color Baris according to SMPTE EG 1-1990.

Three horizontal bars comprises:

Bar 1:

Color bar, from left to right:

Grey, Yellow, Cyan, Green, Magenta, Red, Blue.

Bar 2:

Chroma set signal, from left to right:

Blue, Black, Magenta, Black, Cyan, Black, Grey.

Bar 3:

Black set signal.

For further details, see Figure 4-90.

The primary color signal levels are 75/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 line systems respectively

75/0/75/0 for 625 line systems.

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3


-I

White

+Q

Black

Black 4.8 IRE

Black

Black 10.7 IRE

Black


-V

White

+U

Black

Black -1.6%

Black

Black +1.6%

Black

Figure 4-90. SMPTE Color Bar

Applications:

This pattern is intended to standardize the adjustment of chroma gain, chroma phase, and black level monitor controls. The chroma set bar is arranged such below the regular color bars that the blue channel is at full amplitude in both signals at the same time. For correct adjustment of the color reproduction on a monitor, the red and green channels are switched off. The monitor chroma gain is adjusted by matching the brightness of the outer left or right main blue bar with the chroma set bar just below. In a similar way, the chroma phase is adjusted by matching the brightness of either center main blue bar with the chroma set bar just below. The lower PLUGE part of the signal permits adjusting the monitor brightness and contrast. The monitor brightness control is adjusted in a way so that the 'whiter-than-black bar' (7) is visible with respect to the black surround but the

'blacker-than-black bar' (5) is not visible. The color reference signals -I and +Q can be used for phase relationship adjustment by a vectorscope.

4-59

54200

Users Manual

Horizontal Color Bar

This pattern shows eight horizontal bars of the color bar signal with primary color signal levels 75/0/75/0 for 625 line systems and 75/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 line systems,

(respectively). Beginning from the top:

White, Yellow, Cyan, Green, Magenta, Red, Blue, and Black.

4-60

Figure 4-91. Horizontal Color Bar

Applications:

This pattern serves for a quick check of color monitors.

For further applications, see ‘Full Field Color Bar’ earlier in this chapter.

Color Temperature Adjustment

Color Temperature Adjustment is a full field B/W pattern and has a white window with black borders. Three different windows are selectable to meet the size of the tube for the color sensor used in the measuring equipment. Window size Small covers 21% of the active picture area while windows Medium and Large cover 17% with different dimensions. The luminance level of the window and the black border are selectable. For further details, see table below and next page.

Table 4-7. Color Temperature Adjustment

625 Line System Color Temperature Adjustment

Luminance level

• Border part Y

B

= 0%

Y

B

= 50%

Y

B

= 100%

525 Line System

Y

B

= 7.5 IRE

Y

B

= 53.75 IRE

Y

B

= 100 IRE

Default setting

•

Center part

Default setting

CTA_Size Small (for 14" picture tubes)

•

•

Width

Height per frame

Y

B

= 0%

Y

C

= 0%, 5%,

Y

C

= 15% to 100% in 5% steps

Y

C

= 100%

21% of active picture area

20.74 µs

304 lines

Y

B

= 7.5 IRE

Y

C

= 7.5 IRE,

Y

C

= 15 IRE to 100 IRE in 5 IRE steps

Y

C

= 100 IRE


21.04 µs

258 lines



4

•

•

Width

Height per frame

CTA_Size Large (for 36" picture tubes)

•

•

Width

Height per frame

Table 4-7. Color Temperature Adjustment (continuous)

Color Temperature Adjustment

CTA_Size Medium (for 28" picture tubes)

625 Line System


32.44 µs

156 lines


42.37 µs

120 lines

525 Line System


33.04 µs

132 lines


42.82 µs

102 lines

Figure 4-92. Color Temperature Adjustment

Applications:

This pattern is used for checks and adjustments of the standard white of CRTs. Most television systems have standardized on 'Color White D6500 Kelvin' or '3200 Kelvin' as the correct white reference necessary for a natural color reproduction. Three white windows with a different size are selectable to adapt the measurement equipment for picture tubes in the 14" through 36" range.

4-61

54200

Users Manual

VCR Test

VCR 1

Figure 4-93. VCR 1

The VCR test offers five different test patterns which are specially designed to check the bandwidth, linearity, sensitivity, and AGC of the chroma amplifiers in color video recorders. These test patterns are:

• VCR 1

• VCR 2

• Standard Resolution Test

• High Resolution Test

• Writing Current Adjustment

• Parameters are matched to 625 or 525 line systems.

VCR 1 is a full field B/W pattern of three vertical bars with color burst and a luminance of 0% respectively

100% (7.5/100 IRE).

Position, horiz.

direction relative to sync: start/width

• Bar 1

• Bar 2

•

Bar 3

Table 4-8. VCR 1

625

Line System

525

Line System

10.5 / 13.0

23.6 / 19.5

43.0 / 19.5

µ

µ

µ s s s

9.2 / 13.2 µ

22.4 / 19.9

42.2 / 19.9 s

µ

µ s s

Applications:

This pattern is used for a reflection check or for adjusting the VCR video demodulator to a symmetrical black-and-white jump or opposite.

4-62

VCR 2

Figure 4-94. VCR 2



4

VCR 2 is a combined test pattern and is divided into the following four horizontal bars:

• Horizontal 100% white bar (100 IRE) covering 1/6 field for exact level adjustment.

• A bar covering 1/3 field starting with a reference bar followed by six vertical frequency bursts. For details, see ‘Multiburst’ pattern earlier in this chapter. This part is used to align the high-pass filter for a maximum resolution in the VCR bandwidth.

• The next part of the pattern contains eight steps of decreasing linear saturation steps of the R-Y signal.

For 625 line systems U = 0 and V decreases from

0.44 to 0.

For 525 line systems Q = 0 and I decreases from

0.45 to 0.

This part is used to check the chroma amplifier linearity and color AGC circuitry. For example, if the chroma writing current is too high, color will be visible in the last bar where no color should be seen normally.

• The bottom section consists of a black horizontal bar with a white square moving smoothly from left to right to check moving pictures or slow motion function on video recorders. The speed of the moving bar is 4.7 s for one cycle in 625 line systems and 4.0 s in 525 line systems.

4-63

54200

Users Manual

Standard Resolution Test

2.8 MHz

Figure 4-95. Standard Resolution Test

Standard Resolution Test is a full field B/W pattern of two vertical bars with color burst,. The first bar is

100% white followed by the second bar which contains a 2.8 MHz frequency burst.

Applications:

This pattern can be used for VHS recorders to check the resolution of the complete instrument, indicating that the tape deck, and the recording and playback path are proper adjusted.

High Resolution Test

5 MHz

High Resolution Test is a full field B/W pattern of two vertical bars with color burst, the first bar is 100% white, the second contains a 5 MHz frequency burst.

Applications:

This pattern can be used for SVHS and Hi8 recorders to check the resolution of the instrument, indicating that the tape deck, and the recording and playback path are proper adjusted.

Figure 4-96. High Resolution Test

Writing Current Adjustment

Figure4-97. Writing Current Adjustment

Writing Current Adjustment is a full field red pattern with a special luminance amplitude of

Y = 65.4% (Y = 458 mV) for 625 line systems and

67.8 IRE (Y = 485 mV) for 525 line systems and

R = 1; G = B = 0.505.

Applications:

This pattern is specially designed for the adjustment of the luminance writing current of VCRs.

Digital Scan Test

Digital Scan Test offers six different test patterns:

• ADC Check 1 and 2

• Moving Block

• Progressive Scan Check 1 to 3.

4-64



4

ADC Check 1

ADC Check 1 is a combined B/W and color pattern with eight horizontal bars. The color contents are matched to 625 or 525 line systems.

• Bar 1:

• Bar 2:

• Bar 3:

Luminance ramp from black to white as bar 1 but with swapped MSB/LSB

625 Line System 525 Line System

V ramp, U = 0,

R - Y = -0.887 to +0.887,

I ramp, Q = 0,

I = -0.734 to +0.734

Y = 50% Y = 53.8%

Note: Color Green exceeds the nominal range

• Bar 4:

625 Line System

U ramp, V = 0,

B - Y = -0.701 to +0.701,

Y = 50%


525 Line System

Q ramp, I = 0

Q = -0.520 to +0.520

Y = 53.8%

• Bar 5:

• Bar 6:

• Bar 7:

• Bar 8:

Luminance ramp from black to white

Red ramp, primary color signal level 0% to 100%

Green ramp, primary color signal level 0% to 100%

Blue ramp, primary color signal level 0% to 100%

Figure 4-98. ADC Check 1

Applications:

This test pattern is used to check the correct converting of luminance and chrominance signals in the AD converters in modern TV equipment.

4-65

54200

Users Manual

ADC Check 2

ADC Check 2 is a combined B/W and color pattern with 15 horizontal bars on a black background. The color contents are matched to 625 or 525 line systems.

• Background:

Black

• Bar 1, 4, 7, 10, 13:

Luminance ramp

• Bar 2, 5, 8, 11, 14:

625 Line Systems 525 Line Systems

V ramp, U = 0,

R - Y = -0.887 to +0.887,

I ramp, Q = 0,

I = -0.734 to +0.734

Y = 50% Y = 53.8%


• Bar 3, 6, 9, 12, 15:


U ramp, V = 0,

B - Y = -0.701 to +0.701,

Y = 50%


Q ramp, I = 0

Q = -0.520 to +0.520

Y = 53.8%


Figure 4-99. ADC Check 2

Applications:

This test pattern is used to check the correct converting of luminance and chrominance signals in the AD converters in modern TV equipment.

4-66



4

Moving Block

Moving Block is a full field B/W pattern with color burst. A vertical white block with

Y = 100% (100 IRE) moves smoothly from left to right on a black background. Duration of one moving cycle is 4.7 s for 625 line systems and 4.0 s for 525 line systems.

This test pattern can be used to check the correct digital video processing, especially AD conversion of modern TV equipment. Moving pictures or slow motion function can be checked on VCRs by the pattern.

Figure 4-100. Moving Block

Progressive Scan Check 1

This B/W pattern with color burst offers four horizontal white lines on a black background moving in vertical direction from top to bottom. The motion can be switched off at any position of the screen by selecting the DIGI_SCAN1_S test pattern. The pattern contains 50 Hz and 25 Hz test signals for 625 line systems respectively 60 and 30 Hz signals for 525 line systems.

The first white line is only present in the first or second field. This will result in a 25 Hz/

30 Hz test signal. The second horizontal line is composed of a line in the first and second field producing a normal interlaced 50 Hz/ 60 Hz signal. The third and fourth white lines, comprising two TV lines, are combinations of the first two lines.

A. 1 TV line (one field only)

B. 1 TV line (1. and 2. field)

C. 2 TV lines (1 TV line as A and 1 line as B)

D. 2 TV lines (2 TV lines as B)

Figure 4-101. Progressive Scan Check 1

Applications:

Progressive Scan Check is a special test pattern to test modern Enhanced Definition TV equipment that is commonly used for bigger picture tubes. In these TVs the 50 Hz/ 60

Hz transmitted images are stored, processed and read out with double picture tube scan rate. This process doubles the field frequency and avoids typical 50 Hz/ 60 Hz picture disturbances like image flicker.

For reduction of the line flicker, different video processing techniques, for example

Digital Scan, are used in such TV.

4-67

54200

Users Manual

This test pattern will be shown differently on a normal or a double scan rate TV receiver.

In general, the double scan rate TV will display a stable picture on the screen when using this test signal, while a normal TV set will show a very unstable picture with line and image flicker. Depending on the processing technique of the double scan rate TV receiver the result may differ a little.


This B/W pattern with color burst offers four vertical white lines on a black background moving in horizontal direction from left to right. The motion can be switched off at any position of the screen by selecting the DIGI_SCAN2_S test pattern. This pattern contains

50 Hz and 25 Hz test signals for 625 line systems and 60 and 30 Hz signals for 525 line systems.

The first white line of 200 ns is only present in one field. This will result in a 25 Hz or

30 Hz test signal. The second 200 ns vertical line is visible in the first and second field producing a normal 50 Hz/ 60 Hz signal. The third line has a width of 370 ns in one field and 200 ns in the next field. The fourth 370 ns vertical line is identical in both fields.

A. 0.2 µs, one field only

B. 0.2 µs, both fields

C. 0.37 µs one field, 0.2 µs next field

D. 0.37 µs both fields

2 µs distance between each vertical line A to D


Applications: See Progressive Scan Check 1.


This B/W pattern with color burst offers five groups of four white lines on a black background alternating in +45°/-45° orientation. The pattern moves in horizontal direction from left to right. The motion can be switched off at any position on the screen by selecting the DIGI_SCAN3_S test pattern.

The contents of the four white lines are identical to pattern Progressive Scan Check 2.

A. 0.2 µs, one field only

B. 0.2 µs, both fields

C. 0.37 µs one field, 0.2 µs next field

D. 0.37 µs both fields

2 µs distance between each vertical line A to D


Applications: See Progressive Scan Check 1.

4-68



4

DIVERSE

The DIVERSE key offers two different test patterns:

EHT Test

IRS17

EHT Test

EHT Test is a B/W pattern with white border lines (Y = 95% or 95 IRE) forming a rectangle with a white window (Y = 100% or 100 IRE) in the center of the screen on a black background. The window is automatically switched off and on at a frequency of about 4 Hz (625 line systems) or 5 Hz (525 Hz line systems).

Press the DIVERSE key to select the EHT TEST in the Diverse popup menu.

Figure 4-104. EHT Test, Window OFF Figure 4-105. EHT Test, Window ON

Applications:

This pattern is specially designed for testing of the EHT (Extremely-High Tension) stabilization in TV receivers and monitors. The outer rectangle should remain the same shape and size when the middle part changes from black to white and vice versa. If this rectangle changes, the EHT is not stable.

4-69

54200

Users Manual

IRS17

Description:

The IRS17 test pattern (Insertion-Reference Signal) is generated only for PAL 625 line systems in the visible part of the TV lines. The IRS17 signal is according to EBU Rec. R26-

1981 (1995 edition) and serves to detect, measure, and correct distortion in TV signals.

Details IRS17:

• a luminance bar (reference white), amplitude 0.7 V.

• a 2T sine-squared pulse, Half Amplitude Duration (HAD) 200 ns.

• a modulated 20T pulse, HAD 2 µs.

• a 5 step staircase luminance signal, 140 mV per step.

Figure 4-106. IRS17 Test Pattern

The line contents of the IRS17 pattern are identical to the IRS Line 17 signal, see Figure 4-113.

The IRS17 test pattern can be switched on only for all PAL 625 line systems.

Press the DIVERSE key to select in the Diverse popup menu IRS17 .

Remark:

If you select the Crosshatch pattern without color burst the chroma signal in the IRS17 is also switched off.

Applications:

This signal combination is mainly used as test lines for automatic measurement and monitoring of TV signals. The luminance bar also serves as amplitude reference for automatic level control.

The following distortions can be measured using the IRS17 signal:

• Luminance bar: distortion, level error, line time waveform, overshoot and rounding.

• 2T pulse: group delay, amplitude error, pulse distortion, and reflections.

• 20T pulse: amplitude and delay difference between luminance and chrominance.

• Staircase luminance signal: static nonlinearity, amplitude nonlinearity.

4-70



4

Combined Test Patterns

You can combine different test patterns to twofold, threefold, or fourfold patterns.

Pattern combinations are directly accessible using the pattern keys.

CIRCLE

The white circle can be added to all patterns and pattern combinations except Progressive

Scan Check 3. The pattern changes to Black Circle when Purity White or the White pattern is switched on.

Figure 4-107. Greyscale / Circle

Twofold Combinations of Patterns

CENTER CROSS with border castellations can be combined with:

• CROSSHATCH

• DOTS as standard Crosshatch, but with border castellations as standard Dots, but with additional Center Cross with border castellations.

• PURITY for details, see Center Cross with border castellations

Figure 4-108. Crosshatch / Center Indication / Circle

4-71

54200

Users Manual

CROSSHATCH can be combined with:

• DOTS as standard dots but additionally with

Crosshatch

Figure 4-109. Crosshatch / Dots

GREYSCALE can be combined with:

• WHITE

• MULTIBURST

• COLOR BAR, vertical full field

4/6 field Greyscale

2/6 field White

3/6 field Greyscale

3/6 field Multiburst

3/6 field Greyscale

3/6 field Color Bar

Figure 4-110. Greyscale / White Pattern

MULTIBURST can be combined with:

• COLOR BAR, vertical full field

3/6 field Color Bar

3/6 field Multiburst

4-72



4

Threefold Combinations of Patterns

• CIRCLE

• GREYSCALE

+ COLOR BAR, vertical full field

+ MULTIBURST

• CENTER CROSS

+ CROSSHATCH

+ DOTS with all twofold combinations

2/6 field Greyscale

2/6 field Color Bar

2/6 field Multiburst as standard Center Cross, but with additional Crosshatch + Dots

Figure 4-111. Center Cross / Crosshatch / Dots

Fourfold Combinations of Patterns

• CIRCLE combinable with all threefold combinations

Figure 4-112. Greyscale / Color Bar / Multiburst / Circle

Applications of combined patterns:

Combined test patterns have the advantage of more complex video information. So the user has a quick overview reference. These patterns are of special interest for applications in production environments or CATVs where the generator is used as a central video signal source. Combined patterns are used for checks, measurements, and adjustments at the same time, for example, the fourfold pattern combination:

Greyscale + Color Bar + Multiburst + Circle.

For details, see applications of the single test patterns.

4-73

54200

Users Manual

Insertion-Reference Signal (IRS)

Description:

The Insertion-Reference Signal (IRS) is available for PAL 625 line systems in the fieldblanking interval in the TV line 17 and additionally line 330. The IRS is according to EBU

Rec. R26-1981 (1995 edition) and serves to detect and correct distortion in TV signals, so that the program signal may be restored to virtually its original form. This signal is mainly used in television production installations.

Details IRS Line 17:

• a luminance bar (reference white), amplitude 0.7 V.

• a 2T sine-squared pulse, Half Amplitude Duration (HAD) 200 ns.

• a modulated 20T pulse, HAD 2 µs.

• a 5 step staircase luminance signal, 140 mV per step.

4-74

Figure 4-113. IRS Line 17 (PAL 625 Line System)

Operating:

The IRS Line 17 signal can be switched on for all PAL 625 line systems independent of the selected test patterns. The IRS signal, transmitted in the field-blanking interval, is not visible on the TV screen. Select the IRS17 test pattern if the signal should be visible on TV screen.

Switching on IRS Line 17:

• Select the video menu .

• Select

Reference Line Off by the

é or ê softkey (F1, F2).


The Reference Line popup menu appears.

• Select

On by the

é or ê softkey (F1, F2).


The IRS signal in TV lines 17 and 330 is switched on. The video menu shows Reference

Line On .



4

Figure 4-114. Video Menu with Reference Line Popup

Switching off IRS:

• Call up the

Reference Line popup menu, as described above.

• Select

Off by the

é or ê softkey (F1, F2)


The IRS signal in TV lines 17 and 330 is switched off. The video menu shows

Reference Line Off.

Applications:

This signal combination is mainly used as a test line for automatic measurement and monitoring of TV signals. The luminance bar also serves as amplitude reference for automatic level control.

The following distortions can be measured using the IRS signal:

• Luminance bar: distortion, level error, line time waveform, overshoot and rounding.

• 2T pulse: group delay, amplitude error, pulse distortion, and reflections.

• 20T pulse: amplitude and delay difference between luminance and chrominance.

For details, see Figures below.

• Staircase luminance signal: static nonlinearity, amplitude nonlinearity.

Figure 4-115.

IRS 20T Pulse, Chroma Amplitude Error

Figure 4-116.

IRS 20T Pulse, Delay Error

4-75

54200

Users Manual

4-76

Chapter 5

Function Reference

Title Page

TELETEXT...................................................................................................... 5-3

General ........................................................................................................ 5-3

UK-Teletext ............................................................................................. 5-3

TOP (Table of Pages)............................................................................... 5-3

FLOF (Full Level-One Features) / FASTEXT .......................................... 5-5

VPT (Video Recorder Programming by Teletext)..................................... 5-5

Video Recorder Programming by Teletext with PSF ................................ 5-7

Contents of Teletext Pages TOP/FLOF .................................................... 5-9

DIDON ANTIOPE Teletext ......................................................................... 5-10

Contents of DIDON ANTIOPE Text Pages .............................................. 5-10

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-12

Checking and Adjusting ........................................................................... 5-13

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)......................................................................... 5-14

General ........................................................................................................ 5-14

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-15

WSS Auto Mode...................................................................................... 5-16

WSS Manual Mode.................................................................................. 5-17

Status Bits Transmission Scheme for Wide Screen Signalling .................. 5-18

Programming the Real Time Clock................................................................... 5-20

PDC and VPS................................................................................................... 5-22

General ........................................................................................................ 5-22

PDC Description .......................................................................................... 5-22

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-23

VPS Description........................................................................................... 5-26

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-27

Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16 ................... 5-30

CLOSED CAPTION (CC) ............................................................................... 5-32

General ........................................................................................................ 5-32

Operating ................................................................................................. 5-34

5-1

54200

Users Manual

Memory Contents.................................................................................... 5-35

Analog Mono Sound........................................................................................ 5-38

General ....................................................................................................... 5-38

Operating ................................................................................................ 5-38

Analog Stereo/Dual Sound............................................................................... 5-39

General ....................................................................................................... 5-39

Operating ................................................................................................ 5-40

NICAM Sound ................................................................................................ 5-42

The NICAM-728 Transmission Mode ..................................................... 5-42

Operating ................................................................................................ 5-44

Applications ............................................................................................ 5-46

Test functions.......................................................................................... 5-46

BTSC Sound ................................................................................................... 5-48

General ....................................................................................................... 5-48

Definitions .............................................................................................. 5-50

Operating ................................................................................................ 5-50

Explanations of BTSC Test Modes.......................................................... 5-53

Applications ............................................................................................ 5-54

Recommendations ................................................................................... 5-55

Sound Operating Modes .................................................................................. 5-56

External Modulation ........................................................................................ 5-60

External Video Modulation.......................................................................... 5-60

Operating ................................................................................................ 5-61

External Sound Modulation ......................................................................... 5-61

Operating ................................................................................................ 5-63

Synchronization Outputs and Triggering...................................................... 5-64

Operating Hints, Out of Range and Error Messages ......................................... 5-65

Operating Hints ........................................................................................... 5-65

Out of Range Messages ............................................................................... 5-65

Error Messages............................................................................................ 5-66

Remote Control Specific Error Messages..................................................... 5-66

5-2


TELETEXT

5

TELETEXT

General

Instruments with the Teletext and Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) option offer Teletext B

(UK-Teletext, CCIR system B) and Teletext A (France, CCIR system A). Teletext B includes the FLOF/FASTTEXT (Full Level One Feature), TOP (Table Of Pages), and VPT

(Video Recorder Programming by Teletext) or PSF (PDC Preselection Function).

Teletext A offers the DIDON Antiope Teletext system.

Teletext is an additional information service being offered by many TV broadcasters using the normal TV channels. During distinct lines in the vertical blanking period, the teletext data are serially transmitted and are invisible in the normal picture. The data are stored in the memory of the teletext decoder of the TV or the VCR and can be called up by page number or subject using the remote control. Operation and memory capacity for instruments with teletext have been improved and extended in the last few years.

UK-Teletext

A teletext page consists of a maximum of 24 rows, each of which can contain 40 characters. The first text row, the page header, may contain information such as page number, time, and date. The data transmitted in a TV line correspond to the text row of a page. For transmitting teletext data, 8-bit words are used, consisting of seven information bits and one parity bit.

Teletext information can be transmitted in lines 7 to 22 for the first field, and in lines 320 to 335 for the second field. Fluke 54200 generates the Teletext B in lines 13, 14, 20, 21 and 326, 327, 333, 334 (8 line mode) but can be changed to lines 20, 21, 333, and 334. In the Antiope system the text data are generated only in lines 20, 21, 333, and 334 (4 line mode). For further information about position and levels of a teletext data line, see

Figure 5-1.

For TOP and FLOF/FASTEXT, another menu line, text line 25 at the lower border of the

TV screen, is transmitted. For older TVs with teletext but without the TOP/FLOF function, this additional information is ignored.

TOP (Table of Pages)

TOP teletext is an extended teletext service that can be received using a TOP teletext decoder. TOP improves the speed and ease of access to teletext. In Germany most broadcasters transmit the TOP teletext.

The teletext pages are grouped according to subjects. The menu line at the bottom of the screen contains additional information that is selected using the colored keys of the remote control. In some teletext decoders, these teletext pages are stored in memory; so they are immediately available. The special colored keys on the remote control provide the following functions:

5-3

54200

Users Manual

Table 5-1. TOP Teletext Remote Control

Remarks Key color

White ( i ) = Index page

(INDEX)

Red

Green

= −

= e.g. subject block

Yellow

Blue

= e.g. subject group

= +

Survey of pages

Leads back to the previous page

Leads to the next block

Leads to the first page of the next group

Leads to the next page

5-4

Figure 5-1. Position and Level of Teletext Data Lines


TELETEXT

5

FLOF (Full Level-One Features) / FASTEXT

FLOF/FASTEXT is an extended teletext service that can be received using a FLOF teletext decoder. At the present time, it is transmitted by the British broadcaster BBC and will be introduced in several Western European countries. FLOF/FASTEXT improves the speed and ease of access to teletext.

The teletext pages are grouped according to subject. The menu line at the bottom of the screen contains four additional prompts that can be selected using corresponding colored keys on the TV remote control.

For this the colored keys red, green, yellow, and blue, from left to right, are used. The white key ' i ' selects the assigned index page.

In some teletext decoders these teletext pages, shown by the prompts, are stored in memory, so they are immediately available.

Figure 5-2. Presentation of a TOP or FLOF Teletext Page

VPT (Video Recorder Programming by Teletext)

VPT improves the speed and ease of VCR operation and programming. For this your VCR must be equipped with a Teletext-VPT decoder. For preprogrammed recording, the VCR needs the following data, which must be stored in a TIMER block:

• Date for recording

• Program number of the transmission

• Start/stop time for recording

These data can be copied directly to the VCR from the corresponding program survey of the teletext service.

Fluke 54200 offers in the Teletext B TOP1 and FLOF1 mode a VPT test facility on teletext Page 300. This is indicated on Page 300 by Transport method A . The page shows the following nine VPT data sets (default setting):

5-5

54200

Users Manual

5

6

7

8

9

Data Set

1 ... 4

Table 5-2. PDC/VPT Teletext Page 300, Transport Method A

Contents/Remarks

Data sets show scheduled transmission date and time in white and yellow.

The concealed VPS data are shown in magenta when the REVEAL key (

??

) on the

TV remote control has been pressed.

Special function: No specific PIL value (PIL = Progr. Identification Level)

Special function: Timer control code

Special function: Recording inhibit

Special function: Interruption code

Special function: Continuation code

Fluke 54200 without the VPS/PDC option contains fixed VPT data, time, and date on

Teletext Page 300, see Figure below.

Figure 5-3. Teletext Page 300 with VPT/VPS

Additional for Fluke 54200 with VPS/PDC Option:

The displayed VPT data, time, and date on Page 300 are identical to the contents of the same VPS memory locations 1 to 9. When you have programmed the VPS memory locations 1 to 4 automatically the timer data are changed on Teletext Page 300 if the instrument is in the Teletext TOP1 or FLOF1 mode. The locations 5 to 9 contain fixed data.

For programming VPS, see Page 5-29.

The VCR operating instructions show you how to program the VCR using VPT.

5-6


TELETEXT

5

Video Recorder Programming by Teletext with PSF

PSF (PDC Preselection Function) improves the speed and ease of VCR operation and programming. For this your VCR must be equipped with a PDC-teletext decoder. For preprogrammed recording, the VCR needs the following data, which must be stored in a TIMER block:

• Date for recording

• Program number of the transmission

• Start/stop time for recording

These data can be copied directly to the VCR from the corresponding program survey of the teletext service. The PDC Preselection data transmitted using Teletext (not visible in extension packet X/26) automatically enable correct recording of the required program.

Fluke 54200 offers in the Teletext B FLOF2 or TOP2 mode a PDC test facility on

Teletext Page 300 to check the Preselection Function of a VCR. This is indicated on

Page 300 by Transport method B .

Page 300 shows the following nine PDC data sets (default setting):

5 ... 9

5

6

7

8

9

Data Set

1 ... 4

Table 5-3. PDC/VPT Teletext Page 300, Transport Method B


Data sets show scheduled transmission date and time in white and yellow.

Preselection data can not be made visible on TV screen because of transmission in the extension packet X/26.

Special transmission data in white and red with following contents:

Special function: No Specific PIL value (PIL = Progr. Identification Level)

Special function: Timer Control Code

Special function: Recording Inhibit

Special function: Interruption Code

Special function: Continuation Code

Fluke 54200 without the VPS/PDC option contains fixed PDC data, time, and date on teletext Page 300, see Figure below.

Figure 5-4. Teletext Page 300 with PSF/PDC

5-7

54200

Users Manual

Additional for Fluke 54200 with VPS/PDC Option:

The displayed PDC test data, date, and time on Page 300, are identical to the contents of the same PDC memory locations 1 to 9. When you have programmed the PDC memory locations 1 to 4, automatically the timer data are changed on Teletext Page 300 if the instrument is in the Teletext TOP2 or FLOF2 mode. The locations 5 to 9 contain fixed data, see Table 5-3.

For programming PDC, see Page 5-25.

The operating instructions of your VCR shows you how to program the VCR using

PDC.

For PDC it is required to have a real time clock which is offered by 54200. In the

Teletext TOP2 and FLOF2 mode the real time clock of the instrument is used for generating the Universal Date and Time (UDT) code in Data Packet 8/30 format 1.

Please refer to Page 5-20 how to program the real time clock.

5-8


TELETEXT

5

Contents of Teletext Pages TOP/FLOF

The instrument offers different teletext pages with the following contents:

Page Contents Remarks/Application

100 Index page

101 Clock cracker

102 Testpage

111 Newsflash

150 Subtitle

Notice for the selected mode TOP or FLOF

Special bit pattern for checks and adjustments, page update

Characterset, mosaic graphics, color bar, white/black background, reveal function

Window in the video picture

Window in the video picture

200 Character set GB (U. Kingdom) Page 200 to 205:

201 Character set D (Germany) Character set*, graphics, background,

202 Character set S/SF (Sweden)

203 Character set F (France) notes in local language; used for checking the different character

204 Character set I

205 Character set E

(Italy)

(Spain) sets

300 TV program page with

PDC/VPT** test data

400 White picture

401 Color bar

402

403

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Page 300 serves for easy programming of VCR's using PDC/VPT teletext.

TOP1 / FLOF1 = transport method A (VPT)

TOP2 / FLOF2 = transport method B (PSF)

Decoder adjustment, RGB signal

Decoder adjustment, RGB signal

Decoder check, memory test

Decoder check, memory test

555 VIDEOTEXT (written characters) Presentation

560 COLORS (special color bars) Decoder adjustment, RGB signal

* The character sets are shown correctly for the indicated languages only if the teletext decoder of the TV offers the West European languages. If the TV has a different decoder, for example, Eastern Europe, the characters generated by 54200 are shown in the corresponding language. The different languages are controlled by the Page Header Control Bits (C12 to C14) of the teletext data. For example, the generated character set of Page 200 is shown by a decoder for Western Europe in

British and will be shown in Polish with a decoder for Eastern Europe.

** PDC/VPT test data are only programmable if the instrument has the PDC/VPS option.

5-9

54200

Users Manual

DIDON ANTIOPE Teletext

The French teletext system Didon Antiope (Teletext system A) is mainly transmitted in

France in the SECAM L system.

As for teletext, the Antiope data are serially transmitted in the vertical blanking period in lines that are not visible on the TV.

While coding of the transmitted text data in the teletext system B is closely related to the structure of the TV signal (one text line is always sent during a TV line), this close connection is not valid for the Antiope system. Start and stop of text pages and text lines are controlled by additional paging and movement codes. Each page consists of 24 rows of 40 characters each (maximum). An additional page header (En-tête de page) may contain information such as page number, time, and date.

The Antiope information can be transmitted in lines 6 to 22 for the first field, and in lines

319 to 335 for the second field.

Fluke 54200 generates the Antiope signal in the lines 20, 21, and 333, 334. For further information about position and levels of a Didon Antiope data line, see Figure 5-5.

Contents of DIDON ANTIOPE Text Pages

Magazine

0

96

100

500

253

100

Table 5-4. DIDON ANTIOPE Text Pages

Page

1

10

1

250

251

252


Title page (Page de garde), Contents of magazines

Subtitle, MODE DE SOUS-TITRAGE COMPATIBLE

Title page (Page de garde), Contents

Character set

Special bit pattern 'Clock cracker'

Pages 252, 253:

Special test patterns, for example, double character height, flashing

(FLASH) - corresponds to the Antiope specifications

TDF 1984

ANTIOPE in capital letters (Page de garde)

5-10


TELETEXT

5

Figure 5-5. Position and Level of Antiope Data Lines

5-11

54200

Users Manual

Operating

Different Teletext systems are selectable for 625 line systems.

• Select the wanted Teletext system using the digital menu.


The TTX System popup menu appears showing the Teletext systems and modes:

Table 5-5. Teletext Systems and Modes

Teletext System / Modes

Teletext B TOP 1

Teletext B TOP 2

Teletext B FLOF 1

Teletext B FLOF 2

Teletext A ANTIOPE

Teletext Auto

CC (Closed Caption)

Off

Remarks

TOP teletext with VPT data on Page 300

TOP teletext with PSF data on Page 300

FLOF teletext with VPT data on Page 300

FLOF teletext with PSF data on Page 300

Teletext used in France

Operating mode. For details, see below

See Section Closed Caption (CC)

Teletext or CC switched off

• Select the wanted Teletext system by the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2).


The TTX Lines popup menu appears.

• Select

4 or 8 for the wanted number of TV lines in which Teletext data are transmitted. In the ANTIOPE system and for SECAM only 4 lines are selectable.


5-12

Figure 5-6. Digital Menu, Teletext System Popup

In the Teletext Auto mode 54200 automatically selects the correct teletext system to the wanted TV system or country. If the user selects a SECAM system or France the instrument generates the ANTIOPE teletext.

• Select the

Teletext mode on your TV. Use a suitable TV with teletext facilities.

The TV will show the Index Page 100, see Figure 5-7.

Further teletext pages are called up by teletext page numbers using the TV remote control, for example, Page 200.


TELETEXT

5

Figure 5-7. Teletext Page 100


Checking and Adjusting

The teletext data signal consists of high speed pulses and transients which are sensitive to amplitude and delay distortions, noise, and spurious pulses. The success of a TV receiver to decode the digital data without error depends on the amount of distortions in the total signal path. Teletext data and the analog TV signal are affected in different ways.

Many teletext lines of the 54200 are especially generated for checks and adjustments. Adjustments of teletext decoders depend on the applied components, especially on the built-in integrated circuits. For detailed adjustment procedures of teletext decoders, refer to the appropriate Service Manuals.

Character sets of a teletext decoder can be checked by the teletext pages 200 to 205

(Teletext B). Characters are shown correctly for the indicated languages only if the teletext decoder of the TV offers the West European languages. If the TV has a different decoder the characters generated by 54200 are shown in the corresponding language. Eight different languages are controllable by Page Header Control Bits (C12 to C14) of the teletext data. For example, the character set of Page 200 is shown by a decoder for Western

Europe in British and will be shown in Polish with a decoder for Eastern Europe.

Details of character data input decoding for different countries and languages in teletext decoders are shown in data sheets of the supplier, for example, Philips SAA5246A.

5-13

54200

Users Manual

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)

General

The WSS information is transmitted in the first half of line 23 for 625 line systems. The

WSS bits are in accordance to the standards ETSI ETS 300294, Rec. ITU-R BT.1119, and EACEM, Technical Committee Working Party Report 3.2. The WSS bits are actually transmitted by all PALplus broadcasters in Europe.

The WSS bits contain information on:

• Aspect ratio range of transmitted signal and its position,

• Position of subtitles,

• Camera or film mode,

• Surround sound,

• Some bits are reserved for future Enhanced Defenition TV (EDTV) signalling, for example, PALplus as well as for future use.

The WSS information signal is transmitted as a data burst in Bi-phase modulation coding in the first half of line 23. The preamble contains a run-in and a start code followed by 14 data bits. The data bits are grouped in 4 data groups. For further details, see Figure below and Table 5-7 'WSS Status Bits Transmission Scheme'.

Figure 5-9. Position WSS Signal TV Line 23, 625 Line Systems PAL

5-14


Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)

5

Operating

Fluke 54200 with the WSS option transmits the WSS signal in PAL and SECAM

625 line systems. The WSS operating modes are:

Off

Auto

Manual

• Select the wanted WSS mode using the digital menu.

• Select

Wide Screen Signalling by the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2).


The Wide Screen Signalling popup menu appears.

• Select the wanted WSS mode

Auto , Manual , or Off by the é or ê softkeys

(F1 or F2).


Figure 5-10. WSS Popup Menu

The WSS signal is transmitted in TV line 23 and is not visible on the TV screen.

If Manual is selected a popup menu appears. In this menu it is possible to change the

WSS bits independently. For details, see Section ‘WSS Manual Mode.’

5-15

54200

Users Manual

WSS Auto Mode

The WSS information corresponds with the actual instrument settings. For details, see table below. WSS data bits of the WSS Auto mode are not displayed by the instrument.

Data Group

Group 1,

Aspect Ratio

Full format 4:3

Full format 16:9 (anamorphic)

Group 2,

Enhanced Services

Camera Mode

Film Mode

Standard PAL / SECAM

No Helper

Reserved bit

Group 3,

Subtitles

No subtitles within teletext

Subtitles within teletext

No subtitles in active image area

Table 5-6. WSS Auto Mode

WSS Bits Instrument settings

Bit No.

0 1 2 3

0 0 0 1

1 1 1 0

Bit No.

4 5 6 7 bit 4 = 0 with all 4:3 patterns with all 16:9 patterns with following patterns:

Moving Block

Progressive Scan Check 1 to 3 with all non-camera mode patterns bit 4 = 1 bit 5 = 0 bit 6 = 0 always always always bit 7 = 0

Bit No.

8 9 10 bit 8 = 0 bit 8 = 1 no teletext signal is generated teletext signals are generated bit 9/ 10 = 0 no OSD function is used

Group 4,

Reserved

Surround sound signalling bit:

No surround information

Surround mode

Reserved bits

Bit No.

11 12 13 bit 11 = 0 bit 11 = 1 bit 12 = 0 bit 13 = 0 no Stereo signal is generated

Stereo signals are generated always always

5-16



5

WSS Manual Mode

In the WSS Manual mode the user has the advantage to set the single WSS bits.

• Select the

Wide Screen Signalling popup menu.

• Select the WSS

Manual mode


The WSS Editor popup menu appears.

• Toggle the wanted WSS bits by using the ç , è , and Toggle softkeys (F1, F2, F3).


Figure 5-11. WSS Bits Manual Mode

The display shows the 14 bits of the WSS data group 1 to 4, beginning with bit 0 on the left. Each bit can be set to 0 or 1. For detailed programming the WSS bits, see Table 5-7,

WSS Status Bits Transmission Scheme.

Figure 5-11 shows an example with the following WSS settings:

Group 1

Group 2

1110

1000

16:9 pattern

Non-camera mode pattern

Group 3

Group 4

100 Teletext on

100 Stereo on

Remark:

The instrument does not check the consistency of the user programmed WSS data.

5-17

54200

Users Manual

Status Bits Transmission Scheme for Wide Screen Signalling

Table 5-7. WSS Status Bits Transmission Scheme

Status Bits Transmission

Insertion: First Half of Line 23

29 Elements based on 5 MHz

Run-in

MSB transmitted first

0 x 1F1C 71C7

11111000111000111000111000111

MSB LSB

Coding: Bi-phase Modulation Coding

Start Code


Clock: 5 MHz (T

Group 1

Aspect Ratio


S

= 200 ns)

MSB transmitted first

0 x 1E 3C1F

0001 1110 0011 1100 0001 1111

MSB LSB

Bit Numbering

0 1 2 3

LSB per Info Bit

1)

MSB

"0" = 000 111

"1" = 111 000

LSB transmitted first

Bit Number:

0123

0001 Full Format 4:3

1000 Box 14:9 Center

0100 Box 14:9 Top

1101 Box 16:9 Center

0010 Box 16:9 Top

1011 Box > 16:9 Center

0111 Full Format 4:3,

Center shoot and protect 14:9

1110 Full Format 16:9, anamorphic b3 = Odd Parity Bit

5-18



5

Table 5-7. WSS Status Bits Transmission Scheme (cont)

Status Bits Transmission

Insertion: First Half of Line 23 Coding: Bi-phase Modulation Coding

Group 2

Enhanced Services


Bit Numbering

4 5 6 7

LSB per Info Bit

1)

MSB

"0" = 000 111

"1" = 111 000


Bit Number 4:

0 Camera Mode

1 Film Mode

Group 3

Subtitles


Bit Numbering

8 9 10

LSB MSB per Info Bit

1)

"0" = 000 111

"1" = 111 000


Bit Number 8:

0 no Subtitles within

Teletext

1 Subtitles within Teletext

Clock: 5 MHz (T

S

= 200 ns)

Group 4

Reserved


Bit Numbering

11 12 13

LSB MSB per Info Bit

1)

"0" = 000 111

"1" = 111 000


Bit Number 11:

0 no Surround Sound

1 Surround Mode

Bit Number 5:

0 Standard PAL

(SECAM)

1 Motion Adaptive Color

Plus (MACP)

Bit Number 6:

0 no Helper

1 modulated Helper

Bit Number:

9 10

0 0 no open Subtitles

1 0 Subtitles in Active

Image Area

0 1 Subtitles out of

Active Image Area

1 1 Reserved

Bit Numbers 12, 13:

Reserved, should all be set to "0"

Bit Number 7:

Reserved, should be set to "0"

1)

1 Info Bit consists of 6 Elements based on 5 MHz Clock. Data Bit Period T d

= 6T

S

5-19

54200

Users Manual

Programming the Real Time Clock

54200 offers a real time clock which is used for the Teletext B system and PDC

(Programme Delivery Control).

• Select the support submenu to program the real-time clock.

• Select the Date of the Real Time Clock by the ê softkey (F2).


The Date popup menu for numerical input appears.

Figure 5-12. Timer Setting with Date

• Key in day (dd), month (mm), and year (yyyy) using numerical keypad.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm.

• Select the Time of the Real Time Clock by the ê softkey (F2).


The Time popup menu for numerical input appears.

5-20

Figure 5-13. Timer Setting with Time

• Key in the actual or wanted time (hh:mm) using numerical keypad.

If you want to change the time for 1 hour (winter/summer time) preferable use the

+1h or -1h softkeys (F1 or F2).


Programming the Real Time Clock

5

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your setting of the real time clock.

Figure 5-14. Real Time Clock Setting

54200 including the Teletext option:

The modified time is automatically displayed in the TOP or FLOF teletext pages. In the

Teletext TOP2 and FLOF2 mode the real time clock is additionally used for generating the Universal Date and Time (UDT) code in Data Packet 8/30 format 1 for PDC (Programme Delivery Control).

Remark:

The actual time shown in the support submenu is only updated if this submenu is called up again.

5-21

54200

Users Manual

PDC and VPS

General

This section covers operating information for the Programme Delivery Control (PDC) and Video Programming System (VPS).

Fluke 54200 with the PDC and VPS option generates PDC and VPS signals for 625 line systems.

Nine different data sets are selectable using the menu. In PDC as well as VPS, four of these data sets can be programmed by the user. Furthermore PDC offers a 'Multi Labelling' function in the packet 8/30 format 2.

A comprehensive check can be made of all PDC and VPS functions of instruments in development, production, and service.

Since 1985 VPS signals have been transmitted by the German broadcasting stations

ARD and ZDF. VPS has also been introduced in Switzerland and Austria.

PDC was introduced into the United Kingdom in 1992. In 1993 it was introduced into the Netherlands. It is planned to introduce PDC into several European countries, including the countries into which VPS has been introduced.

PDC Description

Exact information on the design and contents of PDC can be obtained from the 'EBU specification of the domestic video Programme Delivery Control system (PDC)', EBU

SPB 459 Rev. 2.

A general overview is given below:

The PDC data is transmitted in CCIR system B Teletext extension data packets of type

8/30 format 2. For details, see Figure below.

5-22

Figure 5-15. Structure of the Teletext Data Packet 8/30 Format 2

PDC is made up of two distinct service components, defined as Preselection Function

(PSF) and the Recording Control Function (RCF).


PDC and VPS

5

The Preselection Function for recording control loads the controller memory of the recorder with the information about all programs required to be recorded. The viewer chooses the required programs from television program guides, then enters the relevant information into the recorder. PSF is always active when teletext is selected and is independent from PDC.

The Recording Control Function (RCF) allows remote control, from a source of transmission, of a recording made by a receiving equipment capable of preselecting the program to be recorded. Such a function depends on the broadcaster sending a program label in coded form together with the program.

In 54200 the RCF is active as soon as the user selects a PDC data set 1 to 9 in the

Teletext B system.

The contents of PDC data sets 1 to 4 can be changed by the user. Data sets 5 to 9 have fixed data and are not programmable.

The instrument offers a special PDC service, the Multi Labelling. In this mode the contents of PDC data sets 1 to 4 is transmitted in four parallel data channels. This is realized by the Label Channel Identifier (LCI) part of the data packet 8/30 format 2.

Operating

Switching on PDC Signal

The PDC signal or data can be switched on or changed only in the Teletext B mode.

• Select the digital menu

• Select

PDC Data Set using the é or ê softkeys (F2 or F1).


The complete PDC data sets 1 to 9 are shown. For details, see Figure 5-17.

• Select the wanted PDC data set by the ê softkey (F2), for example, Data Set 7.


PDC Data Set 7 is switched on. The instrument returns to the digital menu.

Figure 5-16. Digital Menu, PDC Selection

5-23

54200

Users Manual

Figure 5-17. PDC Data Sets 1 to 9, Default Setting

Abbreviations:

PIL = Programme Identification Label

CNI = Country and Network Identification

PTY = Programme Type

PCS = Programme Control Status (reserved)

LUF = Label Update Flag

LCI = Label Channel Identifier

PRF = Prepare-to-Record Flag

Net = Network

Showing PDC Program Title

Press the Page softkey (F1) to display the PDC Program Title. The default setting is shown in Figure 5-18.

Press the Page key again to return to the PDC data.

Figure 5-18. PDC Program Title, Default Setting

5-24


PDC and VPS

5

Switching off PDC Signal

The PDC signal generated in the Teletext B mode is switched off by:

• Select the digital menu.

• Select

PDC Data Set using the é or ê softkey (F2 or F1).


• Select

PDC Data Set Off by the ê softkey (upper position in the digital PDC menu).


The instrument returns to the digital menu and indicates PDC Data Set Off .

If you select a 525 line system the PDC information is automatically switched off.

Changing PDC Data

You can program new PDC data sets 1 to 4. You should have specific knowledge of the relationships and construction of PDC data and Teletext Data Packet 8/30 format 2. The instrument does not check the consistency and correctness of allowed PDC data input.

The size of the numerical values for the various parameters is limited by the number of bits provided for this in the PDC code, so that random numbers cannot be entered. The maximum PDC data input values respectively bits are shown in Figure 5-19 in the

Data Set 1.

Furthermore you can change the text of the PDC Program Titles for data sets 1 to 4.

The displayed PDC data, date, and time on Teletext Page 300, are identical to the contents of the PDC data sets 1 to 9 if the instrument is set to the Teletext B FLOF1 or

Teletext FLOF 2 mode. When you have programmed the PDC data sets 1 to 4, the timer data, date, and time are automatically changed.

An example of user programmed PDC data (data set 1) is shown in Figures 5-19 and 5-20.

Figure 5-19. PDC Data Set 1, User Programmed Data

Figure 5-20. PDC Data Set 1, User Programmed Title

Remark:

PDC data sets 5 to 9 have fixed data and are not programmable by the user.

5-25

54200

Users Manual

VPS Description

Exact information on the design and contents of VPS can be obtained from the

ARD/ZDF Technical Guideline No. 8R2 'Video-Programm-System (VPS)'.

A general overview is given below:

VPS is similar to PDC. The main difference is that VPS is transmitted in the vertical blanking interval in a dedicated television line (line 16). For details, see Figure 5-21.

Transmission is done in biphase code, and the data contains 15 data words of each 8 bit.

The transmission rate is 2.5 Mbits.

5-26

Figure 5-21. VPS Data Line, Line 16 (625 Line Systems)

The first two of the 15 data words are for synchronization of the receiver and for identification of the data line. Words 3 and 4 contain a source identification, which is not relevant for VPS.

Word 5 contains a sound identification (Mono / Dual / Stereo) in 2 bits. The remaining bits are reserved.

Word 6 displays a program-related signal content identification; as is the case for words

7 to 10, it is not relevant for VPS.

Words 11 to 15 with their 40 bits contain the actual VPS information.

Individually the bits signify:

Table 5-8. VPS Information

Bits

0 - 1

2 - 6

7 - 10

11 - 15

16 - 21

22 - 25

26 - 31

32 - 40

Information

Network 2 MSBs

Transmission day

Transmission month

Programme start (hour)

Programme start (minute)

Country

Network remaining 6 bits

Programme Type


PDC and VPS

5

In place of the start of a program (date and time), several special codes may also be transmitted.

At present the following codes are available:

• Recording inhibit code: indicates program not worth recording (for example test pattern).

• Interruption code: marks desired and undesired program interruptions.

• Timer control code: indicates that in spite of available data line no valid Programme Labels are transmitted.

Details and Data Format of the VPS Data Line is shown in Table 5-9.

The contents of VPS data sets 1 to 4 can be changed by the user. VPS data sets 5 to 9 have fixed data and are not programmable.

Operating

Switching on the VPS Signal

The VPS signal generated in TV line 16 is available with 625 line systems.


• Press the edit key (F3 softkey).

The complete VPS data sets are shown.

• Select the wanted VPS data set by the ê key (F2 softkey), for example, Data Set 7 .

• Press the enter key (F5 softkey).

VPS Data Set 7 is switched on. The instrument returns to the digital menu.

Figure 5-22. Digital Menu, VPS Selection

5-27

54200

Users Manual

Figure 5-23. VPS Data Sets 1 to 9, Default Setting

Abbreviations:

PIL = Programme Identification Label

CNI = Country and Network Identification

PTY = Programme Type

PCS = Programme Control Status (reserved)

Net = Network

Showing VPS Program Title

• Press the

Page key (F1 softkey) to display the VPS Program Title. The default setting is shown in Figure 5-24.

• Press the

Page key again to return to the VPS data.

Figure 5-24. VPS Program Title, Default Setting

5-28


PDC and VPS

5

Switching off the VPS Signal

The VPS signal generated in the TV line 16 is switched off by:


• Select

VPS Data Set using the é or ê softkeys (F2 or F1).


• Select the VPS Data set

Off by the ê softkey (upper position in the digital VPS menu).


The instrument returns to the digital menu and indicates VPS Data Set Off .

If you select a 525 line system the VPS signal is automatically switched off by the instrument.

Changing VPS Data

You can program new VPS data sets 1 to 4. You should have specific knowledge of the relationships and construction of VPS data. For details, see Table 5-9. The instrument does not check the consistency and correctness of allowed VPS data input. The size of the numerical values for the various parameters is limited by the number of bits provided for this in the VPS code, so that random numbers cannot be entered. The maximum VPS data input values respectively bits are shown in Figure 5-25 in the Data Set 1. Furthermore you can change the text of the VPS Program Titles for VPS data sets 1 to 4.

The displayed VPS data, date, and time on Teletext Page 300, are identical to the contents of the VPS data sets 1 to 9. When you have programmed the VPS data sets 1 to 4, the timer data, date, and time are automatically changed.

An example of user programmed VPS data (data set 1) is shown in Figures 5-25 and 5-26.

Figure 5-25. VPS Data Set 1, User Programmed Data

Figure 5-26. VPS Data Set 1, User Programmed Title

Remark:

VPS Data Sets 5 to 9 have fixed data and are not programmable by the user.

5-29

54200

Users Manual

Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16

Table 5-9. Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16

Time

→

Parameter

Transmission Bit No.

→

Byte No.

→

Parameter Bits b i

, i =

→

→

Reserved Code

Values for

Receiver Control

(Service Codes)

1 2

Content

→

Clock

Run-in

Start

Code

3, 4

1

PCS

2 3 4

5

1 2

CNI

3 4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

M L

Bits b

1

and b

2:

00 Don’t know

01 Mono

10 Stereo

11 Dual

Sound

Bits b

3

and b4 are reserved

Country

Binary

Timer Control Code N .

.

N

Record Inhibit/Term. N .

.

N

Interruption Code N .

.

N

Continuation Code N .

.

N

Unenhanced VPS 1 1 1 1

PTY not in Use N .

.

N

6 to 10

CNI

11

PIL

→

12

→

9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2

M L M L

Day

Binary

Month

Binary

N N 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

N N 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

N N 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

N N 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

N N P.......................

....................

N N P.......................

....................

Abbrevations: CNI - Country and Network Identification

PCS - Programme Control Status

PIL - Programme Identification Label

PTY - Programme Type

M - Most - Significant Bit

L - Least - Significant Bit

5-30


PDC and VPS

5

Table 5-9. Data Format of Programme Delivery Data in the TV Line 16 (cont)

Time

→

←

PIL

←

12 13

CNI

14

PTY

15

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

M L M L

Hour

Binary

Minute

Binary

L M

Country

Binary

L M

Network or

Programme

Provider

Binary

L M

Programme Type

Binary

←

←

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N..................................................N

A.......................................A

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 N..................................................N

A.......................................A

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N..................................................N

A.......................................A

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 N..................................................N

A.......................................A

.......................... ..............................P

N..................................................N

A.......................................A

.......................... ..............................P

N..................................................N

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

A - Bit Value is that of the current PTY Code

N - Bit Value is that of the current CNI Code

P - Bit Value is that of the current PIL Code

5-31

54200

Users Manual

CLOSED CAPTION (CC)

General

Fluke 54200 with the Closed Caption option offers Closed Caption (CC) and Text

Serice (T). Closed Caption is part of the 'Line 21 Data Services'. Exact information on the design and contents of this Data Service can be obtained from the Draft EIA-608 standard 'LINE 21 DATA SERVICES FOR NTSC', the FCC 47 CFR Part 15, and Report

No. E-7709-C. The data channel may contain specific types of data packets as Closed

Caption, Text Service, and Extended Data Service (XDS). XDS is not supported by the

Fluke 54200.

Effective July 1, 1993, all TV broadcast receivers with picture screens 13 inches or larger in diameter shipped in interstate commerce, manufactured, assembled or imported from any foreign country into the United States shall comply with the provisions for Closed

Caption.

Captions are program-related data which are transmitted using either field of line 21 of the vertical blanking interval of the television signal. For details, see Figure below.

Figure 5-27. Line 21 Data Services, 525 Line Systems

Captions are a visual depiction of the soundtrack of the video program, and as such are timed to correspond to the sound track. Caption data have priority over other data which may be carried on line 21. The CC1 Service offers the primary language while CC3 is used for second language captions. For further details, see Table 5-10.

5-32


CLOSED CAPTION (CC)

5

Text Mode is a data service, generally not program related, which is also transmitted on

TV lines 21. The text service should use the channels T1 and T2 if possible but only

T3/T4 if T1/T2 is not sufficient. Text data are displayed as soon as they are received.

CC1

CC2

T1

T2

Table 5-10. Closed Caption Field Packets

Field 1 Packets

Primary Synchronous

Caption Service

Special Non-synchronous

Use Captions

First Text Service

Second Text Service

CC3

CC4

T3

T4

XDS

Field 2 Packets

Secondary Synchronous

Caption Service

Special Non-synchronous

Use Captions

First Text Service

Second Text Service

Extended Data Service

(not supported by Fluke 54200)

The television receiver must decode CC1 to CC4 captioning, and must display the captioning for whichever channel the user selects. The TV Mode of operation allows the video to be viewed in its original form. The Caption and Text Modes define one or more areas (boxes) in the screen within which Caption or Text characters are displayed. In

Text Mode the information is scrolled upwards through the window if it has been filled.

Caption mode possibilities are as follows:

• Roll-up: 2, 3 or 4 continuous rows,

• Pop-on: maximum of 4 rows, not necessarily continuously, displayed anywhere on the screen. This data will be displayed after receipt of an End of

Caption command,

• Paint-on: subsequent data are addressed immediately without the need of an End of Caption command.

In the Fluke 54200 Closed Caption and Text Service are available for the following

TV systems:

NTSC, NTSC 4.43, PAL 625 and PAL 525 line systems, and SECAM.

The Caption and Text Data cannot be changed. All memory locations are preprogrammed.

CC Sequence is an automatically continuous sequence of memory locations 1 to 8.

Remark:

During the Closed Caption mode (Line 21 Data Service) Teletext, Wide Screen Signalling (WSS), Programme Delivery Control (PDC), and Video-Progamm-System (VPS) are automatically switched off.

5-33

54200

Users Manual

Operating

Closed Caption and Text Service are available for the following TV systems:

NTSC, NTSC 4 (subcarrier 4.43 MHz), PAL 625 and PAL 525 line systems, and

SECAM.



The TTX System popup menu appears.

• Select

CC Number respective CC Sequence by the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2).


The TTX CC Number popup menu appears.

• Select the requested Closed Caption setup (

CC Number 1 to 8 or Sequence ).


Closed Caption data are generated in TV line 21.

• Switch on the Closed Caption function of your TV to get it visible on screen.

Select the TTX System popup menu to switch off Closed Caption.

Figure 5-28. Digital Menu with Closed Caption

5-34



5

Memory Contents

CC Number 1: CC1 Service

Description: standard character set; transmitted in field 1; data channel 1; roll-up style.

Characters

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

!,.;:’”#%&@/()[]+-÷<=>?¢$£

Description, Remarks

Background Blue, Opaque; Text Color Cyan

Background Blue, Semi-transparent; Text Color

White; Character Type Italics

Background White, Opaque; Text Color Blue;

Character Type Underlined

áàâçéèêíîÑñôóûú ®°™½¿, music note, standard space, transparent space,

Û

Background White, Semi-transparent; Text Color

Red

0123456789 Background Red, Opaque; Text Color Magenta/Black

*

1

Character Double Size

*1 Black if the optional caption features are supported by the TV-set


Description: extended character set; transmitted in field 1; data channel 2; paint-on style.

Spanish:

Characters

ÁÉÓÚÜü‘¡*·—© sm

•“”

French: ÀÂÇÈÊËëÎÏïÔÙùÛ«»

Portuguese: ÃãÍÌ

ÒòÕõ{}\^_|~

German:

Danish:

Ääöß¥¤|

ÅåØø

   


Background Black, Opaque; Text Color Yellow

Background Black, Opaque; Text Color Green

Background Black, Opaque; Text Color Blue

Background Black, Opaque; Text Color Red

Background Black, Opaque; Text Color White


Description: a few characters indicating CC3 mode; transmitted in field 2; data channel 1; pop-on style.

Characters

Closed Caption CC3 Mode.


Background Green, Opaque; Text Color Cyan;

5-35

54200

Users Manual


Description: a few characters indicating CC4 mode; transmitted in field 2; data channel 2; paint-on style.

Characters Description, Remarks

Closed Caption CC4 Mode.

Background Green, Semi-transparent;

Text Color Red/Black

*

1

;

*1 Black if the optional caption features are supported by the TV-set

CC Number 5: T1 Service

Description: primary text mode service; transmitted in field 1, data channel 1.

Characters

Primary Text Mode Service

A Text Mode may be used that consists of data formatted to fill a box which in height is not less than 7 rows and not more than 15 rows (all of which should be continuous), and in width is not less than

32 columns. Text should be displayed over a solid background to isolate it from the unrelated program video.


Background Black; Title Color Yellow,

Text Color White


Description: text mode service; transmitted in field 1, data channel 2.

Characters

Text Mode, Service #2

Each row of text contains a maximum of 32 characters. If the solid background does not extend the full width of the screen, at least one solid space equal to a single column width may be placed before the first character and after the last character of each row to enhance legibility.



Text Color White

5-36



5



Characters


Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7



Text Color White



Characters


Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7



Text Color White

At the start of every data string, commands are present to clear the memory of the CC decoder in the television. The data string is cyclic; at the end of the data string, a clear screen command is present.

The Optional Extended Characters are mostly accented characters. If the receiver does not support these characters, the appropriate character is shown without accent.

5-37

54200

Users Manual

Analog Mono Sound

General

The audio signal is FM modulated on the sound carrier signal except for SECAM L, where the sound is AM modulated.

The sound carrier frequency is 4.5, 5.5, 6.0, or 6.5 MHz and depends on the TV system.

Broadcasters transmit the sound carrier above the vision carrier except for SECAM L in

VHF band I. In this case the sound carrier is transmitted 6.5 MHz below the vision carrier.

The transmitted sound carrier level is 10 to 13 dB below the vision carrier level depending on the TV system (54200 default setting). A pre-emphasis is used for the FM modulation of the audio signal. The frequency spectrum for analog FM-Mono Sound (PAL

B/G) is shown in Appendix D.

Operating

Fluke 54200 generates the analog mono sound for all available TV systems. Sound parameters are automatically matched to the selected TV system.

Main features:

• Sound frequencies for all TV systems except system M:

0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 3 kHz.

TV system M:

0.3 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 3 kHz.

• Sound carrier level setting from -5 dBc to -15 dBc.

• Pre-emphasis On or Off (not for SECAM L).

The different sound modes for Analog Mono Sound are shown in Table 5-17.

For operating the Mono Sound, see Chapter 4, Section Sound Settings.

The instrument allows external modulation from a sound source with 54200 as the RF modulator.

Audio and Sound Outputs

The internal generated audio signal is available at the AUDIO OUT and the EURO AV

OUT connectors. For details, see Chapter 3, Pages 3-17 and 3-18.

The modulated sound carrier signal is available at the SOUND IF OUT connector (rear side).

5-38


Analog Stereo/Dual Sound

5

Analog Stereo/Dual Sound

General

The Analog Stereo Sound or Dual Sound is a two-carrier system which is used in various countries with different sound carrier frequencies. The first sound carrier transmits the mono sound, respectively channel 1 information. The second sound channel is transmitted using an additional sound carrier.

Depending on different TV systems the two sound carriers are modulated by the following audio signals:

Table 5-11. Analog Stereo/Dual Audio Signals, Systems B/G and D/K

TV Systems

PAL B/G

Sound Modes

Mono and Stereo

PAL/SECAM D/K (FM A2) Dual

Channel 1 (S1)

Mono

(L + R)/2 = M

Mono

Mono

Channel 2 (S2)

R (right)

Mono (2nd language)

Germany, Switzerland, and the Netherlands have used the analog Stereo/Dual sound in the PAL B/G system for many years. According to the transmission standard, the first sound carrier frequency is 5.5 MHz. The second sound carrier frequency is approximately 242 kHz above the first sound carrier, 5.742 MHz. The audio signals are FM modulated on the sound carriers.

To distinguish between Stereo- and Dual-sound transmission, an additional pilot signal of 54.68 kHz is present on the second sound carrier. This pilot signal is AM modulated with identification frequencies, 117.5 Hz for Stereo or 274.1 Hz for Dual Sound. The pilot carrier and the identification frequencies are coupled with the line frequency fH.

The pre-emphasis for both sound carriers is 50 µs. The minimum LF bandwidth is 40 Hz to 15 kHz.

For frequency spectrum of Analog Stereo Sound B/G, see Appendix D.

Eastern European Countries as Poland, Lituania, and Czech Republic are prepared to introduce or use the analog Stereo/Dual sound for TV systems PAL/SECAM D/K

(FM A2). The first sound carrier frequency is 6.5 MHz. The second sound carrier frequency is 6.258 MHz. The audio signals are FM modulated on the sound carriers. The pilot carrier and identification frequencies are identical to the PAL B/G system.

5-39

54200

Users Manual

Korea has introduced the sound system Mk for the analog Stereo sound (TV system

NTSC M). The first sound carrier frequency is 4.5 MHz and the second is 4.724 MHz.

The pilot carrier is 3.5 x fH. Identification frequencies are fH/105 for Stereo and fH/57 for Dual. The audio signals are FM modulated on the sound carriers. The pre-emphasis for both sound carriers is 75 µs.

Table 5-12. Analog Stereo/Dual Audio Signals, System Mk (Korean Stereo)

TV Systems

NTSC M

Sound Modes

Mono

Stereo

Dual

Channel 1 (S1)

Mono

L + R

Mono

Mono

L – R

Channel 2 (S2)

Mono (2nd language)

Operating

Fluke 54200 offers three different Analog Stereo/Dual Sound systems, furthermore in combination with NTSC 4.433 MHz subcarrier systems. For details, see table below.

Menu

Indication

Table 5-13. 54200 Analog Stereo/Dual Sound Systems

Sound Modes TV / Sound System

FM Germany Mono/Stereo/Dual PAL B/G

FM Korea

FM A2

Mono/Stereo/Dual

NTSC 4.433 B/G

NTSC M (System Mk)

Mono/Stereo/Dual PAL/SECAM D/K (System A2)

NTSC 4.433 D/K (System A2)

Sound Carrier

Frequency

SC 1 SC 2

5.5 MHz

5.5 MHz

5.742 MHz

5.742 MHz

4.5 MHz

6.5 MHz

6.5 MHz

4.724 MHz

6.258 MHz

6.258 MHz

Main features:

• Channel 1 and 2 sound frequencies for TV systems B/G and D/K:

0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 3 kHz.

Channel 1 and 2 sound frequencies for system Mk (Korean Stereo):

0.3 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 3 kHz.

• Sound carrier 1 level setting from -5 dBc to -15 dBc.

• Sound carrier 2 level setting -20 dBc, -25 dBc, or -27 dBc.

• Pre-emphasis On or Off.

5-40


Analog Stereo/Dual Sound

5

The Analog Stereo/Dual Sound for the different TV systems is selected:

• using the

Sound System popup menu.

• for pre-defined countries: using the Country popup menu.

The different 54200 operating modes for the Analog Stereo/Dual Sound are shown in

Table 5-17.

For operating Analog Stereo Sound, see Chapter 4, Section Sound Settings.

The instrument allows external modulation from a stereo tuner/amplifier or a tape or cassette recorder with 54200 as the RF modulator.


The internal generated audio signals are available at the AUDIO OUT and the EURO AV

OUT connectors (rear side).

The audio signals are applied to:

•

AUDIO OUT L for channel 1 (S1 left).

•

AUDIO OUT R for channel 2 (S2 right).

For details of the EURO AV OUT connector, see Chapter 3, Table 3-2.

The FM modulated sound carrier signal is available at the SOUND IF OUT connector (rear side).

5-41

54200

Users Manual

NICAM Sound

Fluke 54200 with the NICAM Option offers the NICAM-728 system for different terrestrial TV systems, see table below. Exact information on the contents of the NICAM-728 system can be obtained from the ETSI Standard ETS 300 163 and

Rec. ITU-R BS.707-1.

The NICAM-728 Transmission Mode

Two sound carriers are used for the NICAM-728 transmission mode, similar to the analog FM Stereo/Dual sound mode. For NICAM, for reasons of compatibility, the first sound carrier is still transmitting the analog information assigned to the picture contents.

The second sound carrier comprises the total digital two-channel audio information.

For different TV systems, the following NICAM systems and sound carrier frequencies are used:

Table 5-14. NICAM-728 Transmission, 54200 NICAM Systems

54200 TV Systems 54200 NICAM Systems

PAL B/G

PAL D/K

PAL I

SECAM L

SECAM D/K/K1

Combined TV systems

NTSC 4.433 MHz subcarrier

NICAM B/G

NICAM DK (Europe, China)

NICAM I (related to bit-rate clock)

NICAM L

NICAM DK (as system B/G) all NICAM systems except

NICAM L, see above

NICAM Sound Carrier

Frequency

(2. Sound Carrier)

5.850 MHz

5.850 MHz

6.552 MHz

5.850 MHz

5.850 MHz frequencies, see above

For NICAM, the analog sound signal is converted into 14-bit amplitude values at a sampling rate of 32 kHz. These values are compressed to 10 bits. A further parity bit serves for an error message.

The 728 bit frames are made up as follows:

• 8-bit Frame Alignment Word (FAW) is used for synchronizing.

• 5 bits are used for control information (C0 to C4).

• 11 bits are reserved for future applications.

• 704 bits are sound, parity or data bits.

5-42


NICAM Sound

5

The control information bits CO to C4 have the following functions:

CO Frame Flag Bit.

C1, C2, C3 Application Control Bits (transmission mode).

C4 Reserve Sound Switching Flag (RSSF).

It is set to high (1), if the FM/AM channel transmits the same program as the NICAM channel; otherwise, it is set to LOW (0).

The frame structure of the NICAM-728 data signal is shown in Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29. Structure of a 728-bit Frame with a Stereo Sound Signal (before interleaving)

The sound data are split into blocks of 704 bits each and afterwards interleaved according to the system; a set of 24 control bits is added. A scrambling without Frame Alignment

Word (FAW) serves for equal energy dispersal. This data stream serves for phase shift keying of the unmodulated carrier (4QPSK modulation).

A spectrum shaping (cosine roll-off) of 100% is used for the sound data in the NICAM I system; all other NICAM systems have 40% cosine roll-off.

The RF frequency spectrum for NICAM B/G and NICAM I is shown in the Appendix D.

5-43

54200

Users Manual

Operating

Main features:

• NICAM Channel 1 sound frequencies (S1, left):

0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 1,5 kHz, 3 kHz.

• NICAM Channel 2 sound frequencies (S2, right):

1 kHz, 1,5 kHz, 3 kHz, 12 kHz.

• Sound carrier 1 analog mono sound frequencies (S3):

0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, as NICAM.

as NICAM means: sound carrier 1 is modulated with the audio signals which are selected for NICAM channels S1/S2:

Dual S1 Modulation.

• RSSF bit On or Off.

• 3 NICAM test signals.


• Sound carrier 1 pre-emphasis On or Off.

• Sound carrier 2 level setting -20 dBc, -25 dBc, or -27 dBc.

In the NICAM mode 54200 sets the residual carrier level for the video modulation generally to 20% (High).

Different NICAM sound systems are selectable for the available TV systems; for details, see Table 5-17.

• Select the different sound parameters using the sound submenu.

• Select the different NICAM sound systems:

NICAM B/G, NICAM DK, NICAM DC, NICAM I, or NICAM L using the Sound System popup.

Figure 5-30. NICAM Sound Systems

5-44


NICAM Sound

5

• Select the sound modes Mono, Dual, Stereo and TEST 1 to 3 using the

Sound Mode popup.

• Select the internal sound frequencies for:

NICAM channel 1 (left) using the S1 Modulation popup.

NICAM channel 2 (right) using the S2 Modulation popup.

• Select the internal sound frequencies for the analog FM/AM sound carrier using the

S3 Modulation popup (this is the conventional sound carrier).

• Select

Low or High amplitude of the NICAM audio signal using the NICAM Amplitude popup.

• Set the RSSF bit to

On or Off using the RSSF popup.

54200 allows the user to set the RSSF bit to On or Off without influence to the S1,

S2, or S3 modulation.

Remark:

The RSSF bit is foreseen to indicate the receiver that in case of a failure in the digital signal a switching back to the conventional FM/AM sound is acceptable.

• Select the sound carrier 1 level using the

SC1 Level popup.

• Select the sound carrier 2 level using the

SC2 Level popup.


Figure 5-31. NICAM B/G Sound Menu

Remark:

The NICAM sound carrier cannot be externally modulated. This is only possible for the sound carrier 1 (analog FM/AM sound).

NICAM systems with 5.85 MHz second sound carrier are interfered if the Multiburst pattern (0.5 to 5.8 MHz) has been switched on. 54200 has the advantage to offer the full video bandwidth in the RF modulation path. So the Multiburst should be switched off in the NICAM B/G, D/K, and L systems.

5-45

54200

Users Manual


At the AUDIO OUT and the EURO AV OUT connectors (rear side) always the sound information of the analog FM/AM sound carrier is available. If you select Off, 0.5 kHz,

1 kHz, or 3 kHz in the S3 Modulation popup menu the respective signals are available at the audio outputs, which means L = R.

If you select as NICAM in the S3 Modulation popup the audio output signals correspond to the NICAM modulation frequencies according to the S1 or S2 Modulation selection.

For details of the EURO AV OUT connector, see Chapter 3, Table 3-2.

Test 1 to Test 3 do not generate audio signals at the rear.

The digital NICAM signal is available at the NICAM OUT connectors DATA and

CLOCK .

Applications

The 54200 including NICAM sound makes it possible to check conventional TV sets with analog sound facilities in the mono modes; furthermore, the NICAM-728 signal allows you to check the complete digital sound channel in Mono, Dual, and Stereo Sound.

By selecting different NICAM amplitudes (Low or High) you can check the expander of the NICAM decoder. In this part the scale factors are recovered and an expansion of the audio data from 10 to 14 bits is realized.

For checking the de-emphasis of the NICAM receiver select the 0.5 / 1 / 1.5 / 3 / 12 kHz sound frequencies. It is possible to select the RSSF bit for all NICAM modes. By doing this, switching from NICAM to analog sound can be checked in the receiver.

Test functions

The test signals are ideally suited for checking single functions or circuitries in the sound part of NICAM receivers, see Figure 5-32.

You can select three different special NICAM TEST signals which do not comprise real

NICAM data. They contain bit patterns to check the NICAM modules.

NICAM TEST signals:

• TEST 1

• TEST 2

• TEST 3

NICAM demodulator test

NICAM decoder test unmodulated carrier

5-46


NICAM Sound

5

TEST 1 is used for checking the 4QPSK demodulator. By this method a triggerable signal at the data output of the NICAM demodulator circuit TDA 8732 can be displayed on the screen of an oscilloscope. The subsequent circuit SAA 7280 (Terrestrial Digital

Sound Decoder) in this case sends an error message (error flag) and thus indicates faulty

NICAM data.

Similar circuit design is also used by other manufacturers, for example the demodulator circuit from Toshiba TA 8662N or the decoder circuit CF 70123 from Texas Instrument.

TEST 2 checks NICAM decoders, for example, it sends a continuous 32 kHz square wave signal at the I

2

S bus output of the SAA 7280, which can easily be displayed on the screen of an oscilloscope.

TEST 3 generates an unmodulated NICAM sound carrier signal that is suited for adjustment and level measurements.

Figure 5-32. NICAM Receiver for TV Sets (Philips)

5-47

54200

Users Manual

BTSC Sound

General

The BTSC (Broadcast Television System Committee) Sound system is a Multichannel-

Television Sound (MTS) standard that uses only one sound carrier to transmit a stereophonic as well as a second audio program. The BTSC standard was first introduced in the USA and later on in Canada and Taiwan. The BTSC sound system is mostly transmitted in combination with NTSC M but also can be found in combination with PAL M, for example, Brazil.

The four components of the BTSC composite signal are described below and shown in

Figure 5-33.

• Main channel, a monophonic L+R signal with a 75 µs pre-emphasis.

• Pilot carrier, locked to the line frequency fH (15.734 kHz).

• Stereo subchannel,

L-R signal, amplitude modulated on a suppressed 2xfH subcarrier, compressed by the dynamic noise reduction system according to the BTSC specification.

• SAP (Second Audio Program) channel, frequency modulated on a 5xfH subcarrier (78.670 kHz), compressed by the dynamic noise reduction system according to the BTSC specification.

5-48

Figure 5-33. BTSC Baseband Spectrum

The broadband baseband spectrum is transmitted using frequency modulation on the sound carrier (4.5 MHz). Due to the parabolic noise characteristic, which is typical for

FM transmission systems, the noise level increases for higher frequencies. To improve the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of the L - R signal and the SAP signal, both channels are encoded by the BTSC Compressor; see Figure 5-34.

The compressor on the transmitter side is level and frequency dependent and the expander on the receiver side has to respond exactly in the opposite way to guarantee proper signal processing, mainly determined by stereo channel separation and frequency response. Therefore, it is important that the audio signal levels are well defined, which is mostly done by giving the corresponding peak deviation of the sound carrier.


BTSC Sound

5

Figure 5-34 shows a simplified diagram of a BTSC transmitter system. The BTSC modulation standards and the maximum allowed peak deviations are shown in

Table 5-15.

Figure 5-34. Simplified Diagram of a BTSC Transmitter System

Table 5-15. BTSC Sound Carrier Modulation Standards

Service or

Signal

Mono Sound

Pilot Subcarrier

Stereo Sound

SAP

Second Progr.

* fH = 15.734 kHz

Modulating

Signal

L + R

–

L - R

–

Modulating

Frequency

Range kHz

Audio

Processing or

Pre-

Emphasis

75 µs

Subcarrier

Frequency *

.05 - 15 – fH

2 x fH .05 - 15 BTSC

Compression

.05 - 10 BTSC

Compression

•

Sum does not exceed 50 kHz

5 x fH

Subcarrier

Modulation

Type

Subcarrier

Deviation kHz

AM-DSB

SC

FM 10

Sound

Carrier

Peak

Deviation kHz

25 •

5

50

•

15

5-49

54200

Users Manual

Definitions

The following explanations will help to define the level specifications of the various

BTSC signals that are delivered by the 54200.

• 100% modulation of the L+R signal corresponds to a peak deviation of the sound carrier of

∆fmax = 25 kHz. 100% modulation of the SAP signal corresponds to a peak deviation of the SAP carrier of

∆f = 10 kHz.

• The maximum allowed audio input level of 100% modulation (100% quency dependent due to the 75 µs pre-emphasis; see Figure 5-34.

$=

0 dB) is fre-

Example:

For a signal component of 15 kHz, the maximum allowed input level is

14%, about -17 dB, for L (if R = 0) or R (if L = 0). Due to the 75 µs pre-emphasis this leads to the maximum allowed peak deviation of

∆f = 25 kHz for L+R.

On the other hand, at 300 Hz the maximum allowed input level is approximately

100% neglecting the small gain factor of the pre-emphasis at 300 Hz.

• Another often used level definition is called '75 µs EIM' of a certain value in percentage, for example 100%.

This is used as a reference and determines the modulation level that would occur for the equivalent Mono signal processed using a 75 µs pre-emphasis, see Figure 5-34.

Example:

An audio input level of 14% at 15 kHz leads to '75 µs EIM*' of 100%. At 300 Hz the same input level leads about to '75 µs EIM' of 14.1%.

* EIM = Equivalent Input Modulation

Operating

Fluke 54200 offers different BTSC sound modes for TV systems NTSC M and PAL M.

For details, see table below.

Table 5-16. 54200 BTSC Sound Systems

Sound Modes TV / Sound System Menu

Indication

BTSC

BTSC

Mono/Stereo/SAP

Mono/Stereo/SAP

NTSC M

PAL M

Sound Carrier

Frequency

4.5 MHz

4.5 MHz

5-50

Main features:

• Channel 1 and mono sound frequencies (S1/left):

0.3 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 3 kHz.

• Channel 2 sound frequencies (S2/right):

1.0 kHz, 3 kHz.


• Pre-emphasis 75 µs (fixed).

• Second Audio Program (SAP) with 5 kHz sound, unmodulated, or Off.

• 3 BTSC test signals.


BTSC Sound

5

The BTSC Sound system is selected:

• using the

Country popup menu selecting USA or,

• using the

TV Standard popup menu selecting NTSC M or PAL M followed by the

Sound System popup selecting BTSC .

Figure 5-35. BTSC Sound using Country List

The different BTSC sound modes are selected:

• using the

Sound Mode popup menu selecting Mono , Stereo , or Test 1 to Test 3 .

Figure 5-36. BTSC Sound Modes

5-51

54200

Users Manual

The different BTSC sound parameters are selected or changed:

• using the sound submenu, followed by popups.

Figure 5-37. BTSC Sound Parameters

• Select the

SAP popup menu to switch off, modulate internal with 5 kHz or to get an unmodulated Second Audio Program.

Figure 5-38. BTSC Sound with SAP Popup


The different 54200 operating modes for the BTSC Sound are shown in Table 5-17.

The instrument allows external modulation with a BTSC composite signal which is applied to the MTS input on the rear so Fluke 54200 is used as an RF modulator.

5-52


BTSC Sound

5


The internal generated audio signals of channel 1 and 2 are available at the AUDIO OUT and the EURO AV OUT connectors (rear side).

The audio signals are applied to:

•

AUDIO OUT L for channel 1 (S1 left).

•

AUDIO OUT R for channel 2 (S2 right).

These signals are also applied to the EURO AV OUT pin 3 (channel 1) and pin 1 (channel

2). For the Test modes 1 to 3 no audio signals are available at the rear.

The BTSC composite signal including the Second Audio Program is available at the

MTS/PILOT OUT connector.

The FM modulated sound carrier signal (4.5 MHz) is available at the SOUND IF OUT connector.

Explanations of BTSC Test Modes

Test 1

Stereo: L = 300 Hz, R = 3.1 kHz

Each component has a level of -23 dB below the 100% audio input level. The sum L+R leads to a level of approximately -17 dB (14.1%) below the maximum audio input level.

This signal combination is useful for adjusting the Stereo Channel Separation of BTSCdecoders, for example, Philips TDA 9854, TDA 9855, or TDA 3833.

SAP: fmod = 1 kHz, with 70% Audio Input Level (AIL)

This signal is useful for making THD measurements of the SAP processing on the receiver side.

Test 2

Stereo: L = 300 Hz, R = 8 kHz

Each component has a level of '75 µs EIM of 10%'.

The signal combination is useful for measurements of channel separation on the receiver side especially at a higher frequency.

SAP: fmod = 300 Hz

The level is 27% of the maximum audio input level, which corresponds approximately to

'75 µs EIM of 28%'. The level of this signal is the same as used for the standard SAP modulation fmod = 5 kHz.

On the receiver side both signals, fmod = 5 kHz and 300 Hz (Test 2) should lead to the same audio output level.

5-53

54200

Users Manual

Test 3

Mono: L = R = 300 Hz

With a level of '75 µs EIM of 100%' which corresponds to 99% audio input level. The

L+R signal modulates the sound carrier with the maximum allowed peak deviation

(

∆fmax = 25 kHz for L+ R).

SAP: fmod = 300 Hz

With a level of '75 µs EIM of 100%'. The SAP carrier is now modulated with the maximum allowed peak deviation (

∆fmax = 10 kHz).

Both signals, the Mono- and the SAP signal are useful to adjust a BTSC-decoder to its approximately maximum output level or to compare the Mono signal level with a corresponding SAP signal.

Applications

The 54200 with BTSC makes it possible to check TV sets with analog sound facilities in

Mono and BTSC. The BTSC facilities allow performance measurements and alignment of TV receivers and VCRs in regard to the BTSC Stereo and SAP processing.

For baseband processing the composite signal is available at the MTS/PILOT Output.

The output level of the MTS Output is about 930 mV rms (open circuit) for the maximum L+R signal. This maximum level for L+R is available using Test 3 and corresponds to a peak deviation of

∆f = 25 kHz of the sound carrier. For nominal L+R level

(

∆f = 13.5 kHz) the MTS output level is 500 mV rms (open circuit).

By connecting the MTS Output directly to a BTSC decoder, you have to change the output level to the specified input level of the used decoder.

The MTS Input is available to apply an external BTSC composite signal so the 54200 is used as an RF modulator.

Areas of application:

• Alignment of the composite input level.

Alignment of FM-sound-demodulator-output level,

(for instance using Test 3).

• Alignment of Stereo channel separation of BTSC decoders.

Settings of 54200 for BTSC Stereo separation:

TV system:

Video modulation:

NTSC M or PAL M

OFF (Video Extern), or black pattern (black-burst signal), all patterns turned off

Sound carrier: ON

5-54


BTSC Sound

5

Select among:

1. Single tone mode

Stereo ON, L = 0.3 kHz, 1 kHz, or 3 kHz, R = 0

2. Double tone mode

Stereo ON, for example, L = 3 kHz, R = 1 kHz

3. Double tone mode (L = 300 Hz, R = 3.1 kHz) using Test 1, which is especially useful for Philips BTSC Decoder circuit TDA 9855 but may be useful also for other decoders.

• SAP level adjustment of BTSC decoders.

To adapt the SAP output level of a BTSC decoder to the corresponding level of the

Mono signal (volume), Test 3 generates L+R and SAP with 100%.

• Further performance measurements concerning harmonic distortion, frequency response, and bandwidth are possible.

Recommendations

Because the BTSC receiver is sensitive to the signal level and to interfering frequency components, there are several sources of decreasing performance. Any of the following can cause loss in stereo channel separation.

• Bandwidth reduction within the IF or intercarrier filters of receivers or excessive group delay ripple.

• Frequency response of FM demodulators.

• Interfering components from the video modulation, mainly n x fH.

To reduce problems during alignments or measurements of BTSC sound, it is recommended that you turn off the video modulation of the 54200 with BTSC sound (Video

Extern mode).

For stereo separation alignments, it is also helpful to select a stereo signal with a lower and a higher frequency component. As long as the stereo signals are high enough this leads to a masking of interfering components.

For example:

L = 3 kHz and R = 1 kHz, or Test 1, or Test 2.

5-55

54200

Users Manual

Sound Operating Modes

TV System

54200

PAL B/G

PAL B/G

PAL B/G

PAL D/K

PAL D/K

PAL D/K

PAL D/K

PAL I

PAL I

PAL M

PAL M

PAL N

SECAM B/G

SECAM B/G

SECAM B/G

FM Mono

FM Mono

FM Germany

NICAM B/G

SECAM D/K/K1 FM Mono

SECAM D/K/K1 FM A2

SECAM D/K/K1 NICAM DK

SECAM D/K/K1 NICAM DC

FM Mono

FM Germany

NICAM B/G

FM Mono

FM A2

NICAM DK

NICAM DC

FM Mono

NICAM I

FM Mono

BTSC

Sound System

54200

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo

Mono, Dual, Stereo, Test

*

2

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo


*

2


*

2

Mono


*

2

Mono

Mono, Stereo, Test

*

4

Mono

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo


*

2

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo


*

2


*

2

Table 5-17. Sound Operating Modes

Sound Mode x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FM Sound Internal Internal

50 µs

Preemph.

On/Off

75 µs

Preemph.

On/Off

Modulation

Frequencies

Mono

S1/S3 Mod.

*

1

Modulation

Frequencies

Stereo/Dual

Left/CH1

S1 Modulation

NICAM BTSC /Off /Off

J17 x x x

75 µs kHz kHz

0.3 0.5 1.0 3.0 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

*1 S3 Modulation only in NICAM mode: sound source of sound carrier 1.

*2 Test 1 to 3: Special NICAM parameters; for details, see Page 5-46.

*3 External modulation only possible for analog sound carrier 1.

5-56


Sound Operating Modes

5

Table 5-17. Sound Operating Modes (cont)

TV System

54200

PAL B/G

PAL B/G

PAL B/G

PAL D/K

PAL D/K

PAL D/K

PAL I

PAL I

PAL M

PAL M

PAL N

SECAM B/G

SECAM B/G

SECAM B/G

SECAM D/K/K1

SECAM D/K/K1

SECAM D/K/K1

SECAM D/K/K1

Internal

Modulation

Frequencies

Stereo/Dual

Right/CH2

S2 Modulation

/Off kHz

0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 12

SAP

Sec. Audio

Program

Off/Mod/

Unmod

Ext.

Mod.

Mono

Ext.

1.

2.

Mod.

Stereo/

Dual

Sound

Carrier

-5 dBc to

-15 dBc

Sound

Carrier

-20 dBc

-25 dBc

-27 dBc

Level

/Off

Level

/Off x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

*

3 x x x

*

3 x x x x x x x x x x x x

Remarks used in Europe,

China x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

*

3 x x x

*

3 x

*

3 x x

*

3 x x x x

*

5 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

*4 Test 1 to 3: Special BTSC parameters; for details, see Page 5-53.

*5 Apply external MTS signal to MTS Input.

5-57

54200

Users Manual

SECAM L

SECAM L

NTSC M

NTSC M

NTSC M

NTSC 4 B/G

NTSC 4 B/G

TV System

54200

Sound System

54200

AM L

NICAM L

FM Mono

FM Korea

BTSC

FM Mono

FM Germany


Mono

Sound Mode


*

2

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo

Mono, Stereo, Test

*

4

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo

FM Sound

50 µs

Preemph.

On/Off

75 µs

Preemph.

On/Off

Modulation

Frequencies

Mono

S1/S3 Mod.

*

1

Modulation

Frequencies

Stereo/Dual

Left/CH1

S1 Modulation

NICAM BTSC /Off /Off

J17

-

-/J17 x x

Internal Internal x x x

75 µs kHz kHz

0.3 0.5 1.0 3.0 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

NTSC 4 B/G

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 I

NTSC 4 I

NICAM B/G

FM Mono

FM A2

NICAM DK

NICAM DK

FM Mono

NICAM I


*

2

Mono

Mono, Dual, Stereo


*

2


*

2

Mono


*

2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

*1 S3 Modulation only in NICAM mode: sound source of sound carrier 1.

*2 Test 1 to 3: Special NICAM parameters; for details, see Page 5-46.

*3 External modulation only possible for analog sound carrier 1.

5-58


Sound Operating Modes

5

TV System

54200

SECAM L

SECAM L

NTSC M

NTSC M

NTSC M

NTSC 4 B/G

NTSC 4 B/G

NTSC 4 B/G

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 D/K

NTSC 4 I

NTSC 4 I x x x x x x


Internal

Modulation

Frequencies

Stereo/Dual

Right/CH2

S2 Modulation

/Off kHz

0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 12

SAP

Sec. Audio

Program

Off/Mod/

Unmod

Ext.

Mod.

Mono x x x x x x x x x

*

3 x x x x

Ext.

1.

2.

Mod.

Stereo/

Dual

Sound

Carrier

-5 dBc to

-15 dBc

Sound

Carrier

-20 dBc

-25 dBc

-27 dBc

Level Level

/Off /Off x x

*

5 x x x x x x x x x x x

Remarks

NTSC with subcarrier 4.433 MHz x x x x x x x x

*

3 x x x x x x x x NTSC with subcarrier 4.433 MHz x x x x x x x x x

*

3 x

*

3 x x x x x x

NTSC with subcarrier 4.433 MHz x x x x x

*

3 x x

*4 Test 1 to 3: Special BTSC parameters; for details, see Page 5-53.

*5 Apply external MTS signal to MTS Input.

5-59

54200

Users Manual

External Modulation

54200 allows external video and sound modulation by an external CVBS signal respectively sound signal so the instrument is used as an RF modulator.

External Video Modulation

In the External Video mode the vision carrier can be modulated by an external video signal (VBS or CVBS), whereby the nominal amplitude should be 1 V pp with a positive going polarity. The maximum permissible input voltage is

ñ5 V (peak-peak + dc).

54200 Display

Indication

SCART

BNC

SCART Mixed

BNC Mixed

Table 5- 18. External Video Modulation Modes

Remarks/ Function Input

Connector

EURO AV IN

(rear)

VIDEO IN

(front)

EURO AV IN

(rear)

VIDEO IN

(front)

Source for video outputs is the SCART connector.

Source for video modulation of the vision carrier is the SCART connector (Pin 20, CVBS).

Source for video outputs is the selected video input.

Source for video modulation of the vision carrier is the VIDEO IN connector.

Source for video outputs is the internal video signal.

Source for video modulation of the vision carrier is the SCART connector (Pin 20, CVBS).

Source for video outputs is the internal video signal.

Source for video modulation of the vision carrier is the VIDEO IN connector.

For the internal video modes the external applied video signal must not be switched off or removed.

5-60


External Modulation

5

Operating

Selecting external video modulation:

• Select the video submenu.

• Select

Video Source by the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2).


The Video Source popup appears.

• Select the wanted video source by the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2), e.g., SCART.

• Apply the external video signal to the

EURO AV IN connector.

For connector pins, see Chapter 3, Table 3-1.


Figure 5-39. Video Source Selection

External Sound Modulation

In the External Sound mode the sound carrier or both carriers can be modulated by external audio signals. Applied audio signals have to be matched to the selected sound system and sound mode. Different audio inputs are selectable at the rear panel. For NICAM sound only the sound carrier 1, the analog FM/AM sound, can be modulated.

For BTSC sound the external BTSC composite signal is applied to the MTS IN connector.

For further details, see Table 5-19 on the next page.

5-61

54200

Users Manual

Table 5-19. External Sound Mode

Sound

System

Analog Mono

FM/AM

Analog

Stereo/Dual

BTSC

NICAM

Display

Indication

FM Mono,

AM L

FM Germany,

FM A2,

FM Korea

BTSC

NICAM B/G,

NICAM DC,

NICAM I,

NICAM L,

NICAM DK

Sound

Mode

Remarks/Function

Mono AUDIO IN L/R,

EURO AV IN

From external applied audio signals at L and R inputs: (L+R)/2 is generated.

An external level of R = L = 0.5 V rms leads to about 54% modulation

(without pre-emphasis) which corresponds to the internal modulation level.

Frequency bandwidth of external audio inputs >40 Hz to 15 kHz.

Mono,

Dual,

Stereo

AUDIO IN L/R,

EURO AV IN

An external audio input level at R and

L of 0.5 V rms leads to about 54% modulation (without pre-emphasis) which corresponds to the internal modulation level.

Frequency bandwidth of ext. audio inputs >40 Hz to 15 kHz.

BTSC

Sound

Inputs

Mono,

Dual,

Stereo

MTS IN Apply external MTS composite signal at MTS IN. Adjust the MTS input level acc. BTSC requirements.

An MTS input level of 0.5 V rms for

L+R without pre-emphasis leads to

54% modulation (

∆ f = 13.5 kHz for

L+R).

Frequency bandwidth of MTS IN:

>40 Hz to 100 kHz.

AUDIO IN L/R,

EURO AV IN

Only ext. modulation of sound carrier 1: from external applied audio signals at

L and R inputs (L+R)/2 is generated.

An external level of R = L = 0.5 V rms leads to about 54% modulation

(without pre-emphasis) which corresponds to the internal modulation level.

Frequency bandwidth of ext. audio inputs >40 Hz to 15 kHz.

External modulation of sound carrier

2 is not possible.

5-62


External Modulation

5

Operating

Selecting external sound modulation:

• Select the sound submenu.

• Select sound source

Int by the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2).


The Sound Source popup appears.

• Select the wanted sound input connector

SCART or CINCH by the é or ê softkeys

(F1 or F2), for example, SCART . The MTS input is only selectable for BTSC sound.

Figure 5-40. Sound Source Selection

• Apply the external audio signal to the

EURO AV IN (SCART) connector.

For connector pins, see Chapter 3, Table 3-1.


Figure 5-41. External Sound Modulation

5-63

54200

Users Manual

Synchronization Outputs and Triggering

For synchronization of TV equipment or triggering purpose, for example, the time base of oscilloscopes or waveform monitors 54200 offers different synchronization signals at the rear:

• Composite sync output COMP, 2 V pp into 75 Ω

• Line sync output LINE, 2 V pp into 75 Ω

• Field sync output FIELD, 2 V pp into 75 Ω

The timing of the synchronization signals are automatically matched to 625 or 525 line systems.

An RGB sync is selectable for the single RGB OUT connectors at the rear or can be switched off. Select the RGB sync in the RGB Sync.

popup menu.

Figure 5-42. RGB Sync Selection

5-64


Operating Hints, Out of Range and Error Messages

5

Operating Hints, Out of Range and Error Messages

Operating Hints

The instrument automatically offers only settings in accordance with the installed options and the selected TV and sound systems. Not selectable settings are shown in the popup menus in grey letters. For example, if the TV system PAL B/G has been selected, the poup menu for the sound systems shows:

Figure 5-43. Non Selectable Settings

Using remote control the instrument generates messages in clear text. For example, if you have selected TV system PAL B/G and you send the command for the sound system

BTSC the instrument generates the message:

ERR 0004455; "Sound System not available for PAL B/G" or if you send the command for Teletext, if NTSC has been selected:

ERR 000447C; "Only Closed Caption available for NTSC or PAL M"

For allowed combinations and inconsistencies, see Appendix C, ‘Default Settings for

Countries’ and Table 5-17, Sound Operating Modes.

Out of Range Messages

The instrument automatically checks numerical inputs for range exceeding and shows a message in the display, if the value is out of range, for example:

Figure 5-44. Out of Range Message

Press the enter softkey to confirm the message and select a value within the allowed range.

5-65

54200

Users Manual

Using remote control the instrument generates messages in clear text, if you send values outside the allowed ranges, for example:

ERR 0004432; "RF Frequency out of Range"

ERR 0004473; "RF Level too high, Please select Level Range High"

For allowed ranges see Chapter 7, Specifications

Chapter 4, How to use the Instrument

Chapter 5, Function Reference

Error Messages

After power on the instrument checks the internal configuration, the RAMs, and the

PROMs. During operation it checks if the PLLs of the oscillators are locked and it detects internal communication errors.

If an error is detected the display shows, for example:

Figure 5-45. Error Message

If the instrument displays one of the following messages repair and/or adjustment is necessary, please contact your local Service Organization.

Fatal Error:

Hardware Error: followed by clear text followed by clear text

Internal Error: followed by a digit from 1 to 14

Remote Control Specific Error Messages

In addition to the Range Exceeding Messages and the Operating Hints, the instrument generates error messages using remote control, if you send commands with a wrong syntax, invalid header, data element, or suffix, wrong separators, or too many commands in a string.

These messages are listed in Chapter 6, Remote Control.

5-66

Chapter 6

Remote Control

Title Page

Introduction...................................................................................................... 6-3

IEEE-488 Interface ........................................................................................... 6-3

Instrument Address ...................................................................................... 6-3


RS-232 Interface .............................................................................................. 6-7

Instrument Configuration ............................................................................. 6-7

Interface Functions and Wiring..................................................................... 6-11


Remote Control Commands ............................................................................. 6-13

Program Message Syntax ............................................................................. 6-13

Message Terminator ..................................................................................... 6-13

Service Request (SRQ) and Status Registers................................................. 6-14

54200 ‘Standard Event Status Register’.................................................... 6-15

Common Commands and Queries (IEEE-488.2)............................................... 6-16

System Data............................................................................................. 6-16

Internal Operations................................................................................... 6-17


Status and Event ...................................................................................... 6-20

Save and Recall Instrument Settings......................................................... 6-21

Device Specific Messages ............................................................................ 6-21

Vision Carrier .......................................................................................... 6-22

TV-System............................................................................................... 6-23

Video .................................................................................................... 6-25

Sound .................................................................................................... 6-31

Digital Services........................................................................................ 6-35

Miscellaneous commands......................................................................... 6-39

Device Setting Queries............................................................................. 6-40

6-1

54200

Users Manual

Programming Examples................................................................................... 6-43

Example for the IEEE-488 Interface ............................................................ 6-43

Example for the RS-232 Interface ................................................................ 6-46

Error Messages ................................................................................................ 6-50

Conversion Table for the PM 5415/18 Command Set to 54200 Commands ..... 6-51

6-2


Introduction

6

Introduction

This chapter contains information about how to control Fluke 54200 by a Personal

Computer or Controller using the IEEE-488 or RS-232 Interface.

All instrument functions can be controlled using the IEEE-488 or RS-232 Interface. You can connect the RS-232 cable and additional the IEEE-488 cable to the instrument, but you cannot control the instrument using RS-232 and IEEE-488 at the same time.

Before learning the remote interface command set, first get acquainted with the functions of the instrument, parameters, settings, and limits. A detailed description with examples is in the Chapters 2 to 5 of this manual.

If you already use a program for the PM5415/18 Color TV Signal Generator, you can find a conversion table for the commands at the end of this chapter.

IEEE-488 Interface

Instrument Address

The following sections describe the functions of the IEEE-488 bus interface.

For commands, queries, syntax, and terminators, see Section "Remote Control

Commands" in this Chapter.

B US *

D evice-S pecific M essages Page 21

C om m o n C o m m an ds and Q u eries

Page 16

Syn tax and Data Structu re

Page 13

D C B A n stru m ent

IEEE-488.2

Standard

R em o te IF M essage

IEEE-488.1 Standard

A B C D

C o ntroller

IEEE-488.2

Standard

Page 6

A = Interface functions

B = Message communication functions

C = Common system functions

D = Device functions

* This figure is in accordance with 'IEEE-488 Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and

Common Commands' (ANSI/IEEE-488 Std 488.2-1987).

6-3

54200

Users Manual

Remote control of the instrument requires the instrument address to be known. On delivery from the factory the address is set to 21. You can display the set address and select a different address in the support submenu (F5 softkey).

• Set the instrument to the main screen.



• The support submenu appears:

6-4


• Press the ê softkey (F2) to select the Remote Control indication, in this example:

None .



IEEE-488 Interface

6

Figure 6-3. GPIB/IEEE-Interface Selection

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select GPIB .


• Press the ê softkey (F2) to select the address number.


• A popup menu for the numerical input of the instrument address appears:

Figure 6-4. IEEE Address Popup Menu

• Key in the required instrument address, for example,

2 5 using numerical keypad.

6-5

54200

Users Manual

6-6

Figure 6-5. Input of the IEEE Instrument Address

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your entry .

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to return to the main screen.

The instrument address is stored in a memory and is retained even after power off of the instrument.

On power up the instrument is in 'local' mode (input using keyboard). When addressed as listener by a controller, the text REMOTE appears in the display field. All keys except the local softkey are locked and you can now operate the instrument in remote control.

To return to local operation, use the addressed command GTL (go to local) or press the local softkey. To avoid unintended local control, you can disable the local softkey by using the universal command LLO (local lock out).

Interface Functions

The following interface functions are implemented:

AH1: acceptor handshake SR1: service request SRQ

SH1: source handshake

L4: listener function

DC1:

DT0: device clear function no device trigger function

T6: talker function

RL1: local/remote with local lock out

PP0: no parallel poll

C0: no controller function

E2: tri-state drivers

Hardware, connections, and the handshake procedure are in accordance with

IEEE-488.1.


RS-232 Interface

6

RS-232 Interface

Instrument Configuration

The following sections describe the functions of the RS-232 Interface. The Sections

‘Remote Control Commands’ contains information about commands, queries, syntax, and terminators.

Remote control of the instrument requires an interface communication configuration that matches that of your PC. Select the appropriate settings using the support submenu

(F5 softkey).

• Set the instrument to the main screen.



6-7

54200

Users Manual

• The support submenu appears:


• Press the ê softkey (F2) to select the Remote Control indication, in this example:

None


• A popup menu with the interface selection appears:

6-8

Figure 6-8. RS-232 Interface Selection

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select RS232 .


• The screen shows the current interface configuration:


RS-232 Interface

6

Figure 6-9. RS-232 Configuration

• Press the ê softkey (F2) to select the parameter for the baud rate.


• A popup menu appears:

Figure 6-10. Baud Rate

• Press the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) to select the appropriate baud rate.


6-9

54200

Users Manual

6-10

Figure 6-11. RS-232 Configuration Setting

• Press the ê softkey (F2) to select the next parameter.


• Select the required settings with the é or ê softkeys (F1 or F2).


• Repeat the steps for each parameter you want to change.


The settings are stored in a memory and are retained even after power off of the instrument.

On power up, the instrument is in 'local' mode (input using keyboard). When you set the instrument to listener mode by sending the command ESC2 using the PC, the text

REMOTE appears on the display. All keys except the local softkey are locked and you can now operate the instrument in remote control. To return to local operation send the command ESC1, or press the local softkey. To avoid unintended local control, you can disable the local softkey by using the command ESC5.


RS-232 Interface

6

Interface Functions and Wiring

Operating modes:

Baud rates:

Data bits:

Stop bits:

Parity:

Communication mode

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

7 or 8

1 (2 for 110 baud only)

Odd

Even

None (with 8 data bits)

Hardware handshake: ON or OFF

DSR/DTR and CTS/RTS

Hardware connection: 3 wires, no hardware handshake

7 wires, with hardware handshake

Connector: 9-pin D-connector (male)

Because the PC and the Fluke 54200 are DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) you should use the following pin configuration for the RS-232 connection cable. In general it is recommended that you use a well shielded cable for adequate radio interference suppression.

to PC

9 pin (female)

to 54200

9 pin (female)

SIGNAL PIN

1

RxD

TxD

2

3

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

6

7

4

5

8

9

.

PIN

1

SIGNAL

2 RxD

3 TxD

4 DTR

Transmitted Data

Data Terminal Ready

5 GND Signal Ground

6 DSR Data Set Ready

7 RTS Request To Send

8 CTS Clear To Send

9

This cable can be purchased from your local Fluke organization, order number

PM 9536/041.

6-11

54200

Users Manual

If you use a 3-wire connection, set the 54200 to software handshake

( HW Handshake No ).

to PC

9 pin (female)

to 54200

9 pin (female)

SIGNAL PIN

1

RxD

TxD

GND

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

PIN SIGNAL

1

8

9

6

7

2 RxD

3 TxD Transmitted Data

4

5 GND Signal Ground

Interface Functions

For communication with the RS-232 Interface, use the following commands (similar to the addressed and unaddressed interface commands for IEEE-488):

RS-232

ESC 1

ESC 2

ESC 3

ESC 4

ESC 5

ESC 7

Function go to local

Similar to IEEE-488

GTL go to remote control GTR local lock out disabled ---device clear local lock out asks for status byte

DCL

LLO

*STB?

These commands should be implemented in an application program, so they can be sent to the instrument by a PC.

6-12


Remote Control Commands

6

Remote Control Commands

In this section the commands are described as they relate to the instrument functions and front panel keys. If not stated otherwise, following commands are used for IEEE-488 as well as for RS-232.

Program Message Syntax

You can combine several commands in a message and send them to the instrument, using the semicolon ";" as a separator between the commands. The length of a message is limited to 2000 characters.

Header and data element must be separated by a space. The end of a message must be terminated by NL (new line), ÊND or both for the IEEE-488 Interface. For the RS-232

Interface the message must be terminated by NL.

Sem icolon

;

Comma

,

Header Space

Data

Element

Suffix Terminator

Message Terminator

The instrument accepts ÊND or NL (ASCII 10 dec.) or both as the terminator for a program message using the IEEE-488 Interface.

The instrument also sets ÊND and NL as the terminator for a response message.

Programming via the RS-232 Interface uses only NL as the terminator.

6-13

54200

Users Manual

Service Request (SRQ) and Status Registers

A Service Request will be generated if one or more bits of the 'Status Byte Register' are set to 1 and if the corresponding bits are enabled by the 'Service Request Enable Register'

(IEEE-488 Interface only). The controller asks the contents of the 'Status Byte Register' in 'Serial Poll Mode.'

Table 6-1. Fluke 54200 'Status Byte Register'

Function Decimal Value Bit

2

3

4

0

1

5

6

7 not used message available (MAV) bit of the ‘Standard Event Status Register’ high request for service (RSQ) not used

4

8

16

1

2

32

64

128

To get the information using Service Request that bits of the 'Standard Event Status

Register' are set, those bits must have been enabled by *ESE, and bit 5 of the 'Status

Byte Register' must have been enabled by *SRE.

Direct readout without Service Request is possible for the IEEE-488 as well as for the

RS-232 Interface by using the *ESR? query for the 'Standard Event Status Register' and by the *STB? query for the 'Status Byte Register.'

6-14

54200 ‘Standard Event Status Register’



6

<NR1> represents a decimal value. The binary pattern of the decimal value sets the corresponding bits of the 'Enable Registers' to 1, which enables the bits of the 'Status

Registers'.

All bits of the 'Standard Event Status Enable Register' and the 'Service Request Enable

Register' are automatically set to 0 when powering up the instrument. Therefore, in a user program it is necessary that the required bits are set to 1 after power-on, if Service

Request is required.

6-15

54200

Users Manual

Common Commands and Queries (IEEE-488.2)

System Data

*IDN? Identification Query

After receipt of this query, the instrument generates the following response message:

FLUKE,54200,DMyyyyyy,Vx.x

Software status

Serial number

Instrument

Manufacturer

*LRN? Learn Device Setup Query

After receipt of the query the instrument generates a response message which comprises the complete actual instrument setups except the data of VPS, PDC, CC, WSS, and TXT.

This message can be read in by a controller, stored in a program, and re-sent as a program command message to the instrument later on. By this method, manual keyboard inputs can be read into a program.

*OPT? Option Identification Query

After receipt of this query, the instrument generates a response message about the installed options, for example:

54200;PAL,NTSC,SECAM,TXT,PDC,CC,RGB,GPIB,STEREO,NICAM,BTSC

6-16



6

Internal Operations

*RST Reset Command

This command performs a reset, which sets the instrument to a default status:

Table 6-2. Instrument Default Settings after Reset (*RST)

For instruments with PAL with or without NTSC and/or SECAM:

Country

TV Standard

Vision Carrier

RF Level

Residual Carrier

Group Delay

Video Amplitude

Chroma Amplitude

Video Source

Video Output

Video Sync

Video Polarity

None

PAL B/G

471.25 MHz

10.0 mV

LOW (10%)

ON

100%

100%

Intern

CVBS

OFF

Positive

Pattern

Aspect Ratio

Sound System

Sound Mode

Sound Carrier 1

Sound Carrier 1 Level

Preemphasis

DIGI_ADC2

4:3

FM mono

Mono

5.5 MHz

-13 dBc

ON (50 µs)

Sound Mod. Frequency 1 kHz

Teletext Auto

Text Lines

WSS

VPS/PDC

8

Auto

Set 7 / Set 7

Different settings for instruments with NTSC, without PAL, with or without SECAM:

TV Standard

Sound Carrier 1


NTSC M

4.5 MHz

-10 dBc

Preemphasis

Closed Caption

Teletext

ON (75 µs)

CC Number 1

OFF

Different settings for instruments with SECAM, without PAL and without NTSC:

TV Standard

Group Delay

SECAM L

OFF

Frame Indication

Teletext A

OFF

OFF

Sound System

Sound Carrier 1


Preemphasis

AM L

6.5 MHz

-10 dBc

None

Text Lines

WSS

VPS

4

Auto

OFF

All parameters not mentioned are set according to PAL B/G and the sound system

FM Mono.

The reset does not affect the internal memories, for instrument settings, the PDC and VPS data sets, the enable registers, and the status registers of the interface.

6-17

54200

Users Manual

*TST? Self-test Query

The instrument automatically checks the RAM, the I

2

C-bus communication to the RF units, and the communication to the module for Teletext, VPS, PDC, CC, and WSS. The contents of the register will not be destroyed, and instrument settings remain unchanged.

The test lasts approximately

1 second.

A zero in the response indicates that the self-test has completed without errors detected.

In case of an error, one of the following digits is displayed:

10758 = Hardware Error: No Response from the RF Control

10759 = Hardware Error: No Response from RF Calibration EEPROM

10760 = Hardware Error: Invalid Calibration Data for RF Control

10769 = Hardware Error: No Response from RF Level Calibration EEPROM

10771 = Hardware Error: Invalid Calibration Data for RF Level Control

10817 = Hardware Error: No Response from Teletext Control

10851 = Hardware Error: RAM Test failed

6-18



6

Synchronization

*OPC Operating Complete Command

Sending a command using the IEEE-488 bus, followed by the command *OPC in the same string, sets bit 0 (operation complete) of the 'Standard Event Status Register' to 1 when the function is finished. This bit activates bit 5 of the 'Status Byte Register' (Event

Status Bit), which generates a Service Request. This alerts the controller that the function is finished. See Page 6-15 to enable the Service Request.

*OPC?

Operation Complete Query

Sending the query *OPC? to the generator during a running function causes the instrument to wait until the function is finished, and then set a 1 in the output queue. The register can be read out by the controller without a Service Request. When a 1 is returned, your user program can then continue.

Data in the output queue activate bit 4 of the 'Status Byte Register' (MAV, message available), which may generate a Service Request. To avoid generating an SRQ, disable bit 4 (set it to 0). Bit 0 (operation complete) of the 'Standard Event Status Register' is not affected by *OPC?

Contrary to *OPC, the query *OPC? is more convenient for the RS-232 Interface because the 1 is directly sent; a separate read-out is not necessary as it would be for the

IEEE-488 Interface.

If *OPC? is sent when the operation is already finished, bit 0 is not set to 1.

*WAI Wait-to-Continue Command

This command sent to the instrument in a message string with other commands causes the generator to execute the command following *WAI only when the previous command is completed.

Example: FREQ 500M;*SAV 10;*WAI;FREQ 400M

The command *WAI in this string causes the instrument to change the frequency setting to 400 MHz after the previous setting of 500 MHz has been stored.

6-19

54200

Users Manual

Status and Event

*CLS Clear Status Command

Sets bits of the 'Standard Event Status Register' and of the 'Status Byte Register' to zero.

Sending *CLS as a single command or as the first command of a string also clears the contents of the Output Queue.

*ESE Standard Event Status Enable Command

*ESE, followed by a decimal value, sets the bits of the 'Standard Event Status Enable

Register.' This enables the assigned bits of the 'Standard Event Status Register,' see

Page 6-15.

*ESE?

Standard Event Status Enable Query

This query asks the instrument for the contents of the 'Standard Event Status Enable

Register.' The response is a decimal value.

Example: 255 = all bits are set to 1: all events of the 'Standard Event Status

Register' are enabled.

*ESR?

Standard Event Status Register Query

Asks for the contents of the 'Standard Event Status Register.' The response is a decimal value. This query also clears the register contents.

*SRE Service Request Enable Command

*SRE, followed by a decimal value, sets the bits to 1 of the 'Service Request Enable

Register', except bit 6. For more detail on the assigned bits of the 'Status Byte Register,' see Page 6-15.

*SRE?

Service Request Enable Query

Asks for the contents of the 'Service Request Enable Register.' The response is a decimal value.

*STB?

Read Status Byte Query

Asks for the contents of the 'Status Byte Register.' The response is a decimal value.

Sending this query using IEEE-488 Interface causes the 54200 to set bit 4 (MAV) of the

Status Byte Register. The output is 16 dec if no further bits are set.

6-20



6

Save and Recall Instrument Settings

*SAV Save Command

This command, followed by a decimal value from 1 to 99, stores the current instrument setting into the corresponding internal memory register. The command is executed after all other commands in a common string are completed. The instrument cannot handle more than 25 *SAV commands in one message. The contents of the memory are not affected by the command *RST or when the instrument is turned off.

*RCL Recall Command

This command, followed by a decimal value from 1 to 99 for the memory place, calls up and executes the instrument setting stored in that memory register.

Device Specific Messages

This section contains the remote programming commands necessary to select operation modes, parameters, and settings.

"

"

Separates expressions which can be used by choice.

"[ ]" Means that this expression or unit need not necessarily be input. If the unit is missing the instrument automatically sets Hz for frequencies, V for amplitudes, dBc for levels, and s for time.

"NRf" Flexible numeric representation. Under the IEEE-488.2 standard, numeric values can be given to the instrument in integer <NR1 >, real <NR2>, or exponential

<NR3> forms. The number of digits is limited to 100 for mantissa and 2 for the exponent. The instrument rounds automatically to the next possible value for the selected parameter.

You can set, for example, the carrier frequency to 203.25 MHz with following inputs for <NRf>:

FREQUENCY 203.25E6

FREQUENCY 203250000

FREQUENCY 203250000.0

FREQUENCY 203250E3

FREQUENCY 203300000 Instrument rounds to its nearest allowed frequency, which is 203.25 MHz.

" , " Serves as a separator between several data elements in the program data. The length of a complete program message is limited to 2000 characters. The length of a string is limited to 1000 characters.

Example:

SC1LEVEL -10 DBC

Unit dBc

Carrier level

Sound carrier

Amplitude

Suffix Program

Data Element Data

Program

Header

Command

Program Message

6-21

54200

Users Manual

You can send most headers and data in short form, marked with bold letters.

Example : FREQUENCY

SC1LEVEL is in short form is in short form

FREQ

SC1L

All headers can be sent as command headers to program the generator and also as query by adding a question mark. The instrument returns its actual setting in response to the query.

Example : FREQ 471250E3

FREQ?

Sets the instrument to

Response

471.25 MHz

: FREQ 471.25E6

Vision Carrier

•

RF Frequency

Header: FREQUENCY

Data element: NRf

Suffix: [HZ | KHZ | MHZ | GHZ]

Remark: NRf is the frequency range from 32.00 MHz to 900.00 MHz in 50 kHz steps. If no suffix is sent, the instrument sets HZ (Hertz).

Example: FREQUENCY 203.25 MHZ or

FREQ 203.25E6

sets the vision carrier frequency to 203.25 MHz.

•

RF Level

Header: LEVEL

Data element: NRf

Suffix:

Remark:

[DBUV | MV | UV | V]

NRf is the level range from 0.01 mV to 100 mV in

0.01 mV steps to 10 mV and in 0.1 mV steps to 100 mV

(20 to 100 dVµV in 1 dB steps).

If no suffix is sent, the instrument sets V (Volts).

Example: LEVEL 1MV or

LEVE 0.001

sets the vision carrier level to 1 mV.

6-22



6

•

RF Level Range

Header: LEVRANGE

Data element: LOW | HIGH

Remark: LOW = maximum level setting 10 mV (80 dBµV)

HIGH = maximum level setting 100 mV (100 dBµV)

Example: LEVRANGE LOW or

LEVR L sets the maximum output level to 10 mV.

TV-System

•

Country

Header: COUNTRY

Data element: NRf

Remark: The command sets the TV-standard, sound system, Teletext, etc.

according to the national standards of the selected country.

NRf is the telephone country code:

Table 6-3. Telephone Country Code

Argentina

Brazil

Central African Republic

China Public Republic

Czech Republic

France

Germany

Greece

Hungary

Japan

54

55

236

86

421

33

49

30

36

81

Korea

Mexico

Poland

Romania

Russian Federal Rep.

Slovakia

Spain

Sweden

United Kingdom

USA

46

44

1

82

52

48

40

7

429

34

Example: COUNTRY 49 or

COUN 49 selects Germany.

6-23

54200

Users Manual

•

TV Standard

Header: TVSTANDARD

Data element: PALB | PALD | PALG | PALI | PALK | PALM | PALN | NTSCM |

NTSC4B | NTSC4D | NTSC4G | NTSC4I | NTSC4K |SECAMB |

SECAMG | SECAMD | SECAMK | SECAMK1 | SECAML

Remark: SECAMK and SECAMK1 are identical in the 54200.

Example: TVSTANDARD PALB or

TVST PALB sets the German TV-standard PAL B

•

Group Delay

Header: GRPDELAY

Data element: ON | OFF

Remark: The group delay is set according to the current TV-standard. It is defined for B/G and M/N standards. For all other standards the command is accepted but the group delay remains off until a B/G or

M/N standard is selected.

Example: GRPDELAY OFF or

GRPD OF switches the group delay off.

•

Residual Carrier

Header: RESCARRIER


Remark:

Example:

LOW = 10% residual carrier, HIGH = 20% residual carrier

LOW for NICAM not available

RESCARRIER LOW or

RESC L sets the residual carrier to 10%.

6-24



6

•

Frame Identification

Header: FRAMEID

Data element: ON | OFF

Remark: This command is only meaningful for SECAM, but can be set anyway.

Example: FRAMEID OFF or

FRAM OF switches the frame identification pulses for SECAM off.

Video

•

TV Patterns

Header: PATTERN

Data element: Mnemonic :

Mnemonic

CI

CH_WNN

CH_WCN

CH_WNT

CH_WCT

CH_BNN

CH_BCN

CH_BNT

CH_BCT

CENTER_2

CENTER_3

DOTS_WHITE

DOTS_BLACK

CHECKER

Pattern Description

Circle, white or black, depending on background

Crosshatch white, no color burst, no TL indication

Crosshatch white, color burst, no TL indication

Crosshatch white, no color burst, TL indication

Crosshatch white, color burst, TL indication

Crosshatch black, no color burst, no TL indication

Crosshatch black, color burst, no TL indication

Crosshatch black, no color burst, TL indication

Crosshatch black, color burst, TL indication

Center Cross, 2% border castellation

1)

Center Cross, 3% border castellation 1)

White dots on black background

Black dots on white background

Checkerboard

6-25

54200

Users Manual

Mnemonic

WH_00

WH_05

WH_7_5

WH_15

WH_20

:

WH_95

WH_100

GREYSCALE

MULTIBURST

COL_75_0

COL_100_0

COL_75_25

COL_100_25

COL_SMPTE

COL_HORZ

COL_SP_75

COL_SP_100

PUR_RED

PUR_GREEN

PUR_BLUE

PUR_CYAN

PUR_MAGENTA

PUR_YELLOW

PUR_WHITE

PUR_BLACK

VCR_PAT1

VCR_PAT2

VCR_RES_STD

VCR_RES_HI

VCR_WRITE

DEM_PAT1

DEM_PAT2

PLUGE


White, 0%

2)

White, 5%

2)

White, 7.5%

2)

White, 15%

White, 20% in 5% steps to

White, 95%

White, 100%

Greyscale

Multiburst

Full Field Color Bar 75/0/75/0

3)


3)



SMPTE Color Bar

3)


3)

Split Field Color Bar 75/0/75/0

4)

Split Field Color Bar 100/0/75/0 4)

Purity red

Purity green

Purity blue

Purity cyan

Purity magenta

Purity yellow

Purity white

Purity black

VCR1 pattern

VCR2 pattern

VCR pattern for standard resolution test

VCR pattern for high resolution test

VCR pattern for Writing Current Adjustment

Demodulator Test DEM 1

Demodulator Test DEM 2

PLUGE pattern

6-26



6

Mnemonic

DIGI_ADC1

DIGI_ADC2

DIGI_MOVE

DIGI_SCAN1_S

DIGI_SCAN1_M

DIGI_SCAN2_S

DIGI_SCAN2_M

DIGI_SCAN3_S

DIGI_SCAN3_M

CTA_SMALL

CTA_MEDIUM

CTA_LARGE

EHTTEST

IRS17

OFF


Digital Scan, ADC Check 1

Digital Scan, ADC Check 2

Moving block

Progressive Scan Check 1, still

Progressive Scan Check 1, moving





Color Temperature Adjustment, size 1 5)

Color Temperature Adjustment, size 2

5)

Color Temperature Adjustment, size 3

5)

EHT test pattern

Pattern of Insertion-Reference Signal Line 17

Black pattern (black screen)

1. Black or white cross, depending on background.

2. 0% and 5% for 625 line systems only.

7.5% for 525 line systems only.

If you select 0% or 5% in a 625 line system and switch to a 525 line system, the instrument sets

7.5% (IRE), that is the lowest level in the 525 line system.

Switching back to a 625 line system sets the level to 0%.

3. The table shows the primary color signal levels for the 625 line systems. For the 525 line systems the minimum values are set to 7.5% instead of 0%.

4. Purity part of the split field color set by the purity command, e.g., PAT COL_SP1;PAT PUR_R.

5. The luminance value can be set by the command CTABORDER for the border and CTACENTER for the center.

Remark:

Example:

For combinations send separate commands with the different patterns.

To reset all patterns send PATTERN OFF .

A string is executed from left to right.

If a pattern is selected that does not match with the previously selected, the previously selected is switched off.

The device cannot accept more than 16 pattern commands in one string.

PAT CHE; PAT CI; PAT VCR_PAT1 ; switches VCR1 and Circle on, the checkerboard is ignored because is does not match the VCR1 pattern.

For legal pattern combinations see Chapter 4.

PATTERN OFF;PATTERN CI;PATTERN PUR_YELLOW;

PATTERN COL_SP_100; or

PAT O;PAT CI;PAT PUR_Y;PAT COL_SP_100 clears first all patterns and then sets circle, purity yellow, and split field colorbar.

6-27

54200

Users Manual

•

Insertion-Reference Signal in Line 17 (IRS)

Header: REFLINE


Example:

Remark:

REFLINE ON or

REFLI ON switches the Insertion-Reference Signal in line 17 and 330 on.

This command is only available for PAL 625 line systems.

Changing to a different TV standard switches the signal off.

•

Video Source

Header: VIDSOURCE

Data element: INT | SCART | EXTERN

Example: VIDSOURCE SCART or

VIDSO SC selects the SCART connector on the rear as video input.

•

Video Amplitude

Header: VIDAMPLITUDE

Data element: NRf

Suffix:

Remark:

[ PCT ]

NRf is a range from 0 to 150% in 1% steps.

The suffix need not to be send.

Example: VIDAMPLITUDE 100PCT or

VIDA 100 sets the video amplitude to 100%.

•

Chroma Amplitude

Header: CHRAMPLITUDE

Data element: NRf

Suffix:

Remark:

[ PCT ]

NRf is a range from 0 to 150% in 1% steps.

The suffix need not to be send.

Example: CHRAMPLITUDE 100PCT or

CHRA 100 sets the color amplitude to its standard value of 100%.

6-28



6

•

White level for the border of the Color Temperature Adjustment pattern

Header: CTABORDER

Data element: NRf

Suffix:

[

PCT | IRE

]

Remark: NRf for 625 line systems: 0, 50, or 100%.

NRf for 525 line systems: 7.5, 53.75, or 100 IRE.

Example: CTABORDER 100PCT or

CTAB 100 sets the luminance for the CTA border to 100% for 625 line systems.

•

White level for the center of the Color Temperature Adjustment pattern

Header: CTACENTER

Data element: NRf

Suffix:

[

PCT | IRE

]

Remark: NRf for 625 line systems:

Range from 0%, 5%, 15% to 100% in 5% steps.

NRf for 525 line systems:

Range from 7.5, 15, 20 to 100 IRE in 5 IRE steps.

See also White Pattern, Page 6-26.

Example: CATCENTER 20PCT or

CTAC 20 sets the luminance for the center of the CTA pattern to 20%.

•

Aspect Ratio

Header: ASPRATIO

Data element: R16_9 | R4_3

Example: ASPRATIO R16_9 or

ASPR R16_9 sets the Aspect Ratio to 16:9.

6-29

54200

Users Manual

•

SCART Output

Header: SCARTOUT

Data element: RGB | Y_C | CVBS | CV_RGB

Example: SCARTOUT RGB or

SCARTO R sets the SCART output to RGB.

•

SCART CVBS status line

Header: CVBS_STAT

Data element: OFF | AUTO

Example: CVBS_STAT AUTO or

CVBS A sets the status line according to the current aspect ratio.

•

Video Synchronization for the RGB output

Header: RGBSYNC

Data element: RED | GREEN | BLUE | OFF

Example: RGBSYNC GREEN or

RGBS G sets the sync in the green line.

•

Video Polarity for the BNC video output

Header: VIDPOLARITY

Data element: POSITIVE | NEGATIVE

Example: VIDEOPOLARITY POSITIVE or

VIDP P selects a positive video signal for the BNC video output.

6-30



6

Sound

•

Sound System

Header: SNDSYSTEM

Data element: AML | FMMONO | FMGERMANY | FMA2 | FMKOREA | BTSC |

NICAMB | NICAMDK | NICAMDC | NICAMG | NICAMI | NICAML

Example: SNDSYSTEM FMGERMANY or

SNDSY FMG selects the German sound system.

•

Sound Mode

Header: SNDMODE

Data element: MONO | DUAL | STEREO | TEST1 | TEST2 | TEST3

Remark: If NICAM is on, this command selects the digital sound mode, the analog sound is always set to MONO.

Example: SNDMOD DUAL or

SNDM D selects the DUAL sound mode.

•

Sound Source

Header: SNDSOURCE

Data element: INTERN | EXTERN | SCART | CINCH | MTS

Remark: If NICAM is on, this command selects the analog sound source; the digital sound is always internal.

MTS is for 4.5 MHz systems only, for external BTSC.

Example: SNDSOURCE INTERN or

SNDSO I selects the internal sound source.

6-31

54200

Users Manual

•

Sound modulation frequency channel 1.

Mono

Stereo, left channel

Dual, channel A

Header: S1MODULATION

Data element: OFF/NRf


Remark: NRf is a frequency of 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 3.0 kHz.

If no suffix is sent, the instrument sets HZ (Hertz).

The selectable frequencies depend on TV standard and sound system.

Example: S1MODULATION 0.3KHZ

or

S1MOD 0.3K

sets the sound modulation frequency for channel 1 to 0.3 kHz.

•


Stereo, right channel

Dual, channel B




Remark: NRf is a frequency of 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 3.0, 12 kHz.


The selectable frequencies depend on TV-standard and sound system.


or

S2MOD 1K sets the sound modulation frequency for channel 2 to 1 kHz.

6-32



6

•


Analog MONO channel with NICAM.




Remark: NRf is a frequency of 0.5, 1.0, 3.0 kHz.


This command is for NICAM only. The RSSF is not influenced.


or

S3MOD 3K sets the sound modulation frequency for channel 3 to 3 kHz.

•

Sound Carrier amplitude, carrier 1

Header: SC1LEVEL


Suffix:

Remark:

[DBC]

NRf is a level range from -5 to -15 dBc in step of 1 dB

Example: SC1LEVEL -10DBC or

SC1L -10 sets the sound carrier level 1 to -10 dB relative to the vision carrier.

•

Sound Carrier amplitude, carrier 2 for analog stereo and NICAM

Header: SC2LEVEL

Data element: OFF/NRf:

Suffix:

Remark:

[DBC]

NRf is a level of -20, -25, -27 dBc.

Example: SC2LEVEL -20DBC or

SC2L -20 sets the sound carrier level 2 to -20 dBc relative to the vision carrier.

6-33

54200

Users Manual

•

Pre-emphasis

Header: PREEMPHASIS


Remark: The preemphasis is set according to the current TV-standard.

If SECAM L is on, the command is accepted but the preemphasis is always off. After changing the standard the preemphasis is set according to this command.

Example: PREEMPHASIS OFF or

PREEM OF switches the preemphasis off.

•

NICAM RSSF

Header: RSSF


Remark: You can only change the RSSF with this command or in manual operation using the keyboard of the generator. There is no automatism .

Example: RSSF OFF or

RSSF OF switches RSSF off.

•

NICAM Amplitude

Header: NICAMPLITUDE


Example: NICAMAMPLITUDE LOW or

NICA L sets the NICAM amplitude to low.

6-34



6

•

NICAM Source

Header: NICSOURCE

Data element: OFF | INTERN

Remark: For this command NICAM must be switched on.

Example: NICSOURCE OFF or

NICS O switches the internal NICAM source off.

This is the same function as S1MOD OF;S2MOD OF.

•

BTSC SAP

Header: SAP

Data element: OFF | MODULATED | UNMODULATED

Example: SAP MODULATED or

SAP M switches the modulated SAP on.

Digital Services

•

Teletext

Header: TTXSYSTEM

Data element: AUTO | ANTIOPE | TOP1 | TOP2 | FLOF1 | FLOF2 | CC | OFF

Remark: This command selects the teletext system and mode.

TOP/FLOF 1 and 2 define the VPT mode:

1 VPT used in Germany,

2 used in United Kingdom.

Example: TTXSYSTEM AUTO or

TTXS AU sets the teletext system according to the TV standard.

The settings are:

ANTIOPE for SECAM L,

TOP1 for PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K,

FLOF2 for PAL I and

OFF for all others.

6-35

54200

Users Manual

•

Number of Teletext lines

Header: TTXLINES

Data element: 4 | 8

Remark: 8 not for SECAM

Example: TTXLINES 4 or TTXL 4 enables teletext data in the lines 20,21 and 333,334

•

Closed Caption

Header: CCNUMBER

Data element: SEQUENCE | NRf

Remark: NRf is a number from 1 to 8.

1 to 8 are the eight different sets,

SEQUENCE is the sequential output of set 1 to 8.

Example: CCNUMBER 3 or

CCN 3 selects data set number 3.

•

PDC

Header: PDCNUMBER

Data element: MULTI | NRf


0 = off,

1 to 9 are the PDC data sets,

MULTI = multilabeling using the data sets 1 to 4.

This command switches PDC on or off and selects the data set.

For PDC, Teletext must be switched on.

Example: PDCNUMBER 3 or

PDCN 3 recalls the PDC data set 3.

6-36



6

•

VPS

Header: VPSNUMBER

Data element: NRf


0 = off,

1 to 9 are the VPS data sets.

This command switches VPS on or off and selects the data set.

For VPS, Teletext must be switched on.

Example: VPNSNUMBER or

VPSN 3 recalls the VPS data set 3.

•

Programming of PDC/VPS

Header: PDCDATA | VPSDATA

Data element: NR1

Remark: NR1 is the set number, a string with the complete PDC or VPS data, and a string with the program title.

The data sets 1 to 4 are programmable.

The format of the first string is:

DD.MM, HH:MM, Country, Network, PTY, Reserved bits, Flags.

The ranges are:

0 to 31 for day and hour,

0 to 15 for month and flags,

0 to 63 for minutes,

0 to 255 for country, network and program type (PTY),

0 to 3 for reserved bits,

0 to 15 for the flags (PDC only).

For the flags value the MSB bit is the PRF, the MSB -1 is the LUF bit, and the two LSB bits are the LCI bits.

The separators in the string may be a full stop, colon, comma, or a space. The second string may contain any printable ASCII character except ' " ' or ' ' '. Its length is at most 20 characters.

Example: PDCD 3,"27.12,12:00,123,23,255,0,0","Gentlemen Gangsters"

VPSD 3,"27.12,12:00,123,23,255,0","Gentlemen Gangsters" writes the PDC/VPS data for date (27.12), time (12:00), country (123),

Network (23), PTY (255), reserved bits (0), flags for PDC (0), and the program title as set number 3 into the memory.

6-37

54200

Users Manual

•

WSS, Wide Screen Signalling

Header: WSSMODE

Data element: OFF | AUTO | MANUAL

Example: WSSMODE AUTO or

WSSM A switches the signalling bits on; they are set according to the instrument settings.

•

Programming of WSS data

Header: WSSDATA

Data element: Binary number

Remark: Only 14 bits are accepted.

Example: WSSD #B00100100100100

6-38



6

Miscellaneous commands

•

Display Mode

Header: DISPMODE

Data element: ON | OFF | MAIN | SOUND | VIDEO | STANDARD | DIGDATA |

SUPPORT

Remark: This command switches the display of the generator on or off (in remote operation only) and selects the displayed screen. The support screen can only be shown for information purposes; the settings on this screen (except the clock) cannot be changed using remote control.

Example: DISPMODE OFF or

DISP OF switched the display of the generator off.

•

Real-time clock

Header: TIME

Data element: String

Remark: The string contains the date for the year, month, day, hour, and minute:

"YYYY.MM.DD,HH:MM"

Range for the date: From January 1st, 1991 to December 31st, 2090,

Range for the time: From 00:00 to 23:59

Example: TIME "1996.12.24,18:00" sets the clock to 6.00 p.m. at Christmas Eve 1996.

•

Local Time Offset

Header: LTOFFSET

Data element: NR1

Remark: NR1 is the range is from -12 to +12.

The command sets a local time offset related to selected time in hours.

Example: LTOFFSET 1 sets a time offset of one hour,

LTO 0 sets no time offset.

6-39

54200

Users Manual

Device Setting Queries

All device specific commands can also be sent as query, except the commands for programmed Teletext, VPS, PDC data and WSS. The responses use the basic units Volts,

Hertz, dBc, minutes or seconds. In addition you can send following queries:

•

RF query

Query: RF?

Response headers: FREQ Vision carrier frequency

LEVE Carrier amplitude

LEVR Level range of the carrier amplitude

Response example: FREQ 203.25E+6;LEVE 0.01;LEVR L

•

System query

Query: STAN?

Response headers: COUN Country

TVST TV standard

GRPD Group delay

RESC Residual carrier

FRAM SACAM Frame Identification

Response example: COUN 49;TVST PALG;GRPD OFF;RESC L

Remark: FRAM is only sent if SECAM is on.

6-40



6

•

Video query

Query: VIDEO?

Response header: VIDA

CHRA

ASPR

VIDSO

VIDP

RGBSY

SCARTO

CVBS

CTAB

CTAC

PAT

Video amplitude

Chroma amplitude

Aspect Ratio

Video source

Video polarity (BNC)

Video synchronization (RGB)

SCART output

SCART CVBS status line

White level of CTA pattern border

White level of CTA pattern center

TV pattern

Response example: VIDA 90PCT;CHRA 100 PCT;ASPR R 4_3;VIDSO I;

VIDP P;RGBSY OFF;SCARTO RGB;CVBS A;CTAB 50;

CTAC 100;PAT CI

Remark: For pattern combinations each part is sent as one command, for example: PAT CI;PAT COL_SP_100

•

Sound query

Query: SOUND?

Response header: SNDSY

SNDM

SNDSO

S1MOD

Sound system

Sound mode

Sound source

Sound modulation frequency, channel 1

SC1L Sound carrier amplitude, channel 1

PREEMP Preemphasis

Additional for FM DUAL/STEREO:

S2MOD Sound modulation frequency, channel 2

SC2L Sound carrier amplitude, channel 2

Additional for NICAM MONO:


SC2L

RSSF

Sound carrier amplitude, channel 2

Reserve Sound Switching Flag

NICA

SNDN

NICAM amplitude

Sound source NICAM

6-41

54200

Users Manual

Additional for NICAM DUAL/STEREO:


S3MOD

SC2L

Sound modulation frequency, channel 3

Sound carrier amplitude, channel 2

RSSF

NICA

SNDN


NICAM amplitude

Sound source NICAM

Additional for BTSC STEREO:


SAP Second Audio Program

For the BTSC/NICAM test mode you get:

SNDSY Sound system

SNDM Sound mode: Test 1, 2, or 3

Response example: SNDSY NICAMB;SNDM TEST1

•

Digital Data query

Query:

Response header:

DIGD?

TTXS

TTXL

CCN

PDCN

VPSN

WSSM

Teletext system

Teletext lines

Closed Caption, set number

Program Delivery Control, set number

Video Programming System, set number

White Screen Signalling

Response example: TTXS FLOF1;TTXL 4;PDCN 1; VPSN 0;WSSM A

Remark: This query is only for instruments with Digital Services.

TTXS and CCN exclude each other.

The response to the *LRN? query is a combination of the response to these five queries.

The response is given when the instrument has received the queries in the sequence:

RF?;STAN?;DIGD?;SOUND?;VIDEO?.

If an option is not installed the correspondent query is omitted.

6-42


Programming Examples

6

Programming Examples

The following examples are related to an IBM-compatible PC. The first one uses the built-in IEEE-488 Interface, the second one uses the standard serial port of the controller and the RS-232 Interface. You should have basic knowledge of the MS-DOS operating system of your controller and the programming language QuickBasic (version 4.0 and above) to understand the examples that follow.

Example for the IEEE-488 Interface

DECLARE SUB SendCmd (WR$)

DECLARE SUB SendStr (WR$)

DECLARE SUB ErrChk (Cs!, Sts%)

REM $INCLUDE: 'qbdecl4.bas'

CLS

PRINT " "

PRINT " "

PRINT " ***** DEMO PROGRAM FOR FLUKE 54200/100 *****"

PRINT

PRINT " PRESS 'RETURN' TO CONTINUE "

PRINT

PRINT " To leave running program type 'END' or 'end' "

BEEP

PRINT

DO 'waiting for 'RETURN'

B$ = ""

DO UNTIL B$ <> ""

B$ = INKEY$

LOOP

LOOP UNTIL B$ = CHR$(13)

CLS 'clears screen

Stp = 0

BDNAME$ = "GEN1" 'name of the device on the conf.table

CALL IBFIND(BDNAME$, GEN%) 'open device

CALL ErrChk(1, GEN%) 'check error

IF Stp = 0 THEN

CALL IBCLR(GEN%) 'send interface clear

CALL ErrChk(2, IBSTA%) 'check error

END IF

IF Stp = 0 THEN

A$ = "*ese 255" 'initialize ESR register

CALL SendCmd(A$) 'send command

A$ = "*cls" 'clear status register

CALL SendCmd(A$) 'send command

A$ = "*IDN?" 'ask for identity

CALL SendStr(A$) 'send command string

WHILE Stp = 0

LINE INPUT "COMMAND : ", A$ 'reading keyboard input

IF A$ = "END" OR A$ = "end" THEN

CALL IBLOC(GEN%) 'set instrument to 'LOCAL'

CLS 'clear screen

Stp = 1

ELSE


END IF

PRINT

PRINT

WEND

END IF

END

6-43

54200

Users Manual

SUB ErrChk (Cs, Sts%) 'Error handler

SHARED Stp

SELECT CASE Cs

CASE 1

IF Sts% < 0 THEN

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT "IBFIND ERROR"

PRINT "Check the configuration of the bus interface with

IBCONF.EXE"

PRINT

Stp = 1 'terminate program

END IF

CASE 2

IF Sts% < 0 THEN

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT " BUS ERROR!"

PRINT

PRINT " Please check connections and start program again"

PRINT

Stp = 1 'terminate the program

END IF

CASE 3

IF Sts% < 0 THEN

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT "GPIB ERROR"

PRINT

END IF

IF Sts% > 16383 THEN

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT "TIME OUT ERROR"

PRINT

END IF

END SELECT

END SUB

6-44



6

SUB SendCmd (WR$)

'Send command string to instrument via GPIB without response

SHARED GEN%

CALL IBWRT(GEN%, WR$) 'output command string


END SUB

SUB SendStr (WR$)

'Send command string to instrument via GPIB with response

SHARED GEN%

qry = 0 'query flag

qer = 0 'error query flag


IF IBSTA% < 0 THEN


ELSE

Stat = 0

CALL IBRSP(GEN%, Stat%) 'get status byte from instrument


IF (Stat% AND 16) THEN 'checks whether MAV is set qry = 1

END IF

IF (Stat% AND 32) THEN 'checks whether ESB is set

BEEP

WR$ = "err?" 'error query

CALL IBWRT(GEN%, WR$) 'output command string qry = 1 qer = 1

END IF

END IF

IF INSTR(WR$, "?") > 0 OR qry = 1 THEN 'check if query command

MaxLen = 164 'max. length of response string

RD$ = SPACE$(MaxLen) 'clear response string

CALL IBRD(GEN%, RD$) 'get response string

IF IBSTA% < 0 THEN


ELSE

PRINT

PRINT "RESPONSE : " + RD$ 'response string

IF qer = 1 THEN

WR$ = "*cls" 'clear status register


END IF

END IF

END IF

END SUB

6-45

54200

Users Manual

Example for the RS-232 Interface

DECLARE FUNCTION TestCmd! (A$)

DECLARE SUB RecDat (St%)

DECLARE SUB SendCmd (Cmd%, Rsp%)

DECLARE SUB SendStr (WR$)

DECLARE SUB InitCom ()

DECLARE SUB ClrBuf ()

CLS

PRINT " "

PRINT " "

PRINT " ***** Demonstration Program for FLUKE 54200/100 *****"

PRINT " ***** with RS-232 Interface *****"

PRINT

' Enviroment : IBM AT or Compatible with Quick Basic 4.5

Stp = 0

A$ = ""

CALL InitCom 'open device

CALL ClrBuf 'clear input buffer

ErrSts% = 0

CALL SendCmd(4, 0) 'send interface clear

CALL SendCmd(2, 0) 'sets instrument to remote

A$ = "*ese 255" 'initialize ESR register

CALL SendStr(A$) 'send command

IF ErrSts% > 0 THEN 'if no answer

PRINT "Please check the connection and setting!"

ELSE

CLS 'clears screen

A$ = "*cls" 'clear status register

CALL SendStr(A$) 'send command

A$ = "*IDN?" 'ask for identity


WHILE Stp = 0

LINE INPUT "COMMAND : ", A$ 'reading keyboard input

Cmd% = TestCmd(A$) 'test command

SELECT CASE Cmd%

CASE 0

CALL SendCmd(1, 1) 'set instrument to 'LOCAL'

CLOSE #1

CLS 'clear screen

Stp = 1

CASE 4

CALL SendCmd(Cmd%, 1) 'send command

CALL ClrBuf 'clear input buffer

CASE 1 TO 8

CALL SendCmd(Cmd%, 1) 'send command

CASE IS > 8


END SELECT

PRINT

PRINT

WEND

END IF

END

6-46



6

DATA END,end,GTL,gtl,GTR,gtr,GTR,gtr,DCL,dcl,LLO,llo,LLO,llo,STB,stb,DTR,dtr

SUB ClrBuf

'clear input buffer of comm. port

DO WHILE LOC(1) > 0 'while buffer not empty

C$ = INPUT$(1, #1) 'read one character

LOOP

END SUB

SUB InitCom

'Inilize serial communication channel

PRINT "Please set the RS-232 parameters of the FLUKE 54200/100 to : "

PRINT " Baudrate : 9600"

PRINT " Data : 8"

PRINT " Stop bits : 1"

PRINT " Parity : none"

PRINT " Handshake : yes"

PRINT

PRINT "Which communucation port of the PC do You use ? "

PRINT " COM1 [1]"

PRINT " COM2 [2] please select : ";

C$ = ""

DO UNTIL (C$ = "1" OR C$ = "2")

C$ = INKEY$

LOOP

PRINT C$

ComStr$ = "COM" + C$ + ":9600,N,8,1,CS,DS,LF"

PRINT

OPEN ComStr$ FOR RANDOM AS #1

PRINT "Special commands : GTL : go to local"

PRINT " GTR : go to remote"

PRINT " DCL : device clear"

PRINT " LLO : local lock out"

PRINT " STB : get status byte"

PRINT " DTR : device trigger"

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT "To leave running program type 'END' or 'end'. Press a key to continue ";

PRINT

BEEP

C$ = ""

DO WHILE C$ = "" 'waiting for a key

C$ = INKEY$

LOOP

PRINT

PRINT

END SUB

6-47

54200

Users Manual

SUB RecDat (Rsp%)

SHARED stb%, ErrSts%

Tr = TIMER

RD$ = ""

C$ = ""

DO UNTIL (C$ = CHR$(10) OR (TIMER - Tr > 3))

IF LOC(1) > 0 THEN

C$ = INPUT$(1, #1)

IF C$ <> CHR$(10) THEN

RD$ = RD$ + C$

C$ = ""

END IF

END IF

LOOP

IF (TIMER - Tr > 3) THEN

ErrSts% = 1

PRINT "**** receive timeout ****"

PRINT

ELSE

ErrSts% = 0

IF Rsp% = 0 THEN

stb% = VAL(RD$)

ELSE

PRINT

PRINT "RESPONSE : " + RD$ 'response string

PRINT

END IF

END IF

END SUB

SUB SendCmd (Cmd%, Rsp%)

'Send command string to instrument via serial bus without response

WR$ = CHR$(27) + CHR$(Cmd% + 48)

PRINT #1, WR$ 'output command string

IF Cmd% = 7 THEN 'if statusbyte requested

CALL RecDat(Rsp%) 'get status byte

END IF

END SUB

SUB SendStr (WR$)

'Send command string to instrument via serial bus with response

SHARED stb%

qry = 0 'query flag

WR$ = WR$ + CHR$(10) 'append LF


IF INSTR(WR$, "?") > 0 THEN 'check if query command

CALL RecDat(1) 'get response string

END IF

stb% = 0

CALL SendCmd(7, 0) 'ask for status byte

IF (stb% AND 16) THEN 'checks whether MAV is set

qry = 1

END IF

IF (stb% AND 32) THEN 'checks whether ESB is set

BEEP

WR$ = "err?" + CHR$(10) 'error query


qry = 1

END IF

IF qry = 1 THEN

CALL RecDat(1) 'get error string

6-48

WR$ = "*cls" + CHR$(10) 'clear status register


END IF

END SUB

FUNCTION TestCmd (A$)

RESTORE

Cmd% = 100

i% = 0

DO UNTIL Cmd% < 100 OR i% > 17

READ b$

IF A$ = b$ THEN

Cmd% = i% \ 2

END IF

i% = i% + 1

LOOP

TestCmd = Cmd%

END FUNCTION



6

6-49

54200

Users Manual

Error Messages

After receiving the query ERR?

the instrument generates a response message with an error number and an error description in clear text, which can be read in by the controller.

Error Message See Page

Illegal Character in Header No... ....................................................... 6-16 to 6-43

Unknown Header No... ...................................................................... 6-16 to 6-43

Unexpected Separator in Header No... ............................................... 6-13

Illegal Character in Data for Header... ............................................... 6-21 to 6-43

Unknown Data for Header.... ............................................................. 6-16 to 6-42

Unexpected Separator in Data for Header... . ...................................... 6-13

Unknown Suffix in Data for Header.... .............................................. 6-16 to 6-32

Numeric Overflow in Data for Header... ............................................ 6-21

Empty Mantissa in Data for Header... ................................................ 6-21

Empty Exponent in Data for Header... ............................................... 6-21

Value out of Range in Data for Header... ........................................... 6-16 to 6-40

Illegal Value in Data for Header... ..................................................... 6-21 to 6-40

Header Separator expected after Header... ......................................... 6-13

Data Separator expected after Header.... ............................................ 6-13

End of String expected in Data for Header ... .................................... 6-13

Message Separator expected after Header... ....................................... 6-13

Too many queries, Query ... .............................................................. 6-21

Too many Pattern Commands, Header No. ... .................................... 6-27

Too many *SAV Commands, Header No. ... ..................................... 6-21

Option not available, Query ... .............................................................. 6-41 to 6-43

*OPT? query must be last in Message, Header No. ... ....................... 6-16

In addition to this error messages the instruments generates messages in clear text if commands were sent with values exceeding the allowed ranges or for not allowed settings, for example, ‘Sound Mode not available for Mono Systems’ if you send the command for sound mode stereo when sound system FM Mono is selected, see

Chapter 5, Operating Hints, ‘Out of Range and Error Messages.’

6-50


Conversion Table for the PM 5415/18 Command Set to 54200 Commands

6

Conversion Table for the PM 5415/18 Command Set to 54200

Commands

Table 6-4. Conversion Table

Common Commands and Queries according to IEEE-488.2

Function

Clear Status

Standard Event Status Enable

Operation Complete

Recall

Reset

Save

Service Request Enable

Wait to Continue

Command for PM 5415/18

None

None

None

REC 1...9

None

STO 1...9

MSR

None

*CLS

*ESE

Command for 54200

*OPC

*RCL 1...99

*RST

*SAV 1...99

*SRE

*WAI

Standard Event Status Enable Query None

Standard Event Status Register Query None

Identification Query

Operation Complete Query

Option Query

ID?

None

None

Service Request Enable Query

Read Status Byte Query

Self-test Query

Learn Device Setup Query

None

None

TSI

IS?

Vision Carrier Setting

Function

Vision carrier frequency

Vision carrier level

*ESE?

*ESR?

*IDN?

*OPC?

*OPT?

*SRE?

*STB?

*TST?

*LRN?


FRQ <NRf>

[Hz/Khz/Mhz]

None


FREQ <NRf>

[HZ/KHZ/MHZ/GHZ/K/M/G]

LEVEl <NRf>

[DBUV,Mv,Uv,V]

6-51

54200

Users Manual

TV Standard Selection

Function

Pre-defined country list

TV standard PAL

TV standard NTSC

TV standard SECAM

Group delay precorrection

Residual carrier

Frame identification SECAM

Video Settings

Test Patterns:

- Color Bar

Function


None

STD PAL [B/G/H/D/I/M/N]

STD NTSC [M/P]

STD SEC [B/G/H/D/K/L]

None

None

None


COUNtry <NR1>

NR1 = Telephone country code

TVSTandard PALB

TVSTandard PALD

TVSTandard PALG

TVSTandard PALI

TVSTandard PALK

TVSTandard PALM

TVSTandard PALN

TVSTandard NTSCM

TVSTandard NTSC4B

TVSTandard NTSC4D

TVSTandard NTSC4G

TVSTandard NTSC4I

TVSTandard NTSC4K

TVSTandard SECAMB

TVSTandard SECAMG

TVSTandard SECAMD

TVSTandard SECAMK

TVSTandard SECAMK1

TVSTandard SECAML

GRPDelay ON/OFf

RESCarrier Low/High

FRAMeid ON/OFf

- Checkerboard

- Circle

- Center Cross

- Demodulation


PAT CB

PAT CH

PAT CI

PAT CR

PAT DE


PAT COL_100_25

PAT COL_75_25

PAT COL_75_0

PAT COL_SMpte

PAT COL_Horz

PAT COL_SP_100

PAT COL_SP_75

PAT CHEcker

PAT CI

PAT CENTER_2

PAT CENTER_3

PAT DEM_PAT1

PAT DEM_PAT2

6-52



6

Video Settings

Function

Test Patterns:

- Digital Scan

- Dots

- Greyscale

- Crosshatch

- Multiburst

- Black pattern (black screen)

- Purity blue cyan green magenta black red white yellow

- Special pattern 1

- Special pattern 2

- Special pattern 3

- Video cassette recorder test

- White screen

PAT MB

PAT OF

PAT PB

PAT PC

PAT PG

PM

PAT PO

PAT PR

PAT PW

PAT PY

PAT S1

PAT S2

PAT S3

PAT VC


PAT DS

PAT DT

PAT GS

PAT HA

WH


PAT DIGI_ADC1

PAT DIGI_ADC2

PAT DIGI_Move

PAT DIGI_SCAN1_S

PAT DIGI_SCAN1_M

PAT DIGI_SCAN2_S

PAT DIGI_SCAN2_M

PAT DIGI_SCAN3_S

PAT DIGI_SCAN3_M

PAT DOTS_W

PAT DOTS_B

PAT Greyscale

PAT CH_WNN

PAT CH_WCN

PAT CH_WNT

PAT CH_WCT

PAT CH_BNN

PAT CH_BCN

PAT CH_BNT

PAT CH_BCT

PAT Multiburst

PAT Off

PAT PUR_BLUe

PAT PUR_Cyan

PAT PUR_Green

PAT PUR_Magenta

PAT PUR_BLAck

PAT PUR_Red

PAT PUR_White

PAT PUR_Yellow

None

None

None

PAT VCR_PAT1

PAT VCR_PAT2

PAT VCR_RES_Std

PAT VCR_RES_Hi

PAT VCR_Write

PAT WH_00

PAT WH_05

PAT WH_7_5

PAT WH_15/20 ... 95/100

6-53

54200

Users Manual

Test Patterns:

- Picture Line Up Generating

Equipment (PLUGE)

- Color temperature adjusting

- Pattern of Insertion-Reference

Signal Line 17 (IRS17)

Video polarity

SCART output

CVBS status

RGB sync

Function

Sound Settings

Function

Sound and vision carrier

Sound system


None

None

Insertion-Refernce Signal in line 17/330 None

Aspect Ratio ASP WI

ASP NO

Chroma amplitude

Video amplitude

Video source

None

CHR OFF/ON

None

VID INT

VID EXT

None

None

None

None


PLUGE

PAT CTA_Small

PAT CTA_Medium

PAT CTA_Large

CTAB 0/50/100 (%)

CTAB 7.5/53.5/100 (IRE)

CTAC 0/5/15/20...95/100 (%)

CTAC 7.5/15/20...95/100 (IRE)

PAT Irs 17

REFLIne ON/OFf

ASPR R16_9

ASPR R4_3

CHRA 0/1/2...150

VIDA 0/1/2...150

VIDSO Int

VIDSO Extern

VIDSO SCart

VIDSO BNc

VIDSO BMixed

VIDSO SMixed

VIDP Positive/Negative

SCARTO Rgb/Y_C/CVBs/CV_Rgb

CVBS_stat Off/Auto

RGBSYnc Red/Green/Blue/Off


OSC ON/OFF

None

None


SNDSY AML

SNDSY FMMono

SNDSY FMGermany

SNDSY FMA1

SNDSY FMA2

SNDSY FMKorea

SNDSY Btsc

SNDSY NICAMB

SNDSY NICAMDK

SNDSY NICAMDC

SNDSY NICAMG

SNDSY NICAMI

SNDSY NICAML

6-54

Function

Sound carrier amplitude

Preemphasis

Sound source internal

Sound source external

Mono sound

Dual sound

Stereo sound

NICAM sound

NICAM test signal 1

NICAM test signal 2

NICAM test signal 3

NICAM amplitude


BTSC mono

BTSC stereo

BTSC test signal 1

BTSC test signal 2

BTSC test signal 3

Second Audio Program



6


SCA ON/OFF

None

SIN ON/OFF

SEX ON/OFF

MON

DUA

STE

NIM

NID

NIS

NT1

NT2

NT3

NAP LOW/HIGH

NRF ON/OFF

MTM

MTS

MT1

MT2

MT3

SAP ON

SAP OFF

SAP MOD

SAP UNMOD


SC1L OFf/-5/-6/-7...-14/-15

SC2L OFf/-20/-25/-27

PREEM ON/OFf

SNDSO Intern

SNDSO Extern

SNDSO Scart

SNDSO Cinch

SNDSO Mts

SNDM Mono

SNDM Dual

SNDM Stereo

NICSource Off/Int

SNDSY NICAMB/DK/DC/G/I/L and SNDM Mono

SNDSY NICAMB/DK/DC/G/I/L and SNDM Dual

SNDSY NICAMB/DK/DC/G/I/L and SNDM Stereo

SNDM TEST1 (if NICAM on)



NICA Low/High

RSSF ON/OFf

SNDSY Btsc and SNDM Mono

SNDSY Btsc and SNDM

Stereo

SNDM TEST1 (if BTSC on)



SAP Off

SAP Modulated

SAP Unmodulated

6-55

54200

Users Manual

Function

Sound modulation for left channel

Sound modulation for right channel

Analog sound modulation for NICAM


SL1 OFF

SL1 ON

SL3 ON

SR1 OFF

SR1 ON

None

Frequency is set with RSSF depending on sound mode.


S1MOD Off

S1MOD 0.3Khz

S1MOD 0.5Khz

S1MOD 1Khz

S1MOD 1.5Khz

S1MOD 3Khz

S2MOD Off

S2MOD 0.3Khz

S2MOD 0.5Khz

S2MOD 1Khz

S2MOD 1.5Khz

S2MOD 3Khz

S2MOD 12Khz

S3MOD Off

S3MOD 0.3Khz

S3MOD 0.5Khz

S3MOD 1Khz

S3MOD 3Khz

Teletext

Digital Services

Function

Teletext lines

Closed Caption

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)

WSS data programming


TTX FLOF

TTX TOP

TTX ANT

TTX OFF

None

CLC 0

CLC 1 ... 9

None

None


TTXS FLOF1

TTXS FLOF2

TTXS TOP1

TTXS TOP2

TTXS Antiope

TTXS Off

TTXS CC

TTXS AUto

TTXL 4/8

TTXS Off

TTX CC;CCN 1 ... 8 / SEQUENCE

WSSM OFf/Auto/Manual

WSSD #B and 14 bits

6-56



6

Function

Video Programming System (VPS)

VPD data programming

Programm Delivery Control (PDC)

PDC data programming

Device Settings Query

Function

Complete settings

RF settings

TV system

Video settings

Sound settings

Digital services


VPS 0 ... 9


VPSN 0 ... 9

VPP N,TG.MO,ST:MI,LLL,

PPP,TTT,R;

VPSD

N,"DD.MM,HH:MM,CTR,

NTW,PTY,R","string with max.

20 characters"

VPP B,hhhh,hhhh,hhhh,hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh, hhhh;

None

PDC 0 ... 9 PDCN 0 ... 9 / Multi

PDP N,TG.MO,ST:MI,LLL,

PPP,TTT,R;FF;

PDCD

N,"DD.MM,HH:MM,CTR,

NTW,PTY,R,FL","string with max. 20 characters"

Miscellaneous Commands

Function

Display mode

Time

Local time offset

Error query


None

TIM YYYY.MM.DD,HH:MM

LTO +/-HH

EM?;EN?


DISP ON/OFf

DISP Main/Video/SOund/

STandard/Digdata/SUpport

TIME "YYYY.MM.DD,HH:MM"

LTO +/-HH

ERR?


IS?

None

None

None

None

None


*LRN?

RF?

STAN?

VIDEO?

SOUND?

DIGD?

6-57

54200

Users Manual

6-58

Chapter 7

Specifications

Title Page

Safety and EMC Requirements......................................................................... 7-3

Performance Characteristics and Specifications ................................................ 7-3

Video and RF ................................................................................................... 7-4

Outputs ........................................................................................................ 7-4

CVBS Video............................................................................................ 7-4

CVBS SYNC, LINE SYNC and FIELD Synchronization......................... 7-4

EURO AV Control Voltages .................................................................... 7-4

Terrestrial RF Carrier ............................................................................... 7-5

Video Modulation .................................................................................... 7-6

Inputs ........................................................................................................ 7-6

Video IN .................................................................................................. 7-6

Video ........................................................................................................ 7-7


Luminance ............................................................................................... 7-7

Chrominance............................................................................................ 7-7

Patterns .................................................................................................... 7-8

Sound ............................................................................................................ 7-10

Outputs ........................................................................................................ 7-10

Sound Carrier........................................................................................... 7-10

Audio and Euro AV ................................................................................. 7-10

BTSC MPX and FM Stereo Pilot ............................................................. 7-10

NICAM Data and NICAM Clock ............................................................. 7-11

Inputs ........................................................................................................ 7-11

Audio, Euro AV and MTS Multiplex ....................................................... 7-11

Mono ........................................................................................................ 7-11

Sound Carrier........................................................................................... 7-11

Modulation .............................................................................................. 7-12

Stereo /Dual ................................................................................................. 7-12

Sound Carrier 1........................................................................................ 7-12

7-1

54200

Users Manual

Sound Carrier 2 ....................................................................................... 7-12

Modulation.............................................................................................. 7-13

Identification/Subcarrier .......................................................................... 7-13

NICAM Stereo ............................................................................................ 7-13

Sound Carrier 1 ....................................................................................... 7-13

Sound Carrier 2 ....................................................................................... 7-14

Modulation.............................................................................................. 7-14

BTSC Stereo ............................................................................................... 7-14

Sound Carrier .......................................................................................... 7-14

Modulation.............................................................................................. 7-15

Identification ........................................................................................... 7-15

Digital Services ............................................................................................... 7-16

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS).................................................................... 7-16

Teletext DIDON ANTIOPE (CCIR System A) ............................................ 7-16

Teletext UK (CCIR System B) .................................................................... 7-17

PDC ....................................................................................................... 7-17

VPS ....................................................................................................... 7-17

Closed Caption............................................................................................ 7-18

RGB, YC (S-VHS/Hi-8), YCrCb Outputs........................................................ 7-19

RGB Outputs............................................................................................... 7-19

YC Outputs ................................................................................................. 7-19

YCrCb Outputs ........................................................................................... 7-19

Feedthrough Connection.............................................................................. 7-20

IEEE-488 and RS-232 Interface ....................................................................... 7-20

IEEE-488 Interface ...................................................................................... 7-20

RS-232 Interface.......................................................................................... 7-20

General Specifications ..................................................................................... 7-21

Environmental Conditions ........................................................................... 7-21

Power Requirements.................................................................................... 7-22

Dimensions and Weight............................................................................... 7-22

Accessories...................................................................................................... 7-23

Standard ...................................................................................................... 7-23

Optional ...................................................................................................... 7-24

7-2


Safety and EMC Requirements

7

Safety and EMC Requirements

The Fluke 54200 TV Signal Generator complies with the following standards:

EN 61010-1 and IEC 1010-1/ CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1 (safety requirements)

The 54200 is an instrument for measurement and test including accessories

• Intended for professional, industrial process, and educational use.

• Overvoltage Category II Pollution Degree 2.

• A Class I equipment.

EN 55011 and CISPR 11 (radio interference suppression)

The 54200 is an ISM instrument (industrial, scientific, and medical RF-equipment)

• Group 1,

Intentionally generates and/or uses conductively coupled radio frequency energy which is necessary for the internal functioning of the equipment itself.

• Class B,

Suitable for use in domestic establishments and in establishments directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

EN 50082-1 (radio frequency immunity)

The 54200 is an instrument for use in any location with the following characteristics:

• Powered directly from the local line power.

• Residential, commercial or light-industrial, both indoor and outdoor.

Performance Characteristics and Specifications

Properties expressed in numerical values with stated tolerance are guaranteed by the manufacturer.

Specified non-tolerance numerical values indicate those that could be nominally expected from the mean of a range of identical instruments.

This specification is valid after the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes (reference temperature 23

±1 °C). If not stated otherwise, relative or absolute tolerances relate to the set value.

7-3

54200

Users Manual

Video and RF

Outputs

CVBS Video

Voltage (Vpp into 75

Ω)

Setting range

Tolerance of setting

Step size

Resolution

Impedance

Polarity

Coupling

Luminance/chrominance timing difference

Connector

Max. external voltage

1 V (nominal setting)

0 to 1.5 V

10 mV or 5%, whichever is greater,

5 mV or 2%, whichever is greater, at reference temperature

1%,

10 mV for internal video

10 mV

75

Ω

Positive/ negative, selectable

DC

≤ 40 ns

VIDEO OUT, BNC front,

EURO AV OUT, EURO AV connector rear

±9 V

CVBS SYNC, LINE SYNC and FIELD Synchronization


Ω)

2 V

Tolerance

Impedance

Polarity

0.3 V

75

Ω

Negative

Coupling

Connector


DC

SYNC OUT: COMP, LINE; FIELD,

BNC rear

±4 V

EURO AV Control Voltages

Aspect Ratio

OFF

Ratio 4:3

Ratio 16:9

Pin 8,

Automatically or Off

0 V to +2 V

+9.5 V to +12 V

+4.5 V to +7 V

7-4

Fast Blanking

RGB ON

RGB OFF

Impedance


Pin 16,

Automatically or Off

+1 V to +3 V

0 V to +0.4 V

75

Ω

±9 V

Terrestrial RF Carrier

Frequency

Tolerance

32 to 900 MHz

10 kHz

Resolution 50 kHz

Spectral purity Harmonics, intermodulation products and spurious

-60 dBc inside actual TV channel

-30 dBc outside actual TV channel

Voltage (Vrms into 75

Ω)

100 mV for high range

10 mV for low range

Attenuation

Readout

Resolution

Tolerance

Impedance

Modulation

Connector


0 to 80 dB for high range

0 to 60 dB for low range mV, dB

µV

0.01 mV for level

≤ 10 mV

0.1 mV for level

> 10 mV

1 dB for dB

µV indication

3 dB

75

Ω

Internal, external

RF OUT, BNC front

±7 V


Video and RF

7

7-5

54200

Users Manual

Video Modulation

Double sideband AM, internal/external switchable

TV Systems All systems except L SECAM L

Negative Positive Polarity

RF sync level:

Residual carrier low

Residual carrier high

100%

100%

10%

20% *

2

RF 100% white level:

Residual carrier low

Residual carrier high

10% *

20%

1

100%

100%

*

1

not available for *

2

only available with

NICAM sound NICAM sound systems

Group delay pre-correction

Reference

Types

TV systems

Characteristics

Related to CCIR Rep. 624-4, 1990

2 different types (or off)

Automatically switched with the respective TV system

PAL M, NTSC M B, G, N

Closely matches

CCIR B, G (type A)

Closely matches

CCIR M/PAL,

M/NTSC

Inputs

Video IN

Voltage (Vpp)

Setting range


Step size

Superimposed dc component

Max. voltage (Vpp + dc)

Impedance

Polarity

Coupling

Connector

1 V (nominal)

100% fixed for video modulation

0 to 150% for video outputs

10 mV or 5%, whichever is greater,

5 mV or 2%, whichever is greater, at reference temperature

1%

-2 V to +2 V

-5 V to +5 V

75

Ω

Positive

DC

VIDEO IN, BNC front,

EURO AV IN, EURO AV connector rear

7-6


Video and RF

7

Video

Synchronization

Reference

System

Line frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

Luminance

Reference

Blanking level

Black level

White level

Tolerance

Chrominance

Reference

System

Carrier frequency

Tolerance

Aging

CCIR Rep. 624-4, 1990

ANSI/SMPTE 170M-1994

625 lines (50 Hz)

525 lines (59.94 Hz)

15.625 kHz for 625 line systems


3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C

1 ppm at reference temperature

≤ 2 ppm per year

-43% for 625 line systems

-40 IRE for 525 line systems

3% for 625 line systems

3 IRE for 525 line systems

CCIR Rep. 624-4, 1990


0% (0 IRE)

0% for 625 line systems

+7.5 IRE for 525 line systems

100% (100 IRE)

2% for 625 line systems at reference temperature

2 IRE for 525 line systems at reference temperature

CCIR Rep. 624-4, 1990


PAL B, D, G, I, K, M, N

NTSC M

NTSC with 4.433619 MHz subcarrier

SECAM B, D, G, K, K1, L

4.433619 MHz for PAL B, D, G, I, K and NTSC 4.43

3.575611 MHz for PAL M

3.582056 MHz for PAL N

3.579545 MHz for NTSC M

4.406250 MHz and 4.250000 MHz for SECAM

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

7-7

54200

Users Manual

Phase tolerance (PAL/NTSC) 2

°,

1

° at reference temperature

Freq. deviation (SECAM)

∆f

OB

(75% blue)

Tolerance

∆f

OR

(75% red)

Tolerance

+230 kHz

4 kHz

-280 kHz

5 kHz

Level

Tolerance

Setting range


Resolution

100% (nominal setting)

5% (PAL/NTSC)

10% (SECAM)

2% (PAL/NTSC) at reference temperature for nominal setting

0% to 150%

1 step or 5%, whichever is greater

1%

Patterns

Reference

Aspect ratio

Circle

Center Cross

White

Purity

Dots

Crosshatch

ITU Rec. 471-1/1994 and

SMPTE EG27-1994 for Color Bar

SMPTE EG1-1990 for SMPTE Color Bar

CCIR Rec. 473-5,1990 and

CCIR Rec. R26-1981 for IRS 17

CCIR Rec. 473-5,1990 for Multiburst

CCIR Rep. 1221 for PLUGE

4:3, 16:9

Centered circle with 4 additional corner circles in 16:9 mode

With border castellations

(overscan indication selectable between 2% or 3%)

0, 5, 15 to 100% (5% steps) for 625 line systems

7.5, 15 to 100 IRE (5 IRE steps) for 525 line systems

Red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, white, black

(100/0/75/0 for 625 line systems and

100/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 line systems)

17x13 dots in 4:3 mode,

23x13 dots in 16:9 mode

With center indication

18x14 lines in 4:3 mode,

24x14 lines in 16:9 mode

With center indication, selectable ‘top-left’ indication and chroma

7-8

Checkerboard

PLUGE

Greyscale

VCR

Multiburst

Digital Scan

Color Bar

DEM

Color Temperature

Diverse

Pattern combination


Video and RF

7

12x9 squares in 4:3 mode,

16x9 squares in 16:9 mode

-1.6, 0, +1.6, 100% for 625 line systems

4.8, 7.5, 10.7, 100 IRE for 525 line systems

10 steps linear staircase

VCR Test (2 types)

Resolution Test (2 types)

Writing Current

0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 4.8, 5.8 MHz for 625 line systems

0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 3.58, 4.2 MHz for 525 line systems

With time intervals

ADC Check (2 types)

Moving Block

Progressive Scan Check (3 types)

75/0/75/0,

100/0/75/0,

75/0/100/25,

100/0/100/25 for 625 line systems

75/7.5/75/7.5,

100/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 line systems

SMPTE Color Bar


(75/0/75/0 for 625 line systems and

75/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 line systems)

Demodulator Test (2 types)

3 different sizes with adjustable levels for center and border

EHT Test

(Reference rectangle with switching white/black window)

Full field ‘IRS 17’,

(in 625 line systems, reference line 17 can be selected separately)

Circle with every other pattern

(except Progressive Scan 3) or combination

Center Cross / Crosshatch / Dots / Purity

Greyscale / White / Multiburst / Color Bar

7-9

54200

Users Manual

Sound

Outputs

Sound Carrier


Ω)

Setting range

Resolution

Setting range

Tolerance

Impedance

Connector

142 mV for mono carrier and system B, G

200 mV for mono carrier and system D, I, K, K1, L, M, N

63.2 mV for stereo and NICAM B, G, D, I, K carrier

(sound carrier 2)

28.3 mV for NICAM L carrier (sound carrier 2) for mono carrier

(depends on sound carrier 1 level setting):

112.5 mV to 356 mV at -15 dBc to -5 dBc sound carrier level

1 dB for stereo and NICAM carrier:

63.2 mV at -20 dBc sound carrier level



2 dB

50

Ω

SOUND IF OUT, BNC rear

Audio and Euro AV

Voltage

(Vrms in open circuit)

Tolerance

Impedance

Connector

500 mV,

278 mV at 12 kHz intern in NICAM mode

5%

600

Ω

AUDIO OUT, Cinch rear,


BTSC MPX and FM Stereo Pilot

Impedance 600

Ω

Connector MTS/PILOT OUT, BNC rear

Voltage (Vrms open circuit) Nominal

BTSC mode BTSC baseband signal

Main channel

Pilot carrier

500 mV, at 13.5 kHz deviation

185 mV, equivalent to ±5 kHz deviation of sound carrier

SAP carrier

Tolerance

555 mV, equivalent to ±15 kHz deviation of sound carrier

5%

7-10

Stereo / Dual mode for sound systems

Pilot signal

Tolerance

Stereo / Dual mode for sound system

Pilot signal

Tolerance

Germany, A2

90 mV

5%

NICAM Data and NICAM Clock

Frequency

Tolerance

Aging


Ω)

Tolerance

Impedance

Connector

728 kHz

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤2 ppm per year

1 V

10%

50

Ω

NICAM OUT DATA, BNC rear

NICAM OUT CLOCK, BNC rear

Inputs

Mk

180 mV

5%

Audio, Euro AV and MTS Multiplex

Voltage (Vrms)

Modulation bandwidth

Impedance

Connector


500 mV (nominal)

40 Hz to 15 kHz

0.1 M

Ω

AUDIO IN, Cinch rear,

EURO AV IN, EURO AV connector rear,

MTS IN, BNC rear

±40 V

Mono

Sound Carrier

Frequency

Tolerance

4.5 MHz for system M, N

5.5 MHz for system B, G

6.0 MHz for system I

6.5 MHz for system D, K, K1, L

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C



Sound

7

7-11

54200

Users Manual

Aging

Level

Tolerance

Setting range

Tolerance

Resolution

Modulation

Frequency

Type

Deviation

Tolerance

Pre-emphasis (FM)

Modulation depth

Tolerance (absolute)

Stereo /Dual

Sound Carrier 1

Data

Modulation matrix:

Stereo

Dual

Sound Carrier 2

Frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

≤ 2 ppm per year

-13 dBc for system B, G

-10 dBc for system D, I, K, K1, L, M, N

2 dB at reference temperature

-5 dBc to -15 dBc


1 dB

0.5, 1.0, 3.0 kHz: for system B, D, G, I, K, K1, L (S1 Modulation) or off

0.3, 1.0, 3.0 kHz: for system M and N (S1 Modulation) or off

0.5, 1.0, 3.0 kHz: (S3 Modulation) or as NICAM for system NICAM B/G, NICAM DK, DC, I, L or off

FM for system B, D, G, I, K, K1, M, N

AM for system L

27 kHz for system B, D, G, I, K, K1 (pre-emphasis off),

13.5 kHz for system M, N (pre-emphasis off)

5%

50

µs for system B, D, G, I, K, K1 or off

75

µs for system M, N or off

54% for system L

5%

As Mono

(L+R)/2

CH1 (S1 Modulation)

5.7421875 MHz for system B, G

6.2578125 MHz for system D, K (A2)

4.724 MHz for system Mk

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

-20 dBc


7-12

Setting range

Tolerance

Modulation

Frequency

Type

Deviation

Tolerance

Pre-emphasis

Modulation matrix:

Stereo

Dual

Identification/Subcarrier

Reference

Pilot carrier frequency

Identification frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Type

Modulation depth

Tolerance (absolute)

NICAM Stereo

Sound Carrier 1

Data

Modulation matrix:

Mono

Stereo

Dual

-20, -25, -27 dBc


0.5, 1.0, 3.0 kHz for system B, D, G, K or off

0.3, 1.0, 3.0 kHz for system Mk or off

FM

27 kHz for system B, D, G, K (pre-emphasis off)

13.5 kHz for system Mk (pre-emphasis off)

5%

50

µs for system B, D, G, K or off

75

µs for system Mk or off

L for systems B, D, G, K

L-R for system Mk

CH2 (S2 Modulation)

CCIR Rec. 707

3.5 x f

H f

H

/ 133 for stereo and system B, D, G, K f

H

/ 105 for stereo and system Mk f

H

/ 57 for dual

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

AM

50%

5%

As MONO SOUND CARRIER

As NICAM (S1 Modulation) or independent selectable (S3 Modulation)

(L+R)/2

CH1 (S1 Modulation)


Sound

7

7-13

54200

Users Manual

Sound Carrier 2

Frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

Setting range

Tolerance

Modulation

Reference

Frequency

Type

Mode

Bit-rate

Tolerance

Aging

Level

RSSF

BTSC Stereo

Sound Carrier

Frequency

Tolerance

Aging

5.85 MHz for system B, D, G, K, L

6.875 MHz for system D, K

6.552 MHz for system I

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

-20 dBc for system B, D, G, I, K

-27 dBc for system L


-20, -25, -27 dBc


NICAM-728

CCITT Rec J17

0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 3.0 kHz for channel 1 (S1 Modulation) or off

1.0, 1.5, 3.0, 12 kHz for channel 2 (S2) or off

Test 1: Demodulator pattern

Test 2: Decoder pattern

Test 3: Unmodulated carrier

QPSK


728 kbits/s

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

High, low

On, off

4.5 MHz for system M

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

7-14


Sound

7

Level

Tolerance

Setting range

Tolerance

Resolution

Modulation

Frequency

-10 dBc


-5 to -15 dBc


1 dB

Type

Base band

Stereo sub channel

SAP sub channel

Mode

Deviation

Tolerance

Pre-emphasis

0.3, 1.0, 3.0 kHz for channel 1 (S1 Modulation) or off

1.0, 3.0 kHz for channel 2 (S2 Modulation) or off

3.1 kHz and 8.0 kHz in Test modes

5.0 kHz for SAP (0.3 and 1.0 kHz in Test modes) or unmodulated or off

FM with BTSC base band

Main channel (L+R)

Pilot subcarrier

Stereo sub channel (L-R, BTSC compressed)

SAP sub channel (SAP signal, BTSC compressed)

Subcarrrier AM modulated with suppressed carrier by

BTSC compressed L-R signal

Subcarrier FM modulated by SAP signal

Mono, Stereo, SAP

13.5 kHz (with de-emphasis on)

15 kHz by SAP

5 kHz by pilot

5%

75 µs

Identification

Pilot subcarrier frequency f

H

Stereo subcarrier frequency 2 x f

H

SAP subcarrier frequency 5 x f

H

Tolerance subcarrier 3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


Aging

≤ 2 ppm per year

7-15

54200

Users Manual

Digital Services

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)

Reference

TV systems

Data line

Signalling method

Clock frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

ETSI, ETS 300 294, November 1994

PALplus System Description, Revision 3.0, January 1994

Rec. ITU-R BT.1119

625 line systems

23 (field 1)

Bi-phase coding, NRZ-L

5 MHz

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

0.5 V for ‘1’ at 0.7 V maximum video level

Black level for ‘0’

5% for ‘1’

3% of sync amplitude for ’0’

Teletext DIDON ANTIOPE (CCIR System A

)

Reference

TV systems

Data line

Signalling method

Clock frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

CCIR Rec. 653-1

CCIR Doc. 11/345-E

625 line systems

20, 21, 333, 334

Binary NRZ

6.203125 MHz

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

7/3 of sync amplitude for ‘1’


0 to -10% for ‘1’


7-16


Digital Services

7

Teletext UK (CCIR System B)

Reference

System

Data line

Signalling method

Clock frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

CCIR Rec. 653-1

CCIR Doc. 11/282-E

625 line systems

13, 14, 20, 21, 326, 327, 333, 334 for 8 line mode (PAL)

20, 21, 333, 334 for 4 line mode (PAL and SECAM)

Binary NRZ

6.9375 MHz

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

66% of the difference between black level and peak white level for ’1’


6% for ‘1’

2% of the difference between black level and peak white level for ‘0’

PDC

Reference

System

Programming

Labelling

EBU SPB 459 Revision 2

Specification of the Domestic Video Programme Delivery

Control System February 1992

TELETEXT UK (CCIR system B)

All parameters

Single, multi

VPS

Reference

TV systems

Data line

Signalling method

Technische Richtlinie ARD/ZDF Nr. 8 R 2

Video Program System

EBU SPB 459 Revision 2

Specification of the Domestic Video Programme Delivery

Control System February 1992

625 line systems

16

Bi-phase modulation

7-17

54200

Users Manual

Clock frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

Programming

Closed Caption

Reference

System

Data line

Signalling method

Clock frequency

Tolerance

Aging

Level

Tolerance

Operation mode

5.0 MHz

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

0.5 V for ‘1’ at 0.7 V maximum video level


5% for ‘1’


All parameters

FCC 47 CFR Part 15

Report No E-7709-C

Draft EIA-608

525 line systems

625 line systems

21 (field 1 and field 2)

Binary NRZ


500 kHz for 625 line systems

3 ppm for +5 to +45

°C


≤ 2 ppm per year

50 IRE (50%) for ‘1’

0 IRE (0%) for ‘0’

5 IRE (5%) for ‘1’

1 IRE (1%) for ‘0’

CC1 to CC4

T1 to T4

7-18


RGB, YC (S-VHS/Hi-8), YCrCb Outputs

7

RGB, YC (S-VHS/Hi-8), YCrCb Outputs

RGB Outputs


Ω)

Tolerance

Impedance

Polarity

Coupling

Blanking level

Offset

Synchronization

Connector


700 mV

5%

2% at reference temperature

75

Ω

Positive

DC

0 V

± 200 mV

Selectable in R, G, B or Off (only for BNC outputs)

RGB OUT, BNC rear,


±9 V

YC Outputs

Luminance signal amplitude 1 V (including sync)

(Vpp into 75

Ω)

Tolerance 5%


Coupling

Blanking level

DC

Offset

Chrominance signal level

0 V

± 200 mV

100%, same as chrominance part of CVBS signal

Tolerance

Coupling

Impedance

Connector


5%


AC

75

Ω

Y/C OUT, 4-pin S connector,


±9 V

YCrCb Outputs

Voltage Y (Vpp into 75

Ω) 1 V (including Sync)

0.7 V Voltage CrCb

(Vpp into 75

Ω)

Tolerance 5%


7-19

54200

Users Manual

Impedance

Coupling

Blanking level

Offset

Connector


75

Ω

DC

0 V

± 200 mV

Y/ C

R

/ C

B

OUT, BNC rear

±9 V

Feedthrough Connection

Connection between rear and front, BNC connectors, not recommended for vision carrier.

TO REAR

TO FRONT

Connector connected with TO FRONT connected with TO REAR

TO REAR, BNC front

TO FRONT, BNC rear

IEEE-488 and RS-232 Interface

IEEE-488 Interface

Allows selection and control of all functions

Instrument command set see Chapter 6, Remote Control

Reference

Compatibility

ANSI/IEEE Std. 488-1987

IEEE-488.2-1987

Interface functions

Connector

AH1, SH1, L4, T6, RL1, SR1, DC1, E2

Amphenol rear (RFI/EMI shielded)

RS-232 Interface

Allows selection and control of all functions

Instrument command set see Chapter 6, Remote Control

Baud rate

Data bits

Stop bits

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200

7 or 8

1,

2 for 110 Baud

Parity check

Handshake

Connector

Odd, even or none (none for 8 data bits only)

Software, hardware

9 pin D-type rear (male)

7-20


General Specifications

7

General Specifications

Environmental Conditions

Environment

Warming-up time

Temperature +22 to +24 °C for reference temperature

0 to +50

°C for operating

-20 to +71

°C for non-operating

Humidity Relative humidity (MIL-T-28800D)

Operating (no condensation)

+0

°C to 10 °C not

+11

°C to 30 °C 95%

+31

+41

±5%

°C to 40 °C 75%

±5%

Non-operating 5% to 95%

Altitude

Operating

Non-operating

Vibration

Operating

Non-operating

(MIL-T-28800D)

3,050 m (10,000 ft)

4,570 m (15,000 ft)

(MIL-T-28800D)

0.33 mm p-p

at 5 Hz to 55 Hz (2 g at 55 Hz)

0.70 mm p-p

at 10 Hz to 55 Hz,

5 g at 55 Hz to 150 Hz

(MIL-T-28800D) Shock

Operating,

Functional,

Transport

18 shocks/20 g

1 corner / 6 surfaces, drop height 0.67 m

Safety

EMC emission

EMC immunity

RF EM field

Electrostatic discharge

Fast transient

Additional:

RF EM field

Electrostatic discharge

Laboratory equipment Class 5 (MIL-T-28800D)

30 min

EN 61010-1 +/A2, Class I

IEC 1010-1 +A1 +A2, Class I

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1010.1, Class I

EN 55011, Group 1, Class B

VDE 0875, Part 11, Group 1, Class B

CISPR 11, Group 1, Class B

FCC Part 15J Class A

EN 50082-1 (Generic)

IEC 801-3/84 (27-500 MHz, 3V/m)

IEC 801-2/84 (

±8 kV air discharge)

IEC 801-4/88 (0.5 kV signal/ control lines, 1 kV mains)

Magnetic Field

Recalibration interval

Reliability

ENV 50140 / 93 (80-1000 MHz, 3V/m)

IEC 1000-4-2 / 95 (

±8 kV air discharge),

(

±4 kV contact discharge)

IEC 1000-4-8 /93 (50 Hz, 3 A/m)

12 months

MTBF = 20,000 hours

7-21

54200

Users Manual

Power Requirements

Rated line voltage range

Line voltage fluctuation

100 to 240 V

±10%

Rated line frequency range 50 to 60 Hz

Line frequency fluctuation

±5%

Power consumption 60 W

Dimensions and Weight

Width

Height

Depth

Weight

323 mm (12.72 in)

147 mm (5.79 in)

132.5 mm (5.22 in) without feet (

≈ 3HE)

417 mm (16.42 in)

Net 9.8 kg (21.6 lb.)

Shipping 11.4 kg (25.1 lb.)

7-22

Accessories

Standard

Users Manual

Power cable

RF cable BNC - IEC 169-2 male connector

IEC 169-2 male - F-male adapter

Y/C cable only with RGB option

SCART - SCART cable

Cable SCART - 3 x Cinch cable


Accessories

7

Figure 7-1. SCART - SCART Cable

Figure 7-2. SCART - 3 x Cinch Cable

7-23

54200

Users Manual

Optional

19” rack mount adapter

BNC - BNC Cable, 75

Ω

IEEE-bus cable, 1 m

IEEE-bus cable, 2 m

RS-232 cable, 3 m

Users Manual, US-English

Bedienungs-Handbuch, German

Mode d’emploi, French

Service Manual 54200/54100

Service installable options:

PAL TV standard

NTSC TV standard

SECAM TV standard

Teletext + WSS

PDC + VPS incl. Teletext and WSS

Closed Caption

RGB + YC + YCrCb outputs

IEEE + RS-232 interface

Analog stereo sound

(German, Korean, and DK stereo)

NICAM stereo sound

BTSC stereo sound

Order no. 54091

Order no. PM 9075

Order no. PM2295/10

Order no. PM2295/20

Order no. PM9536/041

Order no. 4822 872 10182

Order no. 4822 872 10183

Order no. 4822 872 10184

Order no. 4822 872 15185

Order no. 54911

Order no. 54912

Order no. 54913

Order no. 54921

Order no. 54922

Order no. 54923

Order no. 54931

Order no. 54932

Order no. 54961

Order no. 54962

Order no. 54963

7-24

Chapter 8

Brief Functional Test

Title Page

Brief Functional Test........................................................................................ 8-3

Introduction.................................................................................................. 8-3

Recommended Test Equipment .................................................................... 8-3

Self-Test Routine ......................................................................................... 8-4

Function Verification........................................................................................ 8-5

TV Standard PAL......................................................................................... 8-5



Sound Part ............................................................................................... 8-8


Wide Screen Signalling Bits (WSS) ......................................................... 8-14

TV Standard NTSC ...................................................................................... 8-15



Sound Part ............................................................................................... 8-18

Closed Caption (Digital Service CC)........................................................ 8-21

TV Standard SECAM................................................................................... 8-23



Sound Part ............................................................................................... 8-26


8-1

54200

Users Manual

8-2


Brief Functional Test

8


Introduction

The information in the following paragraphs contains the functional test of the key parameters of the Fluke 54200 TV Signal Generator.

If you want to check the specifications of the generator in detail, you can use the

Performance Test in the Service Manual, order number 4822 872 15185. For the

Performance Test, special TV-Test Equipment, for example, a video analyzer (Tektronix

VM700A) is necessary.

This Brief Functional Test may be used as an acceptance test upon receipt of the instrument, as an indication that repair and/or adjustment is required, or as an functional test after repair or adjustment of the instrument. This test describes a check of an instrument with all options built-in. If an option is not built-in in the instrument under test, please skip the corresponding steps.

When you have finished the Brief Functional Test or if you abort the test, you should perform RECALL 0 to set the instrument in a defined default status, see Chapter 6,

‘*RST Reset Command.’

Recommended Test Equipment

TV Receiver, Multi System with:

• Analog stereo sound

• NICAM-sound

• Teletext

• RGB & Y/C input, for example, Philips 25PT 8302

TV Receiver, NTSC-System with:

• BTSC-sound

• Closed Caption, for example, Magnavox P2783 C101 / Philips 27V505-00A

Oscilloscope with:

• TV/Line trigger for example, Fluke PM3382A/061

8-3

54200

Users Manual

Self-Test Routine

After power on the instrument performs a self-test routine of the PROM, processor

RAM, stored instrument settings, calibration data, and available digital modules. After approximately 2 seconds the generator automatically recalls its instrument state before power off.

If a fault is found during the self-test this fault is indicated as follows, for example:

For detailed information see the end of Chapter 5, 'Operating Hints, Out of Range and

Error Messages.'

8-4


Function Verification

8

Function Verification

TV Standard PAL

Video Part, using RF Connection

Procedure:

• Connect the

RF OUT of the TV Signal Generator to the antenna input of the TV. Use an appropriate connection cable, for example, the attached cable BNC to TV.

• Load the default settings of the generator with

RECALL 0.


The display of the generator shows:

Figure 8-1. Generator Settings, PAL Standard

• Set the TV to a vision carrier frequency of 471.25 MHz. If your TV does not support this frequency, set the generator to an appropriate frequency.

• Press the

COLOR BAR key longer than one second.

• Select with the é or

ê softkey (F1 or F2)

COL_100_0 .

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm the setting.

• Add the test patterns

GREYSCALE , MULTIBURST , CIRCLE with the keys in the

PATTERN field.

8-5

54200

Users Manual

Test Result Requirement:

The TV shows the following pattern and reproduces a mono sound with 1 kHz modulation:

Figure 8-2. Combined Test Pattern, PAL Standard

The complete pattern is only shown by professional TV monitors. Common TV receivers do not show the edges of the pattern.

For details about the test patterns, see Chapter 4, 'Description and Application of Test

Patterns.'

• Press the

CHROMA ON/OFF key.

The TV shows the Color Bar in the middle of the screen in grey.

• Select

Aspect Ratio 16:9 using the video submenu.

The TV shows an ellipse instead of the circle and four additional ellipses in the corners of the screen. Select Aspect Ratio 16:9 on your TV. Some modern TVs automatically change the Aspect Ratio controlled by the WSS bits. The TV now shows geometrical circles.

8-6



8

• Switch the TV and the generator to Aspect Ratio 4:3.

• Press the

DIGITAL SCAN key longer than one second.

• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) DIGI_SCAN3_M .


The TV shows the following pattern, moving from left to right. If you do not use a

100 Hz TV receiver, the three left lines flicker.


• Reduce the vision carrier amplitude to 0.01 mV.

The TV shows noise or a 'No Picture' indication.

Video Part, using Y/C Connection (S-VHS, Hi-8)

Procedure:

• Set the generator with

RECALL 0 to its default settings.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to return to the main menu.

• Remove the connection cable from the

RF OUT of the generator and the antenna input of the TV.

• Connect the generator using

Y/C OUT on the rear panel to the Y/C input of the TV.

Use the attached Y/C cable.

• Set the TV to Y/C (S-VHS, Hi-8) input.

• Select the combined test pattern as described on Page 8-5.


The TV reproduces the test pattern shown in Figure 8-2, without sound.

8-7

54200

Users Manual

Sound Part

Analog Mono

Procedure:

• Remove the Y/C cable.

• Connect the RF OUT of the TV Signal Generator to the antenna input of the TV.

• Set the TV to antenna input.


RECALL 0 .


• Depending on the sound system you want to check, select the appropriate sound settings using the Pre-defined Country List in the standard submenu:

Germany

Czech. Republic

for FM Germany (Mono and Analog Stereo for PAL B/G)

for FM A2 (Mono and Analog Stereo for PAL D/K)

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your setting and to return to the main menu.

• Select the sound submenu with the sound softkey (F3).

The display shows:

or

Figure 8-4. Sound Settings


The TV reproduces a sound with 1 kHz modulation in both channels.

• Press the

CH1 key longer than one second and select 3.0 kHz in the popup menu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm the setting and to return to the main menu.


8-8



8

Analog Stereo

Procedure:

• Same settings as above.

• Press the

STEREO key.

The display shows:

or

Figure 8-5. Analog Stereo Sound Settings


The TV shows a 'Stereo' indication (depends on used TV) and reproduces a sound with

3 kHz modulation in the left channel ( CH 1 ). The right channel ( CH 2 ) reproduces no sound.

• Press the



The TV reproduces a sound with 3 kHz modulation in the left channel and a sound with 1 kHz modulation in the right channel.

Dual Sound

Procedure:


• Press the

DUAL/SAP key.

The display shows the label Dual instead of Stereo .


The TV shows a 'Dual Sound' indication (depends on used TV).

• Set the TV to Dual I (

CH 1 ).


• Set the TV to Dual II (

CH 2 ).


8-9

54200

Users Manual

NICAM Sound

NICAM Mono

Procedure:


RECALL 0 .


• Depending on the sound system you want to check, select the appropriate sound settings using the Pre-defined Country List in the standard submenu:

Sweden

United Kingdom

for NICAM B/G for PAL B/G

for NICAM I for PAL I

China for NICAM DK for PAL D/K

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your setting and to returm to the main menu.


The display shows, for example, for NICAM B/G or NICAM I:

or

Figure 8-6. NICAM Sound Settings


The TV shows a 'Digital Sound' indication (depends on used TV) and reproduces a sound with 1 kHz modulation in both channels.

• Press the




8-10



8

NICAM Stereo

Procedure:


• Press the

STEREO key.




• Press the



The TV reproduces a sound with 3 kHz modulation in the left channel and a sound with 1.5 kHz modulation in the right channel.

NICAM Dual Sound

Procedure:


• Press the

DUAL/SAP key.





CH 1 ).



CH 2 ).

The TV reproduces a sound with 1.5 kHz modulation in both channels.

8-11

54200

Users Manual

NICAM, Conventional Analog FM Sound

Procedure:


• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) the label Off below FM Mono Int .

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select 0.5 kHz in the popup menu.


The display shows:

Figure 8-7. NICAM, Analog FM Sound

• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) the label -20 dBc in the lower row (sound carrier level of channel 2).

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select Off in the popup menu.



The digital NICAM sound is not available (sound carrier level CH 2 off).

The TV does not show a NICAM sound indication.

The TV reproduces a conventional sound with 0.5 kHz modulation in both channels.

Teletext, VPS, PDC, and WSS (Digital Services)

Teletext and Program Delivery Data (PDC)

Procedure:


RECALL 0 .


• Select the digital submenu.

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select Teletext B TOP 1 in the popup menu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) and select 8 lines in the popup menu.

8-12

The display shows:

Figure 8-8. Teletext Settings

• Set your TV to the Teletext function.


The TV shows the Index Page (Teletext Page 100):



8


• Check if the clock in the upper right corner is running and shows the same time as the clock of the generator (shown in the upper right corner in the support menu).

Depending on your TV additional symbols for page selecting are shown in the lower row of the screen.

The PDC data, Packet 8/30 Format 2, are included in the Teletext data; they are not visible on the screen.

8-13

54200

Users Manual


Procedure:

• Same settings as above

• Connect the scope to the

VIDEO OUT of the generator. Use a 75

Ω feedthrough termination.

• Set the scope to PAL (625 line system) and select TV line 16.

• Select an appropriate time base and amplitude scale.


The scope shows the following signal:

8-14

Figure 8-10. VPS Data in Line 16

Wide Screen Signalling Bits (WSS)

Procedure:

• Same connection as above

• Select TV line 23.

• Check in the digital submenu if the Wide Screen Signalling is set to Auto .



Figure 8-11. Wide Screen Signalling Bits



8

TV Standard NTSC


Procedure:

• Connect the

RF OUT of the TV Signal Generator to the antenna input of the TV. Use an appropriate connection cable, for example, the attached cable BNC to TV and the

F adapter.


RECALL 0.

• Press the standard softkey (F1) in the main menu.

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select country USA in the popup menu with the Predefined Country List to set the instrument to NTSC M .

(Instruments without PAL are automatically set to NTSC M after RECALL 0 ).



Figure 8-12. Generator Settings, NTSC Standard

• Set the TV to a vision carrier frequency of 471.25 MHz. If your TV does not support this frequency, set the generator to an appropriate frequency.

• Press the


• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) COL_100_0 .




PATTERN field.

8-15

54200

Users Manual


The TV shows the following pattern and reproduces a sound with 1 kHz modulation:

Figure 8-13. Combined Test Pattern NTSC



Patterns.'

• Press the

CHROMA ON/OFF key.


• Select


The TV shows an ellipse instead of the circle and four additional ellipses in the corners of the screen. Select Aspect Ratio 16:9 on your TV. The TV now shows geometrical circles.

8-16



8


• Press the




The TV shows the following pattern, moving from left to right. The three left lines flicker.





Procedure:














• Select the combined test pattern as described Page 8-15.



8-17

54200

Users Manual

Sound Part

BTSC Mono

Procedure:


• Connect the

RF OUT of the TV Signal Generator to the antenna input of the TV.



RECALL 0 .






The display shows:

8-18

Figure 8-15. BTSC Sound Settings



• Press the


• Press the enter softkey (F5) key to confirm the setting.




8

BTSC Stereo

Procedure:


• Press the

STEREO key.

The display shows:

Figure 8-16. BTSC Stereo Sound Settings




• Press the




Analog Sound, FM Korea

Mono Sound, FM Korea


RECALL 0 .



• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select country Korea in the popup menu with the Predefined Country List to set the instrument to NTSC M and FM Korea .



8-19

54200

Users Manual

The display shows:

8-20

Figure 8-17. Analog Sound Settings, NTSC M



• Press the




Analog Stereo, FM Korea

Procedure:


• Press the

STEREO key.

The display shows:

Figure 8-18. Analog Stereo Sound Settings, NTSC M



8




• Press the




Dual Sound, FM Korea

Procedure:


• Press the

DUAL/SAP key.





CH 1 ).



CH 2 ).


Closed Caption (Digital Service CC)

Procedure:


RECALL 0 .








• Select

CC Number 1 in the popup menu.

8-21

54200

Users Manual

The display shows:

Figure 8-19. Closed Caption Settings


• Set your TV to Closed Caption Number 1.


The TV shows the standard character set, transmitted in field 1, data channel 1, in a rollup style.

8-22

Figure 8-20. Displayed Characters in Closed Caption Mode

The displayed character style and the correct display of the extended characters, for example, À, É, Û, etc., depends on the decoder of your TV.



8

TV Standard SECAM


Procedure:

• Connect the

RF OUT of the TV Signal Generator to the antenna input of the TV. Use an appropriate connection cable, for example, the attached cable BNC to TV.


RECALL 0


• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select country France in the popup menu with the

Pre-defined Country List to set the instrument to SECAM L .



Figure 8-21. Generator Settings, SECAM Standard

• Set the TV to a vision carrier frequency of 471.25 MHz. If your TV does not support this frequency, set the generator to an appropriate frequency. Some older instruments need the Identification Lines for color reproduction. To generate this lines, select

Frame ID On in the standard submenu.


• Press the


• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2)

COL_100_0 .




PATTERN field.

8-23

54200

Users Manual


The TV shows the following pattern and reproduces a sound with 1 kHz modulation:

Figure 8-22. Combined Test Pattern, SECAM Standard



Patterns.'

• Press the

CHROMA ON/OFF key.


• Select


The TV shows an ellipse instead of the circle and four additional ellipses in the corners of the screen. Select Aspect Ratio 16:9 on your TV. Some modern TVs automatically change the Aspect Ratio controlled by the WSS bits. The TV now shows geometrical circles.

8-24



8


• Press the




The TV shows the following pattern, moving from left to right. If you do not use a

100 Hz TV receiver, the three left lines flicker.





Procedure:













• Select the combined test pattern as described Page 8-23.



8-25

54200

Users Manual

Sound Part

NICAM L Mono

Procedure:


• Connect the RF OUT of the TV Signal Generator to the antenna input of the TV.



RECALL 0 .






The display shows:

Figure 8-24. Sound Settings, NICAM L



• Press the




8-26



8

NICAM L Stereo

Procedure:


• Press the

STEREO key.

The display shows:

Figure 8-25. Stereo Sound Settings, NICAM L


The TV shows a 'Stereo' indication (depends on used TV) and reproduces a sound with 3 kHz modulation in the left channel ( CH 1 ). The right channel ( CH 2 ) reproduces no sound.

• Press the




8-27

54200

Users Manual

NICAM L, Conventional Analog AM Sound

Procedure:


• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) the label Off below AM Mono Int .

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select 0.5 kHz in the popup menu.


The display shows:

8-28

Figure 8-26. Analog AM Sound, NICAM L

• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) the label -27 dBc in the lower row (sound carrier level of channel 2).

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select Off in the popup menu.



The digital NICAM L sound is not available (sound carrier level CH 2 off).

The TV does not show a NICAM sound indication.

The TV reproduces a conventional sound with 0.5 kHz modulation in both channels.

Analog AM Sound (AM L)

Procedure:


RECALL 0 .




• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) NICAM L .

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select AM L in the popup menu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to confirm your setting and to return the main menu.




8

The display shows:

Figure 8-27. Analog AM Sound Settings



• Press the




Teletext, VPS, PDC, and WSS (Digital Services)

If you already have checked the Teletext function in the TV Standard PAL B/G, skip the following steps.

Teletext and Programme Delivery Data (PDC)

Procedure:


RECALL 0 .






• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select Teletext B TOP 1 in the popup menu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) and select 4 lines in the popup menu.

• Press the enter softkey (F5) to return to the digital submenu.

• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) VPS Data Set Off .

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select Data Set 7.


• Select with the é or ê softkey (F1 or F2) PDC Data Set Off .

• Press the edit softkey (F3) and select Data Set 7 .


8-29

54200

Users Manual

The display shows:

Figure 8-28. Teletext Settings

Set your TV to the Teletext function.


The TV shows the Index Page (Teletext Page 100):

8-30


• Check if the clock in the upper right corner is running and shows the same time as the clock of the generator (shown in the upper right corner in the support submenu).

Depending on your TV, additional symbols for page selecting are shown in the lower row of the screen.

The PDC data, Packet 8/30 Format 2, are included in the Teletext data; they are not visible on the screen.



8


Procedure:


• Connect the scope to the

VIDEO OUT of the generator. Use a 75

Ω feedthrough termination.

• Set the scope to PAL (625 line system) and select TV line 16.

• Select an appropriate time base and amplitude scale.



Figure 8-30. VPS Data in Line 16

Wide Screen Signalling Bits (WSS)

Procedure:

• Same connection as above.

• Select TV line 23.

• Select the digital submenu and set the Wide Screen Signalling to Auto .



Figure 8-31. Wide Screen Signalling Bits



8-31

54200

Users Manual

8-32

Appendices

Appendix

E

F

G

A

B

C

D

Title Page

TV Systems Used in Various Countries ............................................................. A-1

VHF/UHF-Channel Frequencies for Different TV Systems................................ B-1

Default Settings for Countries............................................................................ C-1

Spectras of TV Audio Systems .......................................................................... D-1

Nomenclature of Color Bar Signals ................................................................... E-1

Menu Trees ....................................................................................................... F-1

Pattern Popup Menus......................................................................................... G-1

Appendix A

TV Systems Used in Various Countries

A-1

54200

Users Manual

A-2

TV Systems Used in Various Countries A

COLOR

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

PAL

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL / SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

COUNTRY

Bahamas

Bahrain

Bangladesh

Barbados

Belarus

Belgium

Belize

Benin

Bermuda

Bhutan

Bolivia

Bosnia Herzegovina

Botswana

Brazil

Brunei

Bulgaria

Burkina Faso

Abu Dhabi

Afghanistan

Albania

Algeria

Andorra

Angola

Antigua and Barbuda

Antiles

Argentina

Armenia

Aryenuna

Australia

Austria

Azerbaijan

Azores

Azores (US Forces)

TV VHF

B

D

I

M

K1

M

B

M

B

D

B

M

K1

B

M

M

B

B

M

B

D

N

B

N

D

M

M

B

I

B

B

B

B

TV UHF TELETEXT

-

K

I

M

-

M

G

M

-

K

GH

M

K1

-

-

-

G

-

-

G

K

N

H

N

K

-

-

G

I

G

-

G

D

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B

B

-

-

-

-

B TOP

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

PDC SUBTITLING STEREO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

VPS TELETEXT

«

-

BTSC

-

-

FM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

FM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

PDC TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

CC

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

MTS USA

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Lines indicated in bold are directly selectable via the country popup menu of the instrument.

* 54200 Subtitling in Teletext B page 150

A-3

54200

Users Manual

COUNTRY

Curacao

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Dahomey

Denmark

Diego Garcia

Djibuti

Dominica

Dominican Republic

Dubai

Ecuador

Egypt

El Salvador

Equatorial Guinea

Estonia

Ethiopia

Burma

Burundi

Cambodia

Cameroon

Canada

Canary Islands

Central African Rep.

Chad

Chile

China P.R.

Colombia

Congo

Costa Rica

Côte d’Ivoire

Croatia

Cuba

TV VHF

D

B

M

B

M

B

M

B

B

M

K1

M

M

B

D

K1

M

K1

B

M

M

D

M

K1(D)

M

B

K1

K1

M

K1

M

B

COLOR

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

NTSC

PAL

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

PAL / SECAM

SECAM / PAL

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

SECAM

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

TV UHF TELETEXT

K

G

M

-

M

G

M

G

G

M

K1

M

M

G

K

K1

M

K1

G

M

M

D

M

K1(D)

M

-

K1

K1

M

K1

-

G

B

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

B

-

B

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

A

-

-

B

-

-

C

-

-

-

-

-

PDC SUBTITLING STEREO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

MTS USA

NICAM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

NICAM DK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

FM DK

-

PDC TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-



A-4


COUNTRY

Honduras

Hong Kong

Hungary

Iceland

India

Indonesia

Iran

Iraq

Guam

Guatemala

Guinea

Guinea Bissau

Guyana (French)

Guyana (Rep.)

Haiti

Hawaii

Falkland Islands

Faroe Islands

Fernando Po

Fiji

Finland

France

French Polynesia

Gabon

Gambia

Georgia

Germany

Ghana

Gibraltar

Greece

Greenland

Guadeloupe

COLOR

NTSC

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM / PAL

PAL / NTSC

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

SECAM

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

VPS

-

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TV UHF TELETEXT

G

G

G

-

K

G

I

-

-

-

-

G

K1

I

M

M

M

K1

H

G

G

G

I

K

K1

K1

G

L

-

-

I

G

-

-

A

-

B

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B TOP

-

B

A(B)

-

-

-

-

-

-

TV VHF

B

B

B

B

D

B

M

I

K1

B

M

M

K1

I

M

M

B

K1

B

B

B

B

I

D

B

L1

K1

K1

B

B

I

B

SUBTITLING STEREO

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

TELETEXT

«

NICAM L

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

FM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

MTS USA

-

NICAM I

TELETEXT

«

NICAM DK

TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-



A-5

54200

Users Manual

COUNTRY

Lebanon

Leeward Islands

Lesotho

Liberia

Libya

Liechtenstein

Lithuania

Luxembourg

Macao

Macedonia

Madagascar

Madeira

Malagasy

Malawi

Malaysia

Maldives

Mali

Ireland

Israel

Italy

Ivory Coast

Jamaica

Japan

Jordan

Kampuchea

Kazakhstan

Kenya

Kirgizstan

Korea North

Korea South

Kuwait

Kyrgystan

Latvia

COLOR

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

PAL / SECAM

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TV UHF TELETEXT

G

-

K1

G

-

-

-

I

G

G

G

K

GL

-

H

G

-

K

K

M

G

K

K

K

G

G

-

-

M

I

G

G

K1

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

D

B

-

B

B

TV VHF

B

B

K1

B

K1

K1

B

I

B

D

B

B

B

I

B

B

M

D

D

M

B

D

D

D

B

B

M

M

M

I

B

B

K1


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

TELETEXT

«

TELETEXT

«

-

NICAM I

FM BG

-

-

TELETEXT

«

MTS Japan

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

FM Mk

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

FM BG

-

-

FM BG

-

-



A-6


COUNTRY

Nepal

Netherlands

New Caledonia

New Zealand

Nicaragua

Niger

Nigeria

Norway

Okinawa

Oman

Pakistan

Panama

Papua New Guinea

Paraguay

Peru

Philippines

Poland

Malta

Martinique

Mauritania

Mauritius

Mexico

Micronesia

Midway Islands

Moldova

Monaco

Mongolia

Montenegro

Montserrat

Morocco

Mozambique

Myanmar (Birma)

Namibia

COLOR

NTSC

PAL

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

PAL / SECAM

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL / SECAM

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

SECAM

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

PDC

-

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TV UHF TELETEXT

M

M

G

N

KK

G

M

M

G

M

K1

-

G

K1

G

-

G

I

-

H

G

GL

K

G

M

M

K

M

M

G

-

K1 (B)

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

B

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TV VHF

M

M

B

N

DD

B

M

M

B

B

B

M

K1

K1

B

B

B

M

I

B

B

L1

D

B

M

M

D

M

M

B

K1

K1 (B)

B


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

FM BG

-

NICAM BG -

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

MTS Japan

-

-

-

-

MTS USA

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

-

-

-



A-7

54200

Users Manual

COUNTRY

Slovakia

Slovenia

Society Islands

Somalia

South Africa

Spain

Sri Lanka

St. Kitts & Nevis

Sudan

Surinam

Swaziland

Sweden

Switzerland

Syria

Tahiti

Taiwan

Portugal

Puerto Rico

Qatar

Reunion

Romania

Russian Fed.

Rwanda

Saba and Sarawak

Samoa

San Marino

Saudi Arabia

Senegal

Serbia

Seychelles

Sierra Leone

Singapore

TV VHF

K1

M

B

B

B

B

B

M

B

M

I

B

BK

B

K1

B

B

B

B

B

M

B

B

K1

K1

B

D

D

B

M

B

K1

COLOR

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

NTSC

PAL / SECAM

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

PAL / SECAM

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

PAL

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

SECAM

PAL

TV UHF TELETEXT

-

B

-

-

B TOP

-

-

B

B FLOF

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

M

G

H

G

G

-

-

G

-

I

G

GK

G

-

G

G

G

G

-

-

G

G

K1

(G)K

K

K1

G

G

M

G

K1

-

PDC

VPS

-

-

-

-

-

-

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-


-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

FM BG

-

FM BG

-

-

-

-

-

NICAM BG

TELETEXT

«

FM BG / FM K

FM BG

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

NICAM BG

TELETEXT

«

FM BG

-

-

CC

-

MTS USA



A-8


COLOR

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

SECAM

PAL

PAL

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

PAL

PAL

SECAM

NTSC

PAL / SECAM

PAL

COUNTRY

Uzbekistan

Vatican City

Venezuela

Vietnam

Virgin Islands

Yemen

Yugoslavia

Zaire

Zambia

Zanzibar

Zimbabwe

Tajikistan

Tanzania

Thailand

Tibet

Togo

Trinidad & Tobago

Tunisia

Turkey

Turkmenistan

Uganda

Ukraine

United Arab Emirates

United Kingdom

Upper Volta

Uruguay

USA

K1

B

B

B

I

B

B

M

B

M

K1

N

M

D

TV VHF

B

B

K1

M

B

D

D

B

D

B

D

B

PDC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

PDC

-

-

EDS

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TV UHF TELETEXT

G

K1

M

-

-

G

K

G

G

I

G

I

K1

-

M

K

G

K

G

K1

M

GG

G

G

-

K

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B FLOF

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

-

SUBTITLING

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

TELETEXT

«

-

-

-

-

CC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

FM BG

-

-

-

-

-

-

NICAM I

-

-

MTS USA

-

-

-

STEREO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-



A-9

Appendix B

VHF/UHF-Channel Frequencies for

Different TV Systems

B-1

54200

Users Manual

B-2

VHF/UHF-Channel Frequencies for Different TV Systems

VHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast

B

VHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast

Europe Europe

CCIR VHF SYSTEM B,C (7 MHz)

Vision Sound Range CH

3

4

1

2

7

8

5

6

9

10

11

12

48.25

55.25

62.25

53.75

60.75

67.75

47-54

54-61

61-68

175.25

180.75

174-181

182.25

187.75

181-188

189.25

194.75

188-195

196.25

201.75

195-202

203.25

208.75

202-209

210.25

215.75

209-216

217.25

222.75

216-223

224.25

229.75

223-230

FRANCE VHF SYSTEM L (8 MHz)

CH Vision Sound Range

A 1 47.75

41.25

B 2 55.75

49.25

41-49

49-57

C 3 63.75

57.25

57-65

C1 4 60.50

54.00

53.75- 61.75

1 5 176.00

182.50

174.75-182.75

2 6 184.00

190.50

182.75-190.75

3 7 192.00

198.50

190.75-198.75

4 8 200.00

206.50

198.75-206.75

5 9 208.00

214.50

206.75-214.75

6 10 216.00

222.50

214.75-222.75

Africa

AFRICA VHF SYSTEM I (8 MHz)

CH

6

7

4

5

8

9

10

11

12

13

Vision Sound Range

175.25

181.25

174-182

183.25

189.25

182-190

191.25

197.25

190-198

199.25

205.25

198-206

207.25

213.25

206-214

215.25

221.25

214-222

223.25

229.25

222-230

231.25

237.25

230-238

239.25

245.25

238-246

247.43

253.43

246-254

ITALY VHF SYSTEM B (7 MHz)

CH

A

B

C

Vision Sound

53.75

62.25

82.25

59.25

67.75

87.75

Range

52.5-59.5

61-68

81-88

D

E

F

175.25

180.75

174-181

183.75

189.25

182.5-189

192.25

197.75

191-198

G

H

201.25

206.75

200-207

210.25

215.75

209-216

H-1 217.25

222.75

216-223

H-2 224.25

229.75

223-230

6

7

8

9

CH

4

5

VHF SYSTEM K1 (8 MHz)


175.25

181.75

174-182

183.25

189.75

182-190

191.25

197.75

190-198

199.25

205.75

198-20

207.75

213.75

206-214

215.25

221.75

214-222

MOROCCO VHF SYSTEM B (7 MHz)


M-4 163.25

168.75

162-169

M-5 171.25

176.75

170-177

M-6 179.25

184.75

178-185

M-7 187.25

192.75

186-193

M-8 195.25

200.75

194-201

M-9 203.25

208.75

202-209

M-10 211.25

216.75

210-217

IRELAND VHF SYSTEM I (8 MHz)

CH

IA

IB

IC

ID

IE

IF

IG

IH

IJ

Vision Sound

45.75

53.75

61.75

51.75

59.75

67.75

Range

44.5-52.5

52.5-60.5

60.5-68.5

175.25

181.25

174-182

183.25

189.25

182-190

191.25

197.25

190-198

199.25

205.25

198-206

207.25

213.25

206-214

215.25

221.25

214-222

OIRT VHF SYSTEM D (8 MHz)

CH

R-I

R-II

R-III

R-IV

R-V


49.75

56.25

48.5-56.5

59.25

65.75

77.25

83.75

85.25

91.75

93.25

99.75

58-66

76-84

84-92

92-100

R-VI 175.25

181.75

174-182

R-VII 183.25

189.75

182-190

R-VIII 191.25

197.75

190-198

R-IX 199.25

205.75

198-206

R-X 207.25

213.75

206-214

R-XI 215.25

221.75

214-222

R-XII 223.25

229.75

222-230

B-3

54200

Users Manual

VHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast (cont)

Far East

AUSTRALIA VHF SYSTEM B

(7 MHz)

8

9

6

7

10

11


0 46.25

51.75

45-52

1

2

57.25

64.25

62.75

69.75

56-63

63-70

3

4

86.25

91.75

85-92

95.25

100.75

94-101

5 102.25

107.75

101-108

5 A 138.25

143.75

137-144

175.25

180.75

174-181

182.25

187.75

181-188

189.25

194.75

188-195

196.25

201.75

195-202

209.25

214.75

208-215

216.25

221.75

215-222

Far East

JAPAN VHF SYSTEM M

(6 MHz)

J 4

J 5

J 6

J 7

CH

J 1

J 2

J 3

Vision

91.25

Sound

95.75

97.25

101.75

Range

90-96

96-102

103.25

107.75

102-108

171.25

175.75

170-176

177.25

181.75

176-182

183.25

187.75

182-188

189.25

193.75

188-194

J 8

J 9

193.25

197.75

192-198

199.25

203.75

198-204

J 10 205.25

209.75

204-210

J 11 211.25

215.75

210-216

J 12 217.25

221.75

216-222

America

NORTH/SOUTH AMERICA

VHF SYSTEM M,N (6 MHz)

CH Vision Sound

A 02 55.25

59.75

A 03 61.25

A 04 67.25

65.75

71.75

Range

54-60

60-66

66-72

A05 77.25

A 06 83.25

81.75

87.75

76-82

82-88

A 07 175.25

179.75

174-180

A08 181.25

185.75

180-186

A 09 187.25

191.75

186-192

AIO 193.25

197.75

192-198

A I 1 199.25

203.75

198-204

A 12 205.25

209.75

204-210

A 13 211.25

215.75

210-216

CHINA VHF SYSTEM D

(8 MHz)

10

11

12

6

7

8

9

4

5


1

2

3

49.75

57.75

65.75

56.25

64.25

72.25

48.5-56.5

56-5-64.5

64.5-72.5

77.25

85.25

83.75

76.0-84.0

91.75

84.0-92.0

168.25

174.75

167-175

176.25

182.75

175-183

184.25

190.75

183-191

192.25

198.75

191-199

200.25

206.75

199-207

208.25

214.75

207-215

216.25

222.75

215-223

NEW ZEALAND VHF SYSTEM B

(7 MHz)

CH

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

9

10

Vision Sound

45.25

55.25

62.25

50.75

60.75

67.75

Range

44-51

51-61

61-68

175.25

180.75

174-181

182.25

187.75

181-188

189.25

194.75

188-195

196.25

201.75

195-202

203.25

208.75

202-209

210.25

215.75

209-216

217.25

222.75

216-223

B-4


UHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast

B

UHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast

Europe Europe

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

24

25

26

27

21

22

23

28

29

30

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

CH

CCIR UHF SYSTEM G,H,I,K,L (8 MHz)

Vision Sound Sound Sound

G,H I K,L

Range

471.25

476.75

477.25

477.75

470-478

479.25

484.75

485.25

485.75

478-486

487.25

492.75

493.25

493.75

486-494

495.25

500.75

501.25

501.75

494-502

503.25

508.75

509.25

509.75

502-510

511.25

516.75

517.25

517.75

510-518

519.25

524.75

525.25

525.75

518-526

527.25

532.75

533.25

533.75

526-534

535.25

540.75

541.25

541.75

534-542

543.25

548.75

549.25

549.75

542-550

551.25

556.76

557.25

557.75

550-558

559.25

564.75

565.25

565.75

558-566

567.25

572.75

573.25

573.75

566-574

575.25

580.75

581.25

581.75

574-582

583.25

588.75

589.25

589.75

582-590

591.25

596.75

597.25

597.75

590-598

599.25

604.75

605.25

605.75

598-606

607.25

612.75

613.25

613.75

606-614

615.25

620.75

621.25

621.75

614-622

623.25

628.75

629.25

629.75

622-630

631.25

636.75

637.25

637.75

630-638

639.25

644.75

645.25

645.75

638-646

647.25

652.75

653.25

653.75

646-654

655.25

660.75

661.25

661.75

654-662

663.25

668.75

669.25

669.75

662-670

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

49

50

51

52

46

47

48

53

54

55

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

CH

CCIR UHF SYSTEM G,H,I,K,L (8 MHz)

Vision Sound Sound Sound

G,H I K,L

Range

671.25

676.75

677.25

677.75

670-678

679.25

684.75

685.25

685.75

678-686

687.25

692.75

693.25

693.75

686-694

695.25

700.75

701.25

701.75

694-702

703.25

708.75

709.25

709.75

702-710

711.25

716.75

717.25

717.75

710-718

719.25

724.75

725.25

725.75

718-726

727.25

732.75

733.25

733.75

726-734

735.25

740.75

741.25

741.75

734-742

743.25

748.75

749.25

749.75

742-750

751.25

756.75

757.25

757.75

750-758

759.25

764.75

765.25

765.75

758-766

767.25

772.75

773.25

773.75

766-774

775.25

780.75

781.25

781.75

774-782

783.25

788.75

789.25

789.75

782-790

791.25

796.75

797.25

797.75

790-798

799.25

804.75

805.25

805.75

798-806

807.25

812.75

813.25

813.75

806-814

815.25

820.75

821.25

821.75

814-822

823.25

828.75

829.25

829.75

822-830

831.25

836.75

837.25

837.75

830-838

839.25

844.75

845.25

845.75

838-846

847.25

852.75

853.25

853.75

846-854

855.25

860.75

861.25

861.75

854-862

B-5

54200

Users Manual

UHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast (cont)

Far East

JAPAN UHF SYSTEM M

(6 MHz)

57

58

59

60

61

62

50

51

52

53

54

55

56


45 663.25

667.75

662-668

46

47

48

49

669.25

675.25

681.25

687.25

673.75

679.75

685.75

691.75

668-674

674-680

680-686

686-692

693.25

699.25

723.25

729.25

697.75

703.75

727.75

733.75

692-698

698-704

705.25

709.75

704-710

711.25

715.75

710-716

717.25

721.75

716-722

722-728

728-734

735.25

739.75

734-740

741.25

745.75

740-746

747.25

751.75

746-752

753.25

757.75

752-758

759.25

673.75

758-764

765.25

769.75

764-770

Far East

CHINA UHF SYSTEM K

(8 MHz)

29

30

31

32

33

25

26

27

28

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

18

19

20

21

22

23

24


13 471.25

477.75

470-478

14

15

16

17

479.25

487.25

495.25

503.25

485.75

493.75

501.75

509.75

478-486

486-494

494-502

502-510

511.25

519.25

551.25

559.25

517.75

525.75

557.75

565.75

510-518

518-526

527.25

533.75

526-534

535.25

541.75

534-542

543.25

549.75

542-550

550-558

558-566

607.25

615.25

623.25

631.25

639.25

647.25

671.25

679.25

687.25

695.25

703.25

711.25

719.25

727.25

613.75

621.75

629.75

637.75

645.75

653.75

655.25

661.75

654-662

663.25

669.75

662-670

677.75

685.75

693.75

701.75

709.75

717.75

725.75

733.75

606-614

614-622

622-630

630-638

638-646

646-654

670-678

678-686

686-694

694-702

702-710

710-718

718-726

726-734

Far East

57

58

59

60

61

53

54

55

56

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

CH

41

42

43

44

45

CHINA UHF SYSTEM K

(8 MHz)


735.25

741.75

734-742

743.25

749.75

742~750

751.25

757.75

750-758

759.25

765.75

758-766

767.25

773.75

766-774

775.25

781.75

774-782

783.25

789.75

782-790

791.25

797.75

790-798

799.25

805.75

798-806

807.25

813.75

806-814

815.25

821.75

814-822

823.25

829.75

822-830

831.25

837.75

830-838

839.25

845.75

838-846

847.25

853.75

846-854

855.25

861.75

854-862

863.25

869.75

862-870

871.25

877.75

870-878

879.25

885.75

878-886

887.25

893.75

886-894

895.25

901.75

894-902

903.25

909.75

902-910

911.25

917.75

910-918

919.25

925.75

918-926

927.25

933.75

926-934

935.25

941.75

934-942

943.25

949.75

942-950

951.25

957.75

950-958

B-6


UHF Channel Specifications - Broadcast

B


America

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

19

20

21

22

23

CH

14

15

16

17

18


UHF SYSTEM M (6 MHz)


471.25

475.75

470-476

477.25

481.75

476-482

483.25

487.75

482-488

489.25

493.75

488-494

495.25

499.75

494-500

501.25

505.75

500-506

507.25

511.75

506-512

513.25

517.75

512-518

519.25

523.75

518-524

525.25

529.75

524-530

531.25

535.75

530-536

537.25

541.75

536-542

543.25

547.75

542-548

549.25

553.75

548-554

555.25

559.75

554-56o

561.25

565.75

560-566

567.25

571.75

566-572

573.25

577.75

572-578

579.25

583.75

578-584

585.25

589.75

584-590

591.25

595.75

590-596

597.25

601.75

596-602

603.25

607.75

602-608

609.25

613.75

608-614

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

43

44

45

46

47

CH

38

39

40

41

42




615.25

619.75

614-620

621.25

625.75

620-626

627.25

631.75

626-632

633.25

637.75

632-638

639.25

743.75

638-644

645.25

749.75

644-650

651.25

755.75

650-656

657.25

661.75

656-662

663.25

667.75

662-668

669.25

673.75

668-674

675.25

679.75

674-680

681.25

685.75

680-686

687.25

691.75

686-692

693.25

697.75

692-698

699.25

703.75

698-704

705.25

709.75

704-710

711.25

715.75

710-716

717.25

721.75

716-722

723.25

727.75

722-728

729.25

733.75

728-734

735.25

739.75.

734-740

741.25

745.75

740-746

747.25

751.75

746-752

753.25

757.75

752-758



72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

67

68

69

70

71


62 759.25

763.75

758-764

63

64

65

66

765.25

771.25

777.25

783.25

769.75

775.75

781.75

787.75

764-770

770-776

776-782

782-788

789.25

795.25

793.75

799.75

788-794

794-800

801.25

805.75

800-806

807.25

811.75

806-812

813.25

817.75

812-818

819.25

823.75

818-824

825.25

829.75

824-830

831.25

835.75

830-836

837.25

841.75

836-842

843.25

847.75

842-848

849.25

853.75

848-854

855.25

861.25

867.25

873.25

879.25

885.25

859.75

865.75

871.75

877.75

883.75

889.75

854-860

860-866

866-872

872-878

878-884

884-890

B-7

54200

Users Manual


America



82

83

84

85

86

87

88

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

70

71

72

73

74


65 469.25

473.75

468-474

66

67

68

69

475.25

481.25

487.25

493.25

479.75

485.75

491.75

497.75

474-480

480-486

486-492

492-498

499.25

505.25

503.75

509.75

498-504

504-510

511.25

515.75

510-516

517.25

521.75

516-522

523.25

527.75

522-528

529.25

535.25

541.25

547.25

553.25

559.25

565.25

613.25

619.25

625.25

631.25

637.25

643.25

not used

533.75

539.75

545.75

551.75

557.75

563.75

569.75

617.75

623.75

629.75

635.75

641.75

647.75

528-534

534-540

540-546

546-552

552-558

558-564

564-570

571.25

575.75

570-576

577.25

581.75

576-582

583.25

587.75

582-588

589.25

593.75

588-594

595.25

599.75

594-600

601.25

605.75

600-606

607.25

611.75

606-612

612-618

618-624

624-630

636-642

642-648




96

97 not used not used

98 see A-2

99 see A-1

100 649.25

653.75

648-654

101 655.25

659.75

654-660

102 661.25

666.75

660-666

103 667.25

671.75

666-672

104 673.25

677.75

672-678

105 679.25

683.75

678-684

106 683.25

689.75

684-690

107 691.25

695.75

690-696

108 697.25

701.75

696-702

109 703.25

707.75

702-708

110 709.25

713.75

708-714

111 715.25

719.75

714-720

112 721.25

725.75

720-726

113 727.25

731.75

726-732

114 733.25

737.75

732-738

115 739.25

743.75

738-744

116 745.25

749.75

744-750

117 751.25

755.75

750-756

118 757.25

761.75

756-762

119 763.25

767.75

762-768

120 769.25

773.75

768-774

121 775.25

779.75

774-780

122 781.25

785.75

780-786

123 787.25

791.75

786-792

124 793.25

797.75

792-798

125 799.25

803.75

798-804

B-8


Special VHF Channels

B

Special VHF Channels

Europe Europe

CCIR VHF SYSTEM B,G (8 MHz)


E 2

E 3

48.25

55.25

E 4 62.25

S 01 69.25

53.75

60.75

67.75

74.75

47-54

54-61

61-68

68-75

S 02 76.25

S 03 83.25

81.75

88.75

75-82

82-89

S 1 105.25

110.75

104-111

S 2 112.25

117.75

111-118

S 3 119.25

124.75

118-125

S 4 126.25

131.75

125-132

S 5 133.25

138.75

132-139

S 6 140.25

145.75

139-146

S 7 147.25

152.75

146-153

S 8 154.25

159.75

153-160

S 9 161.25

166.75

160-167

S 10 168.25

173.75

167-174

E 5 175.25

180.75

174-181

E 6 182.25

187.75

181-188

E 7 189.25

194.75

188-195



E 8 196.25

201.75

195-202

E 9 203.25

208.75

202-209

E 10 210.25

215.75

209-216

E 11 217.25

222.75

216-223

E 12 224.25

229.75

223-230

S11 231.25

236.75

230-237

S 12 238.25

243.75

237-244

S 13 245.25

250.75

244-251

S 14 252.25

257.75

251-258

S 15 259.25

264.75

258-265

S 16 266.25

271.75

265-272

S17 273.25

278.75

272-279

S 18 280.25

285.75

279-286

S 19 287.25

292.75

286-293

S 20 294.25

299.75

293-300

S 21 303.25

308.75

302-310

S 22 311.25

316.75

310-318

S 23 319.25

324.75

318-326

S 24 327.25

332.75

326-334

Europe



S 25 335.25

340.75

334-342

S 26 343.25

348.75

342-350

S 27 351.25

356.75

350-358

S 28 359.25

364.75

358-366

S 29 367.25

372.75

366-374

S 30 375.25

380.75

374-382

S 31 383.25

388.75

382-390

S 32 391.25

396.75

390-398

S 33 399.25

404.75

398-406

S 34 407.25

412.75

406-414

S 35 415.25

420.75

414-422

S 36 423.25

428.75

422-430

S 37 431.25

436.75

430-438

S 38 439.25

444.75

438-446

S 39 447.25

452.75

446-454

S 40 455.25

460.75

454-462

S 41 463.25

468.75

462-470

S 40 455.25

460.75

454-462

S 41 463.25

468.75

462-470

Japan

JAPAN VHF SYSTEM M (6 MHz)

Range CH Vision Sound

C 13 109.25

113.75

C 14 115.25

119.75

C 15 121.25

125.75

C 16 127.25

131.75

C 17 133.25

137.75

C 18 139.25

143.75

C 19 145.25

149.75

C 20 151.25

155.75

C 21 157.25

161.75

C 22 165.25

169.75

C 23 223.25

227.75

C 24 231.25

235.75

C 25 237.25

241.75

C 26 243.25

247.75

C 27 249.25

253.75

C 28 253.25

257.75

C 29 259.25

263.75

Japan



C 30 265.25

269.75

C 31 271.25

275.75

C 32 277.25

281.75

C 33 283.25

287.75

C 34 289.25

293.75

C 35 295.25

299.75

C 36 301.25

305.75

C 37 307.25

311.75

C 38 313.25

317.75

C 39 319.25

323.75

C 40 325.25

329.75

C 41 331.25

335.75

C 42 337.25

341.75

C 43 343.25

347.75

C 44 349.25

353.75

C 45 355.25

359.75

C 46 361.25

365.75

Japan



C 47 367.25

371.75

C 48 373.25

377.75

C 49 379.25

383.75

C 50 385.25

389.75

C 51 391.25

395.75

C 52 397.25

401.75

C 53 403.25

407.75

C 54 409.25

413.75

C 55 415.25

419.75

C 56 421.25

425.75

C 57 427.25

431.75

C 58 433.25

437.75

C 59 439.25

443.75

C 60 445.25

449.75

C 61 451.25

455.75

C 62 457.25

461.75

C 63 463.25

467.75

B-9

54200

Users Manual

Special VHF Channels (cont)

America

USA VHF SYSTEM M (6 MHz)


2 2 55.25

59.75

3 3 61.25

65.75

4 4 67.25

71.75

5A 1 73.25

77.75

54-60

60-66

66-72

72-78

5 5 77.25

81.75

6 6 83.25

87.75

A-5 95 91.25

95.75

76-82

82-88

90-96

A-4 96 97.25

101.75

96-102

A-3 97 103.25

107.75

102-108

A-2 98 109.25

113.75

108-114

A-1 99 115.25

119.75

114-120

A 14 121.25

125.75

120-126

B 15 127.25

131.75

126-132 c 16 133.25

137.75

132-138

D 17 139.25

143.75

138-144

E 18 145.25

149.75

144-150

F 19 151.25

155.75

150-156

G 20 157.25

161.75

156-162

H 21 163.25

167.75

162-168

I 22 169.25

173.75

168-174

7 7 175.25

179.75

174-180

8 8 181.25

185.75

180-186

9 9 187.25

191.75

186-192

10 10 193.25

197.75

192-198

11 11 199.25

203.75

198-204

12 12 205.25

209.75

204-210

13 13 211.25

215.75

210-216

J 23 217.25

221.75

216-222

K 24 223.25

227.75

222-228

L 25 229.25

233.75

228-234

M 26 235.25

239.75

234-240

N 27 241.25

245.75

240-246

O 28 247.25

251.75

246-252

America



P 29 253.25

257.75

252-258

Q 30 259.25

263.75

258-264

R 31 265.25

269.75

264-270

S 32 271.25

275.75

270-276

T 33 277.25

281.75

276-282

U 34 283.25

287.75

282-288

V 35 289.25

293.75

288-294

W 36 295.25

299.75

294-300

AA 37 301.25

305.75

300-306

BB 38 307.25

311.75

306-312

CC 39 313.25

317.75

312-318

DD 40 319.25

323.75

318-324

EE 41 325.25

329.75

324-330

FF 42 331.25

335.75

330-336

GG 43 337.25

341.75

336-342

HH 44 343.25

347.75

342-348

II 45 349.25

353.75

348-354

JJ 46 355.25

359.75

354-360

KK 47 361.25

365.75

360-366

LL 48 367.25

371.75

366-372

MM 49 373.25

377.75

372-378

NN 50 379.25

383.75

378-384

OO 51 385.25

389.75

384-390

PP 52 391.25

395.75

390-396

QQ 53 397.25

401.75

396-402

RR 54 403.25

407.75

402-408

SS 55 409.25

413.75

408-414

TT 56 415.25

419.75

414-420

UU 57 421.25

425.75

420-426

VV 58 427.25

431.75

426-432

WW 59 433.25

437.75

432-438

AAA 60 439.25

443.75

438-444

BBB 61 445.25

449.75

444-450

America



CCC 62 451.25

455.75

450-456

DDD 63 457.25

461.75

456-462

EEE 64 463.23

467.75

462-468

65 469.25

473.75

468-474

66 475.25

479.75

474-480

67 481.25

485.75

480-486

68 487.25

491.75

486-492

69 493.25

497.75

492-498

70 499.25

503.75

498-504

71 505.25

509.75

504-510

72 511.25

515.75

510-516

73 517.25

521.75

516-522

74 523.25

527.75

522-528

75 529.25

533.75

428-534

76 535.25

539.75

534-540

77 541.25

545.75

540-546

78 547.25

551.75

546-552

79 553.25

557.75

552-558

80 559.25

563.75

558-564

81 565.25

569.75

564-570

82 571.25

575.75

570-576

83 577.25

581.75

576-582

84 583.25

587.75

582-588

85 589.25

593.75

588-594

86 595.25

599.75

594-600

87 601.25

605.75

600-606

88 607.25

611.75

606-612

89 613.25

617.75

612-618

90 619.25

623.75

618-624

91 625.25

629.75

624-630

92 631.25

635.75

630-636

93 637.25

641.75

636-642

94 643.25

647.75

642-648

B-10

Appendix C

Default Settings for Countries

C-1

54200

Users Manual

C-2

Appendix D

Spectras of TV Audio Systems

D-1

54200

Users Manual

D-2

Examples

Spectras of TV Audio Systems

Examples

D

D-3

Appendix E

Nomenclature of Color Bar Signals

E-1

54200

Users Manual

E-2

Nomenclature of Color Bar Signals E

The following nomenclature is used to identify and distinguish between color signals

(according to CCIR Rec. 471).

TV Systems

Color bars

Color bars

Color bars

Color bars

Color bars

Color bars

Signal Level Relative to Peak White (%)

A B C D

1 75 / 0 / 75 / 0

100 / 0 / 75 / 0

1 75 / 0 / 100 / 25

100 / 0 / 100 / 25

1 75 / 7.5 / 75 / 7.5

100 / 7.5 / 75 / 7.5

625 line systems

625 line systems

625 line systems

625 line systems

525 line systems

525 line systems

A The primary color signal level during transmission of the 'white' color bar, for example maximum value of E'R, E'G, and E'B.

B The primary color signal level during transmission of the 'black' color bar, for example minimum value of E'R, E'G, and E'B.

C The maximum level of the primary color signal during transmission of 'colored' color bars, for example maximum value of E'R, E'G, and E'B.

D The minimum level of the primary color signal during transmission of 'colored' color bars, for example minimum value of E'R, E'G, and E'B.

The color bar is generated by the three primary color signals Red, Green, and Blue

(E'R, E'G, and E'B). The signal amplitudes shown below, are expressed as a percentage of the white level, whereby peak white corresponds to 100%, and the blanking level to zero.

W: white, Y: yellow, C: cyan, G: green, M: magenta, R: red, B: blue, BK: black

E-3

Appendix F

Menu Trees

F-1

Menu Trees F

F-3

54200

Users Manual

F-4

Menu Trees F

F-5

54200

Users Manual

F-6

Menu Trees F

F-7

54200

Users Manual

F-8

Appendix G

Pattern Popup Menus

G-1

G-2

Pattern Popup Menus G

Center Cross

Off

Center_2%

Center_3%

Dots

Off

Dots_White

Dots_Black

Demodulation Test

Off

DEM_PAT1

DEM_PAT2

Purity

Off

PUR_White

PUR_Yellow

PUR_Cyan

PUR_Green

PUR_Red

PUR_Magenta

PUR_Blue

PUR_Black/Off

Crosshatch

Off

CH_White

CH_White_C

CH_White_TL

CH_White_C_TL

CH_Black

CH_Black_C

CH_Black_TL

CH_Black_C_TL

625 Line Systems

White

Off

White_0%

White_5%

White_15%

: in 5% steps to

:

White_90%

White_95%

White_100%

Color Bar

Off

COL_100_25

COL_75_25

COL_100_0

COL_75_0

COL_SMPTE

COL_Horz

COL_SP_100

COL_SP_75

525 Line Systems

White

Off

White_7.5IRE

White_15IRE

White_20IRE

: in 5IRE steps to

:

White_90IRE

White_95IRE

White_100IRE

G-3

54200

Users Manual

G-4

625 Line Systems

CTA_ADJ

Off

CTA_Size Small

CTA_Center 100%

CTA_Border 0%

525 Line Systems

CTA_ADJ

Off

CTA_Size Small

CTA_Center 100IRE

CTA_Border 7.5IRE

625 Line Systems

CTA_Border

0%

50%

100%

525 Line Systems

CTA_Border

7.5 IRE

53.75 IRE

100 IRE

VCR

Off

VCR_PAT1

VCR_PAT2

VCR_RES_Std

VCR_RES_Hi

VCR_Write

Digital Scan

Off

DIGI_ADC1

DIGI_ADC2

DIGI_Move

DIGI_SCAN1_S

DIGI_SCAN1_M

DIGI_SCAN2_S

DIGI_SCAN2_M

DIGI_SCAN3_S

DIGI_SCAN3_M

625 Line Systems

CTA Center

0%

5%

15%

: in 5% steps

:

90%

95%

100%

525 Line Systems

CTA Center

7.5 IRE

15 IRE

20 IRE

: in 5 IRE steps

:

90 IRE

95 IRE

100 IRE

Diverse

Off

EHT Test

IRS 17

CTA Size

Small

Medium

Large


For details see Chapter 4, Description and Applications of the Test Patterns

Pattern Abbreviation

Center Cross

Center_2%

Center_3%

White or black cross with 2% overscan indication

White or black cross with 3% overscan indication

Dots

Dots_White

Dots_Black

White dots on black background

Black dots on white background

Crosshatch

CH_White

CH_White_C

CH_White_C_TL

CH_Black

CH_Black_C

CH_Black_C_TL

White crosshatch on black background

White crosshatch with color burst

White crosshatch with color burst and Top Left indication

Black crosshatch on white background

Black crosshatch with color burst

Black crosshatch with color burst and Top Left indication

White

White_7.5IRE

White_15IRE

White_100IRE

White_0%

White_5%

White_15%

White_20%

White_100%

White fullfield pattern

White level 7.5 IRE (525 lines systems)

White level 15 IRE (525 lines systems)

in 5 IRE steps to

White level 100 IRE (525 lines systems)

White level 0% (625 lines systems)




in 5% steps to


Demodulation Test

DEM_PAT1

DEM_PAT2

Demodulator test. Pattern depends on TV system.

Demodulator test. Pattern depends on TV system.

G-5

54200

Users Manual

Purity

PUR_White

PUR_Yellow

PUR_Cyan

PUR_Green

PUR_Red

PUR_Magenta

PUR_Blue

PUR_Black/Off

Full field, white pattern

Full field, yellow pattern

Full field, cyan pattern

Full field, green pattern

Full field, red pattern

Full field, magenta pattern

Full field, blue pattern

Full field, black pattern

Color Bar

COL_100_25

COL_75_25

COL_100_0

COL_75_0

COL_SMPTE

COL_Horz

COL_SP_100

COL_SP_75

Full field. Level 100/0/100/25

Full field. Level 75/0/100/25

Full field. Level 100/0/75/0 for 625 Line Systems

100/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 Line Systems

Full field. Level 75/0/75/0 for 625 Line Systems

75/7.5/75/7.5 for 525 Line Systems

Three horizontal bars according to SMPTE EG 1-1990

Eight horizontal bars with different colors

Split field. 2/3 color bar, 1/3 purity. White level 100%

Split field. 2/3 color bar, 1/3 purity. White level 75%

CTA_ADJ

CTA_Size Small

CTA_Center 100%

CTA_Border 0%

Color Temperature Adjustment

Center size selecting: Small, Medium, or Large

Luminance level for white center

Luminance level for black border

CTA Center

0%

5%

10%

100%

CTA Center

7.5IRE

15IRE

100IRE

CTA_Border

0%

50%

100%

For 625 Line Systems

Luminance level 0%

Luminance level 5%

Luminance level 10%

in 5% steps to

Luminance level 100%


Luminance level 7.5 IRE

Luminance level 15 IRE in 5 IRE steps to

Luminance level 100 IRE


Luminance level 0%

Luminance level 50%

Luminance level 100%

G-6


CTA_Border

7.5IRE

53.75IRE

100IRE

VCR

VCR_PAT1

VCR_PAT2

VCR_RES_Std

VCR_RES_Hi

VCR_Write

Digital Scan

DIGI_ADC1

DIGI_ADC2

DIGI_Move

DIGI_SCAN1_S

DIGI_SCAN1_M

DIGI_SCAN2_S

DIGI_SCAN2_M

DIGI_SCAN3_S

DIGI_SCAN3_M

Diverse

EHT Test

IRS17




Luminance level 100 IRE

Two black and one white vertical bars

Three horizontal bars with different contents and one black horizontal bar with moving white square

Pattern for Standard Resolution Test (2.8 MHz burst)

Pattern for High Resolution Test (5 MHz burst)

Red field to adjust writing current of VCRs

Eight horizontal bars with different ramps

Five times three horizontal bars with different ramps

Moving white vertical bar on black

Four different horizontal white lines on black (still)

Four different horizontal white lines on black (moving)

Four different vertical white lines on black (still)

Four different vertical white lines on black (moving)

Five groups of four white lines ±45°shifted (still)

Five groups of four white lines ±45° shifted (moving)

Black border and toggling center between white and black

Visible pattern of the Insertion Reference Signal in line 17

G-7

54200

Users Manual

G-8

Index

—<—

<NR1>, 6-21

<NR2>, 6-21

<NR3>, 6-21

<NRf>, 6-21

—3—

3-wire connection, 6-12

—A—

Acceptor handshake, 6-6

Accessories, 7-23

ADC Check, 4-65, 4-66, 7-9

AM modulation, 5-38

Analog mono sound, 5-38

Analog stereo sound, 5-39

Antiope, 5-10, 7-16

Aspect Ratio, 6-29, 7-4

Attenuation, 7-5

Audio, 7-10, 7-11

Audio input, 3-18, 7-11

Audio output, 3-18, 5-38, 5-41, 7-10

Audio signals, 5-39

Audio/Video input, 3-19

Audio/Video output, 3-19

—B—

Base band, 7-15

Baud rate, 6-9, 6-11, 7-20

Bi-phase coding, 7-16

Bi-phase modulation, 7-17

Bit-rate, 7-14

Blanking level, 7-7, 7-19, 7-20

Brief Checking Procedure, 3-3, 3-4

Brief functional test, 8-3

BTSC base band, 7-15

BTSC compressed, 7-15

BTSC Compressor, 5-48

BTSC Mixed, 5-60

BTSC MPX, 7-10

BTSC sound, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50

BTSC sound system, 5-48

BTSC Test Modes, 5-53

Built-in options, 1-5

—C—

Calibration, 1-9

Carrier frequency, 7-7

Carrier level setting, 3-9

CC Number, 5-35

CC1 Service, 5-32, 5-35

CCIR System, 7-16, 7-17

Center Cross, 4-43, 7-8

Center indication, 7-8

Character set, 5-9, 5-10, 5-13

Checkerboard, 4-47, 7-9

Chroma amplitude, 6-28

Chroma amplitude setting, 4-26

Chroma signal, 3-15

Chrominance, 7-7, 7-19

Circle, 4-42, 7-8

Clock cracker, 5-9, 5-10

Closed Caption, 7-24

Closed Caption (CC), 4-14, 5-32, 6-36, 7-18

Closed Caption, function verification, 8-21

Color Bar, 4-57, 7-8, 7-9

Color Temperature, 7-9

Combined test patterns, 3-12, 4-71

Common Commands, 6-16

Common system functions, 6-3

Composite sync, 5-64

Connectors, 3-13

1

54200

Users Manual

Control elements, 3-13

Corner circles, 7-8

Country, 6-23

Crosshatch, 4-46

Current settings, 4-3, 4-35

CVBS SYNC, 7-4

CVBS Video, 7-4

—D—

Damage, 1-5

Data bits, 6-11, 7-20

Data Terminal Equipment, 6-11

Decoder pattern, 7-14

Default settings, 4-38

DEM pattern, 4-49

Demodulator pattern, 7-14

Demodulator Test, 7-9

Deviation, 7-12, 7-13, 7-15

Device clear, 6-12

Device clear function, 6-6

Device functions, 6-3

Device setting queries, 6-40

Device Specific Messages, 6-21

DIDON, 5-10

Digital data, 4-39

Digital Data query, 6-42

Digital menu, 4-14

Digital Scan, 7-9

Digital Services, 4-14, 7-16

Dimensions and weight, 7-22

Display, 3-13, 3-16

Display mode, 6-39

Diverse, 4-70, 7-9

Dots, 4-45, 7-8

Double sideband AM, 7-6

Dual sound, 5-39, 5-42, 7-11

—E—

EHT Test, 4-69, 7-9

Electrostatic discharge, 7-21

EMC emission, 7-21

EMC immunity, 7-21

Environmental Conditions, 7-21

Error messages, 3-3, 6-50

EURO AV, 7-4, 7-10, 7-11, 7-19

EURO AV Control Voltages, 7-4

Extension packet X/26, 5-7

External sound modes, 5-62

External sound modulation, 5-61

External video modulation, 5-60

—F—

Fast Blanking, 7-5

Fast transient, 7-21

FASTEXT, 5-5

2

FAW, 5-42, 5-43

Feed through capability, 3-16

Feedthrough Connection, 7-20

Field Synchronization, 7-4

FLOF, 5-5

FM A2, 5-39, 5-40, 5-56, 5-58, 5-62

FM Germany, 5-40, 5-56, 5-58, 5-62

FM Korea, 5-40, 5-58, 5-62

FM modulation, 5-38

FM Stereo Pilot, 7-10

Frame Alignment Word. See FAW

Frame Identification, 6-25

FREQ key, 4-7, 4-15

Freq. deviation, 7-8

Front panel, 1-3, 3-13 fucntion verification, 8-23

Full Field Color Bar, 4-57

Full Level-One Features. See FLOF

Function verification, 8-5, 8-15

Fuses, 1-10

—G—

Go to local, 6-12

Go to remote control, 6-12

Greyscale, 4-49, 7-9

Group Delay, 6-24, 7-6

—H—

Handshake, 7-20

Handshake procedure, 6-6

Hardware connection, 6-11

Hardware handshake, 6-11

High Resolution Test, 4-64

Horizontal Color Bar, 4-60, 7-9

—I—

Identification frequency, 7-13

IEEE Address Popup Menu, 6-5

IEEE-488 bus connector, 3-17

IEEE-488 bus interface, 6-3, 7-20

IF sound carrier signal, 3-18

Index page, 5-4, 5-9

Input power module, 3-17

Installed option, 1-7

Instrument address, 6-4

Instrument configuration, 6-7

Instrument default settings, 6-17

Interface communication configuration, 6-7

Interface functions, 6-3, 6-6, 6-12

Interface selection, 6-8

Internal operations, 6-17

IRS17, 4-70

Isolation transformer, 1-11

—K—

Keyboard, 4-6

Korean Stereo, 5-40

—L—

Label Channel Identifier, 5-23

Labeling, 7-17

LCI, 5-23

LEVEL key, 4-7, 4-18

Level range, 6-23

LF bandwidth, 5-39

Line 21 Data Service, 5-32, 5-33

Line connector, 1-10

Line frequency, 7-22

LINE SYNC, 7-4

Line voltage, 7-22

Listener function, 6-6

Local lock out, 6-6, 6-12

Local time offset, 6-39

Luminance, 7-4, 7-7, 7-19

Luminance level selection, 4-34

Luminance signal amplitude, 7-19

—M—

Main channel, 7-10, 7-15

Main menu, 3-4, 4-3

Maintenance, 1-9

Manual settings, 4-9

Memory registers, 4-35

Message communication functions, 6-3

Message Terminator, 6-13

Modulation, 7-5, 7-6, 7-12, 7-13, 7-15

Modulation frequency setting, 3-11

Modulation matrix, 7-12, 7-13

Mono carrier, 7-10

Mosaic graphics, 5-9

Moving Block, 4-67, 5-16, 7-9

MTBF, 7-21

MTS input, 5-52, 5-62, 5-63

MTS Multiplex, 7-11

MTS multiplex input, 3-18

Multi Labelling, 5-22, 5-23

Multiburst, 4-48, 7-8, 7-9

—N—

NICAM amplitude, 6-34

NICAM Clock, 7-11

NICAM data, 5-46, 5-47, 7-11

NICAM de-emphasis, 5-46

NICAM output, 5-46, 7-11

NICAM sound, 5-44, 5-61, 7-11

NICAM source, 6-35

NICAM Test Modes, 5-46

NICAM test signal, 5-46

Index (continued)

NICAM-728, 5-42

Nominal line frequency, 1-10

Nominal voltage range, 1-10

Numerical input, 4-15, 4-18, 4-22, 4-26

Numerical keypad, 4-7

—O—

Operating position, 1-11

Out of Range message. See Error message

Output of NICAM sound, 3-18

Overscan indication, 7-8

—P—

Page Header Control Bits, 5-9, 5-13

Page update, 5-9

PAL, function verification,, 8-5

Parity, 6-11

Parity check, 7-20

Pattern combinations, 4-31, 7-9

PATTERN keys, 4-6, 4-30

Pattern parameter, 3-11

Pattern parameter selection, 4-31

Pattern selection, 4-30

Patterns, 7-8

PDC, 4-14, 6-36

PDC Data Set, 5-23

PDC description, 5-22

PDC memory location, 5-8

PDC Preselection data, 5-7

PDC Program Title, 5-24

PDC test data, 5-8

PDC, function verification, 8-12, 8-29

Performance Characteristics, 7-3

Phase tolerance, 7-8

PIL, 5-24, 5-30

Pilot carrier, 5-48

Pilot carrier frequency, 7-13

Pilot signal, 7-11

Pilot subcarrier, 7-15

PLUGE, 4-56, 7-8, 7-9

Polarity, 7-4, 7-6, 7-19

Power cable, 1-10, 7-23

Power consumption, 7-22

Power Requirements, 7-22

Power switch, 3-13

Pre-defined country list, 3-5, 4-7

Pre-emphasis (FM), 6-34, 7-12

Preselection Function, 5-7, 5-22, 5-23

Program message, 6-21

Program Message Syntax, 6-13

Programme Delivery Control, 5-22

Programme Identification Label. See PIL

Programming examples, 6-43

Progressive Scan Check, 4-67, 4-68, 5-16, 7-9

Protective earth conductor, 1-9

PSF, 5-7, 5-23

Purity, 4-55, 7-8

3

54200

Users Manual

—Q—

QPSK modulation, 5-43, 7-14

Queries, 6-16

—R—

R G B output, 3-17

Rack mount adapter, 7-24

Radio frequency output, 3-16

Radio interference, 1-11, 6-11

Range exceedings. See Error messages

RCF, 5-23

Readout, 7-5

Real Time Clock, 5-20, 6-39

Rear panel, 1-3

Recalibration interval, 7-21

Recall, 3-14, 4-37

Recall command, 6-21

RECALL key, 4-7, 4-37

Recording Control Function, 5-23

Register 0, 4-38

Repair, 1-9

Reserve Sound Switching Flag. see RSSF

Reset command, 6-17

Residual carrier, 6-24, 7-6

Resolution Test, 7-9

RF carrier, 4-15

RF carrier frequency, 3-8, 3-14

RF Frequency, 6-22

RF level, 4-18, 6-22

RF level setting, 3-14

RF query, 6-40

RF sync level, 7-6

RGB Outputs, 7-19

RGB, YC, 7-19

RS-232 configuration, 6-9

RS-232 connector, 3-17

RS-232 Interface, 6-7, 7-20

RSSF, 5-44, 6-34, 7-14

—S—

S1 Modulation, 5-44, 5-56, 5-58, 7-12, 7-15

S2 Modulation, 5-45, 5-57, 5-59, 7-13, 7-15

S3 Modulation, 5-45, 5-56, 5-58, 7-12

Safety instructions, 1-9

Safety requirements, 7-3

Safty and EMC Requirements, 7-3

SAP signal, 5-57, 5-59, 6-35, 7-15

SAP sub channel, 7-15

SAP subcarrier frequency, 7-15

Save, 4-35

Save command, 6-21

SCART CVBS, 6-30

SCART output, 6-30

SCART/Euro-AV connector, 3-19

SECAM system, 5-12

4

Second Audio Program, 5-48

Self-test routine, 3-3, 8-4

Separator, 6-21

Service installable options, 7-24

Service Manual, 7-24

Service Request, 6-14, 6-20

Signalling method, 7-16

SMPTE Color Bar, 4-59, 7-8

Softkeys, 3-13, 4-3, 4-7

Sound, 7-10

Sound carrier, 7-10

Sound carrier 1, 7-12

Sound carrier 2, 7-12, 7-14

Sound carrier amplitude, 6-33

Sound carrier frequencies, 5-40, 5-42, 7-11,

7-12

Sound carrier level, 5-38, 7-10

Sound channel, 3-15

Sound frequencies, 5-38

Sound IF output, 5-38, 5-41, 7-10

SOUND keys, 4-13

Sound mode, 6-31

Sound mode settings, 4-12

Sound modes, 3-15 sound modulation, 3-15

Sound modulation frequency, 6-32

Sound operating modes, 5-56

Sound output, 5-38, 5-41, 7-10

Sound query, 6-41

Sound settings, 3-10, 4-12

Sound source, 6-31

Sound submenu, 4-5

Sound system, 3-6, 5-41, 5-44, 5-51, 6-31

Sound, function verification, 8-8, 8-18, 8-26

Source handshake, 6-6

Specifications, 7-1, 7-3, 7-21

Spectral purity, 7-5

Split Field Color Bar, 4-58

Standard Event Status Register, 6-15

Standard Resolution Test, 4-64

Status and Event, 6-20

Status Registers, 6-14

Step function, 4-17, 4-20, 4-24, 4-28

Step keys, 3-14

Stereo, 7-10

Stereo sub channel, 7-15

Stereo subcarrier frequency, 7-15

Stereo/Dual, 7-12

Stop bits, 6-11, 7-20

Store, 3-14, 4-35

STORE key, 4-7, 4-35

Stored settings, 4-37

Submenu for Digital Services, 4-5

Support submenu, 4-6

Survey of pages, 5-4

Synchronization, 6-19, 7-4, 7-7, 7-19

Synchronization outputs, 3-17, 5-64, 7-4

System data, 6-16

System Mk, 7-13

System query, 6-40

—T—

T1 Service, 5-36

Talker function, 6-6

Teletext, 4-14, 6-35

Teletext A, 5-12

Teletext Auto, 5-12

Teletext B, 5-3, 5-5, 5-12

Teletext data, 5-12, 5-13

Teletext Data Packet 8/30, 5-25

Teletext DIDON ANTIOPE, 5-10, 7-16

Teletext lines, 4-14, 6-36

Teletext pages, 5-9

Teletext UK, 5-3, 7-17

Teletext, function verification, 8-12, 8-29

Temperature, 7-9, 7-21

Terrestrial RF Carrier, 7-5

Test 1, 7-14

Test 2, 7-14

Test 3, 7-14

Test equipment, 3-4, 8-3

Test pattern indication, 4-30

Test patterns, 3-15, 4-30

Text, 4-39

Text Service (T), 5-32

TIMER block, 5-5, 5-7

TO FRONT, 7-20

TO REAR, 7-20

TOP (Table of Pages), 5-3

Top-left indication (TL), 4-46, 7-8

Transport method, 5-7

Triggering, 5-64

TTX CC Number, 5-34

TTX System popup, 5-12, 5-34

TV channel, 3-9

TV patterns, 6-25

TV standard, 4-7, 6-24

TV standard submenu, 4-4

TV system, 3-15, 4-7

TV system settings, 4-9

—U—

UDT, 5-8, 5-21

Universal Date and Time. See UDT

Unmodulated carrier, 7-14

Unpacking, 1-9

—V—

VCR Test, 4-62, 7-9

Video, 7-7

Video amplitude, 6-28

Video amplitude setting, 3-7, 4-22

Video and RF, 7-4

Video component output, 3-17

Video input, 3-16, 7-6

VIDEO keys, 4-11

Video modulation, 3-15, 7-6

Video outputs, 3-16, 7-4

Video polarity, 6-30

Video Programme System, 5-26, 7-17

Video query, 6-41

Video Recorder Programming, 5-5, 5-7

Video settings, 4-10

Video signal, 3-15

Video source, 6-28

Video source settings, 4-11

Video standard, 3-6

Video submenu, 3-7, 4-4

Video synchronization, 6-30

Video, function verification, 8-5, 8-15, 8-23

Vision carrier, 5-60

Vision carrier frequency, 7-5

Vision carrier frequency settings, 4-15

Vision carrier level settings, 4-18

VPS, 4-14, 6-37, 7-17, 7-24

VPS data line, 5-26

VPS Data Set, 5-27

VPS description, 5-26

VPS Program Title, 5-28

VPS, function verification, 8-14, 8-31

VPS/PDC option, 5-6, 5-7

VPT, 5-5

—W—

Warming-up time, 7-21

White, 4-48, 7-7, 7-8

Wide Screen Signalling (WSS), 4-14, 5-14,

6-38, 7-16

Writing Current, 7-9

Writing Current Adjustment, 4-64

WSS Auto mode, 5-16

WSS data, 6-38

WSS manual mode, 5-17

WSS signal, 5-15, 7-16

WSS Status Bits, 5-14, 5-18

WSS, function verification, 8-14, 8-31

—Y—

Y/C output, 3-19, 7-19

YCrCb output, 7-19

Index (continued)

5

54200

Users Manual

6

Manual Supplement

Manual Title : 54200/54100 Users Manual

Part Number : 4822 872 10186

Print Date : 12/1/96

Revision/Date: 15/1/97 (rev. 2)

Supplement Issue : 2

Part Number : 4822 872 08569

Issue Date:

Page Count

02/11/00

8

This supplement contains information necessary to ensure the accuracy of the above manual.

This manual supplement is valid for the undermentioned manuals:

Fluke 54100: 4822 872 10186 Users Manual English

4822 872 10187 Users Manual German

4822 872 10188 Users Manual French

Fluke 54200: 4822 872 10182 Users Manual English

4822 872 10183 Users Manual German

4822 872 10184 Users Manual French

© 1999 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the Netherlands

MSU210186.0-2



54200/54100 Users Manual Manual Supplement

1

Manual Supplement 54200/54100 Users Manual

SUPPLEMENT FOR USERS MANUAL.

Extensions of Fluke Model 54200/54100 User Interface.

The popup menus under the keys DIVERSE, WHITE, and COLOR TEMP have had a number of extensions. There are also extensions to the GREYSCALE pattern and to CLOSED CAPTION:

DIVERSE:

- The selection SINX/X has been added. This selection gives a black & white test pattern: the left half of the screen is black with a vertical white line in the middle; the right half of the screen is white with a vertical black line in the middle (see figure).

This type of test pattern has been added to check bandwidth and phase behaviour of a videotransmission system like e.g. a video amplifier. The narrow white line on the black background and the narrow black line on the white background result in narrow pulses to be applied to a video system under test. These so-called SINX/X pulses consist of multiple frequencies with a flat amplitude across the total bandwidth.

- Four extra selections OPT_1 .. OPT_4 are added. These selections are intended for future extensions: they are not active and therfore presented in a shaded tone. OPT stands for OPTIONAL.

WHITE:

The step ‘White_10%’ has been added for the systems PAL and SECAM.

COLOR TEMP:

The step ‘10%’ has been added under the key COLOR TEMP and menu selection ‘CTA_Center’. This is valid for the systems PAL and SECAM.

2


NEW REMOTE CONTROL COMMANDS.

The following remote control commands have been added in relation with the new functions (See also the pages 6-25 .. 6-27 of the Users Manual):

Pattern

SINX/X

White 10%

White 100%

Optional 1

Optional 2

Optional 3

Optional 4

Off

Long form

PATTERN SINX_X

PATTERN WH_10

PATTERN WH_100

PATTERN OPT_1

PATTERN OPT_2

PATTERN OPT_3

PATTERN OPT_4

PATTERN OFF

Short form

PAT S

PAT WH_10

PAT WH_100

PAT OPT_1

PAT OPT_2

PAT OPT_3

PAT OPT_4

PAT OF (PAT O not possible!).

Note: the Remote Control Interface ignores characters that follow on to a valid command. This means that e.g. WH_101 is interpreted as WH_10 and WH_100XYZ is seen as WH_100. On the other hand WH_99 results in an error message.

GREYSCALE.

The greyscale pattern consists of 11 vertical bars of increasing brightness on the TV screen, as per the specification of the pattern in section 7 (page 7-9) which says the pattern contains 10 intensity steps.

In earlier versions of the generator, 10 vertical bars were displayed on the TV-screen, using only 9 intensity steps.

As a result, the pattern description and figures throughout chapter 4 are not correct. The TV screen will show 11 vertical bars of increasing intensity instead.

CLOSED CAPTION DATA EXTENDED WITH V-CHIP DATA.

Closed Caption (CC) is extended with a limited number of Data Packets according “EIA-608 - line 21

Extended Data Services packets”, a system also referred to as ‘the V-chip system’.

For this purpose, existing Closed Caption Numbers or ‘pages’ have been extended with fixed EDS data.

The data packets represent ‘MPAA Ratings’ and ‘TV Parental Guideline’ information in the table below.

This data can be used to perform a basic test of the V-chip decoder in a TV-set.

See the pages 5-32 through 5-38 for further details on the CC system and the data transmitted.

If CC-Sequence is selected, and the generator generates the individual CC-numbers sequencially, all

EDS data sets will also sequentially be activated.

Extended Data Packets for the V-Chip system have been added to the following data sets:

6

7

4

5

Set Hex

1

2

3 01

01

8

01

01

EDS data

(non)

(non)

05 41 40 0F 6A MPAA rating 'G'

05 46 40 0F 65 MPAA rating 'X'

(non)

(non)

05 48 41 0F 62 TV-Parental Guide rating 'TV-Y'

05 48 66 0F 3D TV-Parental Guide rating 'TV-MA' + violence

Start

Content Advisory (‘V-chip’)

End

Checksum

EDS-data as contained in the Closed Caption Numbers.

3


ERGÄNZUNG ZUM BEDIENUNGS-HANDBUCH

Erweiterungen der Benutzeroberfläche der Fluke-Meßgeräte vom Typ 54200/54100.

Bei den Popup-Menüs unter den Tasten DIVERSE, WHITE und COLOR TEMP hat es einige

Ergänzungen gegeben. Es gibt auch Ergänzungen zum Testbild GRAUTREPPE und CLOSED CAPTION:

DIVERSE:

- Die Wahlmöglichkeit SINX/X wurde hinzugefügt. Wenn Sie diese Option wählen, erscheint ein

Schwarzweiß-Testbild: Die linke Hälfte des Schirms ist schwarz mit einer senkrechten weißen Linie in der Mitte; die rechte Hälfte des Schirms ist weiß mit einer senkrechten schwarzen Linie in der Mitte

(siehe Abbildung).

Dieser Typ von Testbild wurde hinzugefügt, um das Bandbreiten- und Phasenverhalten eines

Videoübertragungssystems wie z.B. eines Bildverstärkers zu testen. Die schmale weiße Linie auf dem schwarzen Hintergrund und die schmale schwarze Linie auf dem weißen Hintergrund bewirken, daß schmale Pulse an einem zu testenden Videosystem angelegt werden. Diese sogenannten

SINX/X-Pulse bestehen aus mehreren Frequenzen mit einer flachen Amplitude über die gesamte

Bandbreite.

zusätzliche Wahlmöglichkeiten OPT_1 .. OPT_4 wurden hinzugefügt. Diese Optionen sind für künftige Erweiterungen gedacht: Sie sind nicht belegt/aktiv und werden daher schattiert angezeigt.

OPT steht für OPTIONAL.

WHITE:

Für die Systeme PAL und SECAM wurde der Schritt ‘White_10%’ hinzugefügt.

COLOR TEMP:

Unter der Taste COLOR TEMP und der Menüauswahl ‘CTA_Center’ wurde der Schritt ‘10%’ hinzugefügt.

Dies gilt für die Systeme PAL und SECAM.

4


NEUE FERNBEDIENUNGSBEFEHLE.

Die folgenden Fernbedienungsbefehle wurden im Zusammenhang mit den neuen Funktionen hinzugefügt

(Siehe auch die Seiten 6-25 .. 6-27 des Bedienungs-Handbuchs):

Pattern

SINX/X

White 10%

White 100%

Optional 1

Optional 2

Optional 3

Optional 4

Off

Long form

PATTERN SINX_X

PATTERN WH_10

PATTERN WH_100

PATTERN OPT_1

PATTERN OPT_2

PATTERN OPT_3

PATTERN OPT_4

PATTERN OFF

Short form

PAT S

PAT WH_10

PAT WH_100

PAT OPT_1

PAT OPT_2

PAT OPT_3

PAT OPT_4

PAT OF (PAT O nicht möglich!)

Hinweis: Die Fernbedienungsschnittstelle übergeht Zeichen nach einem gültigen Befehl. Dies bedeutet, daß z.B. WH_101 als WH_10 interpretiert wird und daß WH_100XYZ als WH_100 gedeutet wird.

Dahingegen führt WH_99 zu einer Fehlermeldung.

GRAUTREPPE.

Die technischen Daten (Kapitel 7, Seite 7-9) zeigen daß das Testbild ‘Grautreppe’ besteht aus 10 Stufen mit linearem Anstieg. Das Resultat ist ein Testbild über den gesammten Bildschirm mit 11 vertikalen

Stufen von Schwarz bis Weiß.

Frühere Versionen der Generator stellen 10 vertikalen Stufen dar auf dem Bildschirm.

Es ist deshalb daß einigen Beschreibungen und Figuren von Testbilder in Kapitel 4 nicht ganz richtig sind.

Der Bildschirm der Fernseher wird 11 vertikalen Stufen von Schwarz bis Weiß zeigen.

CLOSED CAPTION (CC) FUNKTION AUSGEDEHNT.

Die Funktion Closed Caption ist ausgedehnt mit einem beschränkten Zahl von Datenpakete gemäß ‘EIA-

608 – line 21 Extended Data Services packets’ (EDS), ein System auch bekannt unter dem Name ‘V-chip’

System.

Die bereits existierende Closed Caption Dienste sind ausgedehnt mit fixierte EDS Datenpakete.

Die Datenpakete sind gemäß die Normen ‘MPAA Ratings’ und ‘TV Parental Guideline’ und werden gezeigt in die Tabelle an Seite 3.

Diese Datenpakete können verwendet werden um die ‘V-chip’ Dekoder in einem Fernsehgerät zu

überprüfen. Siehe die Seiten 5-34 bis 5-39 für weiteren Informationen über Closed Caption.

5


SUPPLEMENT AU MODE D’EMPLOI.

Extensions de l’interface utilisateur du modèle Fluke 54200/54100.

Un certain nombre d’extensions ont été prévues aux menus popup sous les touches DIVERSE, WHITE, et COLOR TEMP. Aussi les fonctions ECHELLE DES GRIS et CLOSED CAPTION sont agrandi:

DIVERSE: et blanc: La moitié gauche de l’écran est noire avec une ligne verticale blanche au milieu; la moitié droite de l’écran est blanche avec une ligne verticale noire au milieu (voir la figure).

Ce type de configuration d’essai a été prévu pour permettre de contrôler le comportement de la bande passante et de la phase d’un système de transmission vidéo tel qu’un amplificateur vidéo. La fine ligne blanche sur l’arrière-plan noir et la fine ligne noire sur l’arrière-plan blanc provoquent d’étroites impulsions qui sont envoyées à un système vidéo sous test. Ces impulsions, appelées impulsions SINX/X, sont formées de fréquences multiples avec une amplitude plate sur la totalité de la bande passante.

pour des extensions futures: elles ne sont pas actives et sont donc affichées ombrées. OPT est l’abréviation de OPTIONAL (optionnel).

WHITE:

Le pas ‘White_10%’ a été ajouté pour les systèmes PAL et SECAM.

6


COLOR TEMP:

Le pas ‘10%’ a été ajouté sous la touche COLOR TEMP et le menu de sélection ‘CTA_Center’ pour les systèmes PAL et SECAM.

NOUVELLES FONCTIONS DE TÉLÉCOMMANDES.

Les nouvelles fonctions de télécommande suivantes ont été ajoutées (Voir aussi sur les pages

6 –25 .. 6-27 du Mode d’Emploi):

Configuration

SINX/X

White 10%

White 100%

Optional 1

Optional 2

Optional 3

Optional 4

Off

Courte

PAT S

PAT WH_10

PAT WH_100

PAT OPT_1

PAT OPT_2

PAT OPT_3

PAT OPT_4

PAT OF

Longue

PATTERN SINX_X

PATTERN WH_10

PATTERN WH_100

PATTERN OPT_1

PATTERN OPT_2

PATTERN OPT_3

PATTERN OPT_4

PATTERN OFF (PAT O pas possible!)

Remarque: l’interface de télécommande ignore les caractères qui suivent une commande valide. Cela signifie par exemple que WH_101 est interprété comme WH_10 et WH_100XYZ comme WH_100.

D’autre part, WH_99 entraîne un message d’erreur.

ECHELLE DES GRIS.

Les caractéristiques techniques (Chapitre 7, Page 7-9) indiquent que l’échelle des gris contient 10 pas

échelonnés. Le résultat est un signal en paliers recouvrant tout l’écran et comportant 11 paliers verticaux du noir au blanc.

Dans les versions préliminaires du générateur, un signal en 10 paliers est affiché sur l’écran du téléviseur.

Cela est la raison que quelques descriptions et figures dans le chapitre 4 ne sont pas correctes.

L’écran du téléviseur affiche un signal en 11 paliers verticaux du noir au blanc.

CLOSED CAPTION (CC) AGRANDI.

Le fonction Closed Caption est agrandi avec un nombre limité de paquets d’information selon la norme

‘EIA-608 – line 21 Extended Data Services packets’ (EDS)’, un système aussi mentionné ‘V-chip data’.

Les paquets de champ ont été étendue avec paquets d’information EDS fixé. Les paquets d’information sont selon les normes ‘MPAA Ratings’ et ‘TV Parental Guideline’ comme indiqué dans le tableau sur la page 3.

Les paquets d’information peuvent être utilisé pour tester la fonction ‘detection de violence’ dans un téléviseur. Voir sur les pages 5-34 ... 5-39 pour information supplémentaire sur Closed Caption.

Si ‘CC-Sequence’ a été selectionné et le générateur produit les numméros CC sequentiel, tout les paquets d’information EDS ont été activé aussi sequentiel.

7